Manual Alvarion BreezeACCESS VL

BreezeACCESS® VL
System Manual
SW Version 4.0.27
February 2007
P/N 214484
Document History
Document History
Topic Description Version/Date Issued

FIPS 197 Optional support (under SW Version 4.0,
Sections: 4.2.5.6.3, 4.2.6.7 license) of FIPS 197 July 2006
compliant encryption
4.9 GHz B&B models AU/SU with 25dBi antennas SW Version 4.0,
Section: 1.4, 1.7.1, for point-to-point links in the July 2006
1.7.5.1.1, 1.7.5.4.1 4.9 GHz band
AUS functionality change AUS can support up to 8 SW Version 4.0,

Section: 1.2, 4.2.6.2.12 SU-3/SU-6 units (increased July 2006
from 5)
IDU-ODU Cable Update of maximum length SW Version 4.0,

Section 2.1.2 of IDU-ODU cable July 2006
Frequency configuration Improved mechanism for SW Version 4.0,

Section 4.2.6.2.3.1, automatic detection of July 2006
4.2.6.2.5 frequency/bandwidth.
Removed parameters: Sub
Band select (SU),
Frequency Subset Definition
(SU).
New parameters: User
Defined Frequency Subsets.
Transmit Power, Maximum Simplified configuration SW Version 4.0,

Transmit Power mechanism: A single July 2006
Section 4.2.6.2.8 parameter instead of per-
modulation level
parameters.
5.3 FCC limitations Update Tx Power limitations SW Version 4.0,

Section 4.2.6.2.4.1 for compliance with FCC July 2006
regulations
Per SU Distance Learning New feature SW Version 4.0,

Section 4.2.5.6.2, 4.2.6.2.10 July 2006
ATPC Delta from Minimum Default values updated SW Version 4.0,

SNR Level July 2006
Section 4.2.6.2.8.3.3
Tx Control Added option: Ethernet SW Version 4.0,

Section 4.2.6.2.8.5 Status Control July 2006
BreezeACCESS VL System Manual

iii
Document History

Lost Beacons Transmission New feature SW Version 4.0,
Watchdog Threshold July 2006
Section 4.2.6.2.16
Service Provider Link New feature SW Version 4.0,

(VLAN QinQ) Service Provider Link option July 2006
Section 4.2.6.4.1 added to VLAN Link Type.
New parameters: Service
Provider VLAN ID, VLAN
QinQ Protocol Ethertpe.
MAC Address List Improved functionality. SW Version 4.0,

Section 4.2.6.4.7 New parameter: MAC July 2006
Address List Action
Concatenation Improved mechanism. SW Version 4.0,

Section 4.2.6.5.10 New parameter: Maximum July 2006
Concatenated Frame Size.
Removed: Maximum
Number of Frames
MIR Changes in values of SW Version 4.0,

Table 4-12, Downlink MIR for SU-3, July 2006
SU-6
IP Precedence Threshold Default value updated SW Version 4.0,

Section 4.2.6.6.3.2.2 July 2006
DSCP Threshold Default value updated SW Version 4.0,

Section 4.2.6.6.3.2.3 July 2006
Low Priority Traffic Minimum New feature SW Version 4.0,

Percent July 2006
Section 4.2.6.6.3.4
DRAP support New feature SW Version 4.0,

Section 4.2.6.6.4 July 2006
Gateways Table New – display of existing SW Version 4.0,

Section 4.2.5.4.1 gateways when DRAP is July 2006
enabled.
Wireless Link Prioritization New feature SW Version 4.0,

Section 4.2.6.6.3.5 July 2006

iv
Document History

FTP Client IP Address Changed functionality SW Version 4.0,
Sections 4.2.3.6, 4.2.3.7 (read only, set to unit’s IP July 2006
Address)
FTP Server IP Address Changed default to SW Version 4.0,

Sections 4.2.3.6, 4.2.3.7, 10.0.0.253 July 2006
4.2.3.11.4
Number of HW Retries Maximum value was SW Version 4.0,

Section 4.2.6.5.7 changed from 15 to 14 July 2006
Ethernet packet length Updated maximum length SW Version 4.0,

Section 4.2.5.1.1 July 2006
Basic Parameters Table Updated according to SW Version 4.0,

Table 3-1 applicable changes July 2006
(new/removed parameters)
Parameters that are not Updated according to SW Version 4.0,

reset to default value after applicable changes July 2006
Set Complete (new/removed parameters)
Factory/Operator Defaults
Table 4-2
Parameters that are not Updated according to SW Version 4.0,

reset to default value after applicable changes July 2006
Set Partial Factory/Operator (new/removed parameters)
Defaults
Table 4-3
Basic Configuration Menu Updated according to SW Version 4.0,

Section 4.2.4 applicable changes July 2006
MIB (Appendix E) Updated according to SW Version 4.0,

applicable changes July 2006
Parameters Summary Updated according to SW Version 4.0,

(Appendix F) applicable changes July 2006
Using the Feature License Removed (previously SW Version 4.0,

Web Application Appendix G) – Available as July 2006
a separate document.

v
Document History

New Subscriber Unit: Added New SU-A-ODU and SW Version 4.0
SU-A-ODU accessories Rev. B
August 2006
New Subscriber Unit: SU-I Added new unit – SU-I, and SW Version 4.0
accessories Rev. C
August 2006
SU-A-H removed SU-A-H (SU with horizonally SW Version 4.0.27

Sections 1.3.1, 1.7.1, polarized integrated October 2006
1.7.5.1.1, 2.1.1.1 antenna) was removed from
products list)
IDU PS1036 removed from Replaced by PS1073 SW Version 4.0.27

Manual. October 2006
Sections 1.7.5.1, 1.7.5.4,
2.4, 3.5.2
Q in Q (Service Provider Improved handling of SW Version 4.0.27

Link) improvements. management frames. October 2006
Sections 4.2.6.4.1.2, Support of Ethertypes 9100,
4.2.6.4.1.3.4, 4.2.6.4.1.8, 9200 (hex).
MIB (Appendix E),
Parameters Summary
(Appendix F)
DRAP UDP Port Default changed to 8171 SW Version 4.0.27

Section 4.2.6.6.4.2, October 2006
Parameters Summary
(Appendix F)
MIR/CIR parameters of SU-I Updated SW Version 4.0.27

Table 4-12, Table 4-13, February 2007
MIB (Appendix E),
Parameters Summary
(Appendix F)
AUS supports also SU-I Updated functionality SW Version 4.0.27

Section 1.2 February 2007
Password Recovery New feature – a procedure SW Version 4.0.27

Section 4.1.1 for password recovery if February 2007
password was
lost/forgotten.

vi
Document History

AP Client IP Address New feature SW Version 4.0.27
Sections 4.2.6.3.8, February 2007
Table 4-3, MIB (Appendix
E), Parameters Summary
(Appendix F)
Noise Immunity Control New feature SW Version 4.0.27

Sections 4.2.6.2.18, February 2007
Table 4-3, Parameters
Summary (Appendix F)

vii
Legal Rights
Legal Rights
© Copyright 2007 Alvarion Ltd. All rights reserved.
The material contained herein is proprietary, privileged, and confidential and
owned by Alvarion or its third party licensors. No disclosure thereof shall be
made to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd.
Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and
descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this publication
shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically
incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty.
Trade Names
Alvarion®, BreezeCOM®, WALKair®, WALKnet®, BreezeNET®, BreezeACCESS®,
BreezeMANAGE™, BreezeLINK®, BreezeCONFIG™, BreezeMAX™, AlvariSTAR™,
BreezeLITE™, AlvariCRAFT™, MGW™, eMGW™ and/or other products and/or
services referenced here in are either registered trademarks, trademarks or
service marks of Alvarion Ltd.
All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
Statement of Conditions
The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Alvarion Ltd. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or
consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of
this manual or equipment supplied with it.
Warranties and Disclaimers

All Alvarion Ltd. (“Alvarion”) products purchased from Alvarion or through any of
Alvarion’s authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product
liability terms and conditions.
Exclusive Warranty
(a) Alvarion warrants that the Product hardware it supplies and the tangible
media on which any software is installed, under normal use and conditions, will
be free from significant defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
fourteen (14) months from the date of shipment of a given Product to Purchaser
(the “Warranty Period”). Alvarion will, at its sole option and as Purchaser’s sole
remedy, repair or replace any defective Product in accordance with Alvarion’
standard R&R procedure.
(b) With respect to the Firmware, Alvarion warrants the correct functionality
according to the attached documentation, for a period of fourteen (14) month
from invoice date (the "Warranty Period")". During the Warranty Period, Alvarion
may release to its Customers firmware updates, which include additional
performance improvements and/or bug fixes, upon availability (the “Warranty”).

viii
Legal Rights
Bug fixes, temporary patches and/or workarounds may be supplied as Firmware

updates.
Additional hardware, if required, to install or use Firmware updates must be

purchased by the Customer. Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two
(2) most recent Software major releases.
ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING

AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT
DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER’S OR ANY THIRD
PERSON'S MISUSE, NEGLIGENCE, IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER
TESTING, UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR, OR ANY OTHER CAUSE
BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE, OR BY ACCIDENT, FIRE,
LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD.
Disclaimer
(a) The Product is sold on an "AS IS" basis. Alvarion, its affiliates or its licensors
MAKE NO WARRANTIES, WHATSOEVER, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION.
ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE. UNITS OF PRODUCT
(INCLUDING ALL THE SOFTWARE) DELIVERED TO PURCHASER HEREUNDER
ARE NOT FAULT-TOLERANT AND ARE NOT DESIGNED, MANUFACTURED OR
INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE IN APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE,
MALFUNCTION OR INACCURACY OF PRODUCTS CARRIES A RISK OF DEATH OR
BODILY INJURY OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE (“HIGH
RISK ACTIVITIES”). HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES MAY INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED
TO, USE AS PART OF ON-LINE CONTROL SYSTEMS IN HAZARDOUS
ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL-SAFE PERFORMANCE, SUCH AS IN THE
OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL, LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES,
WEAPONS SYSTEMS OR OTHER APPLICATIONS REPRESENTING A SIMILAR
DEGREE OF POTENTIAL HAZARD. ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.
(b) PURCHASER’S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES

ABOVE SHALL BE REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE AS
SPECIFIED ABOVE, AT ALVARION’S OPTION. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT
ALLOWED BY LAW, THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS
AGREEMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF
LAW, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
WARRANTIES, TERMS OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, CORRESPONDENCE WITH
DESCRIPTION, NON-INFRINGEMENT, AND ACCURACY OF INFORMATION

ix
Legal Rights
GENERATED. ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. ALVARION’

WARRANTIES HEREIN RUN ONLY TO PURCHASER, AND ARE NOT EXTENDED TO
ANY THIRD PARTIES. ALVARION NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY
OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SALE, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS.
Limitation of Liability
(a) ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY, FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF USE, INTERRUPTION OF
BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER ARISING UNDER
BREACH OF CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY
OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR
OTHERWISE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
(b) TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL

THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS
EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE
PRODUCT BY PURCHASER, NOR SHALL THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR
DAMAGES TO ALL PARTIES REGARDING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE
PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY (EXCEPT IN THE
CASE OF A BREACH OF A PARTY’S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS).
Electronic Emission Notices

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1 This device may not cause harmful interference.
2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement

The Subscriber Unit equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules and to
ETSI EN 301 489-1 rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
residential environment notwithstanding use in commercial, business and
industrial environments. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
The Base Station equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules and to EN 301
489-1 rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in commercial, business

x
Legal Rights
and industrial environments. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at
the user’s own expense.
FCC Radiation Hazard Warning

To comply with FCC RF exposure requirement, the antenna used for this
transmitter must be fixed-mounted on outdoor permanent structures with a
separation distance of at least 2 meter from al persons for antennas with a gain
up to 28 dBi and 2.6 meter for a 31.2 dBi dish antenna, and must not be co-
located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
R&TTE Compliance Statement

This equipment complies with the appropriate essential requirements of Article 3
of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC.
Safety Considerations
For the following safety considerations, “Instrument” means the BreezeACCESS
VL units’ components and their cables.
Caution
To avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to
do so.
Line Voltage
Before connecting this instrument to the power line, make sure that the voltage of
the power source matches the requirements of the instrument.
Radio
The instrument transmits radio energy during normal operation. To avoid
possible harmful exposure to this energy, do not stand or work for extended
periods of time in front of its antenna. The long-term characteristics or the
possible physiological effects of Radio Frequency Electromagnetic fields have not
been yet fully investigated.

xi
Legal Rights
Outdoor Unit and Antenna Installation and Grounding

Ensure that outdoor units, antennas and supporting structures are properly
installed to eliminate any physical hazard to either people or property. Make sure
that the installation of the outdoor unit, antenna and cables is performed in
accordance with all relevant national and local building and safety codes. Even
where grounding is not mandatory according to applicable regulation and
national codes, it is highly recommended to ensure that the outdoor unit and the
antenna mast (when using external antenna) are grounded and suitable lightning
protection devices are used so as to provide protection against voltage surges and
static charges. In any event, Alvarion is not liable for any injury, damage or
regulation violations associated with or caused by installation, grounding or
lightning protection.

xii
Important Notice
Important Notice
This user manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions:
This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd. Such

information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting properly authorized
users of the respective Alvarion products.
No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose, disclosed to any
person or firm or reproduced by any means, electronic and mechanical,
without the express prior written permission of Alvarion Ltd.
The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only.
The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without
notice.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license. The

software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that
license.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein are
fictitious unless otherwise noted.
Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and
descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this
publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless
specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty.
The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature, and does

not constitute an offer for the sale of the product described herein.
Any changes or modifications of equipment, including opening of the

equipment not expressly approved by Alvarion Ltd. will void equipment
warranty and any repair thereafter shall be charged for. It could also void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Some of the equipment provided by Alvarion and specified in this manual, is

manufactured and warranted by third parties. All such equipment must be
installed and handled in full compliance with the instructions provided by such
manufacturers as attached to this manual or provided thereafter by Alvarion or
the manufacturers. Non compliance with such instructions may result in serious
damage and/or bodily harm and/or void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment and/or revoke the warranty provided by such manufacturer.

xiii
About This Manual
This manual describes the BreezeACCESS VL Broadband Wireless Access System

Release 4.0.27 and how to install, operate and manage the system components.
This manual is intended for technicians responsible for installing, setting up and
operating the BreezeACCESS VL system, and for system administrators
responsible for managing the system.
This manual contains the following chapters and appendices:
Chapter 1 – System description: Describes the BreezeAccess VL system and

its components.
Chapter 2 – Installation: Describes how to install the system components.
Chapter 3 – Commissioning: Describes how to configure basic parameters,

align the Subscriber Unit antenna and validate unit operation.
Chapter 4 – Operation and Administration: Describes how to use the

BreezeACCESS VL Monitor application for configuring parameters, checking
system status and monitoring performance.
Appendix A – Software Version Loading Using TFTP: Describes how to load a

new software version using TFTP.
Appendix B – File Download and Upload Using TFTP: Describes how to

download and upload configuration files using TFTP. This procedure is also
applicable for uploading country code and feature license files.
Appendix C – Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility: Describes how to use the
Set Factory Defaults utility to enable management access to units where
wrong or unknown configuration disables regular access to the unit for
management purposes.
Appendix D – Preparing the indoor to outdoor SU cable: Provides details on

preparation of the indoor to outdoor Ethernet cable.
Appendix E – Supported MIBs and Traps: Provides a brief description of the

parameters contained in the private MIB agent incorporated into the
About This Manual
BreezeACCESS VL devices. In addition, a description of all traps relevant to

the BreezeACCESS VL devices is provided.
Appendix F – Parameters Summary: Provides an at a glance summary of the

configuration parameters, value ranges and default values.
Appendix G – Troubleshooting.

xvi
Contents
Chapter 1 - System Description ...............................................................1
1.1 Introducing BreezeACCESS VL................................................................................... 2
1.2 Base Station Equipment............................................................................................... 4
1.2.1 Modular Base Station Equipment ........................................................................ 4
1.2.2 Standalone “Micro-cell” Access Unit.................................................................... 6
1.3 Subscriber Unit ............................................................................................................. 7
1.3.1 SU-A/E Subscriber Units ..................................................................................... 7
1.3.2 SU-I Subscriber Units .......................................................................................... 8
1.3.3 The SU-E-BS ....................................................................................................... 9
1.4 BreezeACCESS VL B&B (4.9 GHz only).................................................................... 10
1.5 Networking Equipment............................................................................................... 11
1.6 Management Systems ................................................................................................ 12
1.6.1 BreezeCONFIG™ .............................................................................................. 12
1.6.2 AlvariSTAR™ ..................................................................................................... 12
1.7 Specifications ............................................................................................................. 14
1.7.1 Radio ................................................................................................................. 14
1.7.2 Data Communication ......................................................................................... 16
1.7.3 Configuration and Management ........................................................................ 17
1.7.4 Standards Compliance, General........................................................................ 18
1.7.5 Physical and Electrical....................................................................................... 19
1.7.6 Environmental.................................................................................................... 27
Contents
Chapter 2 - Installation ..........................................................................29
2.1 Installation Requirements ..........................................................................................30
2.1.1 Packing List........................................................................................................ 30
2.1.2 Indoor-to-Outdoor Cables .................................................................................. 33
2.2 Equipment Positioning Guidelines............................................................................ 34
2.3 Installing the Outdoor Unit......................................................................................... 36
2.3.1 Pole Mounting the Outdoor Unit......................................................................... 36
2.3.2 Pole Mounting the New SU-A-ODU ................................................................... 38
2.3.3 Connecting the Grounding and Antenna Cables ............................................... 42
2.3.4 Connecting the Indoor-to-Outdoor Cable ........................................................... 43
2.4 Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit ................................................................... 46
2.4.1 RESET Button Functionality .............................................................................. 47
2.5 Installing the SU-I........................................................................................................48
2.5.1 Installation Requirements .................................................................................. 48
2.5.2 SU-I Connectors and LEDs................................................................................ 49
2.5.3 Installation Guidelines........................................................................................ 50
2.5.4 Installing the SU-I............................................................................................... 50
2.5.5 Installing the Detached Antenna ........................................................................ 52
2.6 Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment....................................................... 59
2.6.1 BS-SH Slot Assignment .....................................................................................59
2.6.2 BS-PS-AC Power Supply Module ...................................................................... 60
2.6.3 BS-PS-DC Power Supply Module ...................................................................... 61
2.6.4 BS-AU Network Interface Module ...................................................................... 62
2.6.5 Installing the BS-SH Chassis and Modules........................................................ 63
Chapter 3 - Commissioning ....................................................................65
3.1 Configuring Basic Parameters................................................................................... 66

xviii
Contents
3.2 Using the Optional Y-cable (New SU-A-ODU) .......................................................... 69
3.3 Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna ...................................................................... 70
3.4 Configuring the Subscriber Unit’s Maximum Modulation Level ............................ 72
3.5 Operation Verification ................................................................................................ 74
3.5.1 Outdoor Unit Verification.................................................................................... 74
3.5.2 Indoor Unit Verification ...................................................................................... 77
3.5.3 SU-I Unit Verification ......................................................................................... 78
3.5.4 Verifying the Ethernet Connection (Modular Base station)................................ 80
3.5.5 Verifying the Indoor-to-Outdoor Connection (Modular Base Station) ................ 80
3.5.6 Verifying Data Connectivity................................................................................ 80
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration .............................................81
4.1 Working with the Monitor Program ........................................................................... 82
4.1.1 Accessing the Monitor Program Using Telnet ................................................... 82
4.1.2 Common Operations.......................................................................................... 83
4.2 Menus and Parameters .............................................................................................. 85
4.2.1 Main Menu ......................................................................................................... 85
4.2.2 Info Screens Menu............................................................................................. 85
4.2.3 Unit Control Menu.............................................................................................. 90
4.2.4 Basic Configuration Menu................................................................................ 103
4.2.5 Site Survey Menu ............................................................................................ 105
4.2.6 Advanced Configuration Menu ........................................................................ 120
Appendix A - Software Version Loading Using TFTP...........................195
Appendix B - File Download and Upload Using TFTP ..........................199
Appendix C - Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility ...........................203
Appendix D - Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable.....................205

xix
Contents
Appendix E - BreezeACCES VL MIB ..................................................... 209
E.1 System Object Identifiers ......................................................................................... 210
E.2 breezeAccessVLMib .................................................................................................212
E.2.1 System Information Parameters ...................................................................... 212
E.2.2 Unit Control Parameters ..................................................................................215
E.2.3 Network Management Parameters .................................................................. 218
E.2.4 IP Parameters .................................................................................................. 220
E.2.5 Bridge Parameters ...........................................................................................221
E.2.6 Air Interface Parameters .................................................................................. 225
E.2.7 Service Parameters ......................................................................................... 238
E.2.8 User Filtering Parameters ................................................................................246
E.2.9 Security Parameters ........................................................................................ 247
E.2.10 Performance Parameters................................................................................. 249
E.2.11 Site Survey Parameters ................................................................................... 251
E.3 Supported Traps .......................................................................................................260
E.3.1 Trap Variables.................................................................................................. 260
E.3.2 Private Traps....................................................................................................261
Appendix F - Parameters Summary ..................................................... 265
F.1 Parameters Summary ............................................................................................... 266
F.1.1 Unit Control Parameters ..................................................................................266
F.1.2 IP Parameters .................................................................................................. 267
F.1.3 Air Interface Parameters .................................................................................. 267
F.1.4 Network Management Parameters .................................................................. 269
F.1.5 Bridge Parameters ...........................................................................................270
F.1.6 Performance Parameters................................................................................. 271
F.1.7 Service Parameters ......................................................................................... 272

xx
Contents
F.1.8 Security Parameters ........................................................................................ 273
Appendix G - Troubleshooting..............................................................275
G.1 Ethernet Port Connection Problems ....................................................................... 276
G.2 SU Association Problems ........................................................................................ 277
G.3 Low Throughput Problems ...................................................................................... 278

xxi
Figures
Figure 2-1: Threaded Holes/Grooves ......................................................................................................... 37
Figure 2-2: 3" Pole Installation Using Special Clamps................................................................................ 37
Figure 2-3: Back View of the new SU-A-ODU ............................................................................................ 38
Figure 2-4: New SU-A-ODU Pole Installation Using the Special Clamp, Vertical Polarization .................. 39
Figure 2-5: New SU-A-ODU Pole Installation Using the Special Clamp, Horizontal Polarization .............. 40
Figure 2-6: New SU-A-ODU Pole Installation Using the Tilt Accessory, Vertical Polarization ................... 41
Figure 2-7: Bottom Panel of the ODU (all ODUs except to new SU-A-ODU, shown without the sealing
assembly).................................................................................................................................................... 42
Figure 2-8: Bottom Panel of the New SU-A-ODU (without IDU COM Sealing Cap)................................... 43
Figure 2-9: The Waterproof Seal ................................................................................................................ 43
Figure 2-10: Inserting the IDU COM Cable into the Sealing Cap ............................................................... 45
Figure 2-11: Connecting the IDU COM connector and inserting the Sealing Cap ..................................... 45
Figure 2-12: IDU PS 1073 Front Panel ....................................................................................................... 46
Figure 2-13: SU-I Panel .............................................................................................................................. 49
Figure 2-14: SU-I Wall Mount ..................................................................................................................... 52
Figure 2-15: Wall Mounting the Antenna .................................................................................................... 54
Figure 2-16: Wall Mount with Rotation Capability....................................................................................... 55
Figure 2-17: Window Mounting the Antenna .............................................................................................. 56
Figure 2-18: Window Mounting with Rotation Capability ............................................................................ 58
Figure 2-19: BS-SH Chassis Slot Assignment............................................................................................ 59
Figure 2-20: BS-PS-AC Front Panel ........................................................................................................... 60
Figure 2-21: BS-PS-DC Front Panel........................................................................................................... 61
Figure 2-22: BS-AU Front Panel ................................................................................................................. 62
Figure 3-1: Connecting the Y-cable ............................................................................................................ 69

Figures
Figure 4-1: Main Menu (Administrator Level) ..............................................................................................83
Figure 4-2: Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments .....................................................................................206

xxiv
Tables
Table 1-1: Frequency Bands......................................................................................................................... 3
Table 1-2: AU Detached Antennas ............................................................................................................... 5
Table 1-3: Subscriber Unit ODU Types ........................................................................................................ 7
Table 1-4: SU-A/E Subscriber Unit Types .................................................................................................... 8
Table 1-5: SU-I Subscriber Units .................................................................................................................. 9
Table 1-6: Radio Specifications .................................................................................................................. 14
Table 1-7: Data Communication ................................................................................................................. 16
Table 1-8: Configuration and Management ................................................................................................ 17
Table 1-9: Standards Compliance, General................................................................................................ 18
Table 1-10: Mechanical Specifications, SU-A/E Subscriber Unit................................................................ 19
Table 1-11: Connectors, SU-A/E Subscriber Unit....................................................................................... 20
Table 1-12: Electrical Specifications, SU-A/E Subscriber Unit ................................................................... 20
Table 1-13: Mechanical and Electrical Specifications, SU-I Subscriber Unit.............................................. 21
Table 1-14: Connectors, SU-I Subscriber Unit ........................................................................................... 21
Table 1-15: Mechanical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment ................................................ 22
Table 1-16: Connectors, Modular Base Station Equipment........................................................................ 23
Table 1-17: Electrical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment .................................................... 23
Table 1-18: Mechanical Specifications, Stand Alone Access Unit ............................................................. 24
Table 1-19: Connectors, Stand Alone Access Unit..................................................................................... 25
Table 1-20: Electrical Specifications, Stand Alone Access Unit ................................................................. 25
Table 1-21: 25dBi Antenna Specifications .................................................................................................. 26
Table 1-22: SU-I-D Wall/Window Detached Antenna Specifications.......................................................... 26
Table 1-23: Environmental Specifications................................................................................................... 27
Table 2-1: Subscriber Unit ODU Types ...................................................................................................... 30

Tables
Table 2-2: Approved Category 5E Ethernet Cables ....................................................................................33
Table 2-3: SU-I Panel Components.............................................................................................................49
Table 2-4: BS-PS LED Functionality ...........................................................................................................60
Table 3-1: Basic Parameters .......................................................................................................................66
Table 3-2: Recommended Maximum Modulation Level*.............................................................................73
Table 3-3: AU-ODU LEDs ...........................................................................................................................74
Table 3-4: SU-ODU LEDs ...........................................................................................................................75
Table 3-5: SU-ODU SNR Bar LED Functionality.........................................................................................76
Table 3-6: BS-AU LEDs...............................................................................................................................77
Table 3-7: PS1073 SU IDU / AU-SA IDU LEDs ..........................................................................................78
Table 3-8: SU-I LEDs ..................................................................................................................................79
Table 3-9: SU-I SNR Bar LED Functionality................................................................................................80
Table 4-1: Default Passwords .....................................................................................................................82
Table 4-2: Parameters not reset after Set Complete Factory/Operator Defaults........................................92
Table 4-3: Parameters that are not reset after Set Partial Factory/Operator Defaults................................93
Table 4-4: Authentication and Association Process ..................................................................................114
Table 4-5: VLAN Management Port Functionality .....................................................................................154
Table 4-6: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Access Link ............................................................................155
Table 4-7: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Trunk Link ..............................................................................156
Table 4-8: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Hybrid Link .............................................................................156
Table 4-9: VLAN Data Port Functionality for SU - Service Provider Link..................................................157
Table 4-10: VLAN Data Port Functionality for AU - Service Provider Link................................................158
Table 4-11: Recommended Maximum Modulation Level* ........................................................................172
Table 4-12: MIR Ranges and Defaults ......................................................................................................180
Table 4-13: CIR Ranges and Defaults.......................................................................................................181

xxvi
1
Chapter 1 - System Description
In This Chapter:
Introducing BreezeACCESS VL, page 2
Base Station Equipment, page 4
Subscriber Unit, page 7
BreezeACCESS VL B&B (4.9 GHz only), page 10
Networking Equipment, page 11
Management Systems, page 12
Specifications, page 14
1.1 Introducing BreezeACCESS VL
BreezeACCESS VL is a high capacity, IP services oriented Broadband Wireless

Access system. The system employs wireless packet switched data technology to
support high-speed IP services including fast Internet and Virtual Private
Networks. BreezeACCESS VL users are provided with a network connection that
is always on, supporting immediate access to the Internet and other IP services at
high data rates. The system is designed for cellular-like deployment, enabling the
system architecture to vary in size and structure. A system can include any
number of cells, each containing several Access Units for better coverage of
densely populated areas.
BreezeACCESS VL can support sensitive applications through authentication

and/or data encryption utilizing WEP or AES algorithm with 128-bit keys. FIPS
(Federal Information Processing Standards) 197 certified encryption algorithm is
optionally available for Access Units with HW revision C and higher (except to
AUS units). The system supports Virtual LANs based on IEEE 802.1Q, enabling
secure operation and Virtual Private Network (VPN) services and enabling tele-
workers or remote offices to conveniently access their enterprise network. The
system supports layer-2 traffic prioritization based on IEEE 802.1p and layer-3
traffic prioritization based on either IP ToS Precedence (RFC791) or DSCP
(RFC2474). It also supports traffic prioritization based on UDP and/or TCP port
ranges. In addition, it may use the optional Wireless Link Prioritization (WLP)
feature to fully support delay sensitive applications, enabling Multimedia
Application Prioritization (MAP) for high performance voice and video. The
implementation of MAP through the unique WLP protocol revolutionizes the
business model by increasing, for example, the number of simultaneous VoIP
calls per sector by as much as 500%.
BreezeACCESS VL products operate in unlicensed frequency bands in Time

Division Duplex (TDD) mode, using Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
(OFDM) modulation with Forward Error Correction (FEC) coding. Using the
enhanced multi-path resistance capabilities of OFDM modem technology,
BreezeACCESS VL enables operation in near and non-line-of-sight (NLOS)
environments. These qualities enable service providers to reach a previously
inaccessible and broader segment of the subscriber population.
BreezeACCESS VL is designed to enable construction of “mixed” cells, where it

can be used together with other BreezeACCESS products using GFSK
modulation, including BreezeACCESS II, BreezeACCESS MMDS, BreezeACCESS
XL and BreezeACCESS V.
BreezeACCESS VL products are currently available in the following frequency

bands:

2
Introducing BreezeACCESS VL
Table 1-1: Frequency Bands
Band Frequencies (GHz)

4.9 4.900 – 5.100
5.2 5.150 – 5.350
5.3 5.250 – 5.350
5.4 5.470 – 5.725
5.8 5.725 – 5.850
The available frequencies, as well as other parameters, depend on applicable local

regulations. The actual operating frequencies used by the system can be
configured according to applicable radio regulations and specific deployment
considerations.
A BreezeACCESS VL system comprises the following:
Customer Premise Equipment (CPE): BreezeACCESS VL Subscriber Units

(SUs).
Base Station Equipment (BS): BreezeACCESS VL Access Units and

supporting equipment.
Networking Equipment: Standard Switches/Routers supporting connections

to the backbone and/or Internet.
Management Systems: SNMP-based Management, Billing and Customer

Care, and other Operation Support Systems.
System Description
3
1.2 Base Station Equipment
The Access Units, installed at the Base Station site, provide all the functionality
necessary to communicate with the Subscriber Units and to connect to the
backbone of the Service Provider.
There are 2 lines of Access Units with different architectures:
Modular Base Station Equipment
Standalone “Micro-Cell” Access Unit
1.2.1 Modular Base Station Equipment

The Base Station Equipment is based on the BS-SH 3U chassis, which is suitable
for installation in 19-inch racks. The chassis contains one or two Power Supply
modules and has 8 slots that can accommodate BS-AU Network Interface
modules. These slots can also
accommodate various combinations of
other modules, including Network
Interface (BS-AU) modules for Access
Units operating in any of the bands
supported by BreezeACCESS equipment
using GFSK modulation, including BreezeACCESS II, BreezeACCESS MMDS,
BreezeACCESS XL and BreezeACCESS V. It can also accommodate a BS-GU GPS
and Alarms module to support GPS-based synchronization of BreezeACCESS
systems using Frequency Hopping radios.
Two different types of power supply modules are available for the BreezeACCESS
VL modules: The BS-PS-DC that is powered from a -48 VDC power source, and
the BS-PS-AC, powered from the 110/220 VAC mains. The optional use of two
power supply modules ensures fail-safe operation through power supply
redundancy. When the same chassis is used also for Access Unit modules
belonging to other BreezeACCESS families using GFSK modulation, then one
BS-PS power supply (AC or DC) should be used to provide power to the
BreezeACCESS VL Access Units, and a different power supply module, suitable
for GFSK equipment, is required for powering the BreezeACCESS GFSK Access
Units.
Each BS-AU module, together with its outdoor AU-D/E-BS-ODU radio unit and
an antenna comprise an AU-D/E-BS Access Unit that serves a single sector.
There are two types of Access Units, differing in the maximum number of
Subscriber Units that they can serve:

4
Base Station Equipment
The AU-BS Access Unit can serve up to 512 Subscriber Units (124 when Data
Encryption is used).
The AUS-BS Access Unit can serve up to 8 SU-3 and/or SU-6 and/or SU-I
Subscriber Units.
NOTE
For convenience, all references to AU-BS are applicable also for AUS-BS, unless explicitly stated
otherwise.
The AU-D/E-BS-ODU outdoor unit contains the processing and

radio modules and connects to an external antenna using a short
RF cable.
E model units are supplied without an antenna.
D model units are supplied with a detached antenna, where the

available antennas are listed in Table 1-2:
Table 1-2: AU Detached Antennas
Antenna Band (GHz) Horizontal Beam Width Gain

(dBi)
AU-Ant-5G-16-60 5.150-5.875 60° 16
AU-Ant-5G-17-90 5.150-5.875 90° 17
AU-Ant-5G-15-120 5.150-5.875 120° 15
AU-Ant-4.9G-15-120 4.900-5.100 120° 15
AU-Ant-4.9G-9-Omni 4.900-5.100 360° 9
AU-Ant-5.8G-8-Omni 5.725-5.875 360° 8
AU-Ant 5.8G-14-120-UK 5.725-5.850 120° 14

(The antenna pattern complies
with Ofcom’s IR 2007 EIRP
profiles)
The BS-AU indoor module connects to the network through a standard IEEE
802.3 Ethernet 10/100BaseT (RJ 45) interface. The indoor module is connected
to the outdoor unit via a Category 5E Ethernet cable. This cable carries Ethernet
traffic between the indoor module and the outdoor unit, and also transfers power
(54 VDC) and control from the indoor module to the outdoor unit.
System Description
5
1.2.2 Standalone “Micro-cell” Access Unit

The standalone AU-D/E-SA Access Unit is very similar to the AU-D/E-BS unit.
The AU-D/E-SA-ODU outdoor unit is very similar to the
AU-D/E-BS-ODU outdoor unit (identical functionality, but the
units are not interchangeable). The available antennas for D
model units are the same as those of the AU-D-BS Access
Unit. The main difference is in the structure of the indoor
part; in the AU-D/E-SA Access Unit the indoor unit is a
standalone desktop or wall-mountable unit (the same
Universal IDU that is also used in the SU) rather than a 19”
module.
There are two types of Standalone Access Units, differing in the maximum
number of Subscriber Units that they can serve:
The AU-SA Access Unit can serve up to 512 Subscriber Units (124 when Data
Encryption is used).
The AUS-SA Access Unit can serve up to 8 SU-3 and/or SU-6 and/or SU-I
Subscriber Units.
NOTE
For convenience, all references to AU-SA are applicable also for AUS-SA, unless explicitly stated
otherwise.
The IDU connects to the network through a standard IEEE 802.3 Ethernet
10/100BaseT (RJ 45) interfaces and is powered from the 110/220 VAC mains.
The indoor unit is connected to the outdoor unit via a Category 5 Ethernet cable.
This cable carries Ethernet traffic between the indoor and the outdoor units, and
also transfers power (54 VDC) and control from the indoor unit to the outdoor
unit.
NOTE
The AU-D/E-SA-ODU and the AU-D/E-BS-ODU are not interchangeable:
The AU-D/E-SA-ODU cannot be used with the BS-AU; the AU-D/E-BS-ODU cannot be used with
the standalone IDU.

6
Subscriber Unit
1.3 Subscriber Unit
The Subscriber Unit (SU) installed at the customer premises enables the
customer data connection to the Access Unit. The Subscriber Unit provides an
efficient platform for high speed Internet and Intranet services. The use of packet
switching technology provides the user with a connection to the network that is
always on, enabling immediate access to services.
There are two types of Subscriber Units:
The SU-A/E series, where each unit comprises an Indoor Unit and an
Outdoor Unit (with or without an integrated antenna). These products are
intended for installation by a professional installer, enabling long-range
connectivity.
The SU-I series of all-indoor Subscriber Unit, intended for installation by non-
professional end users in locations that are close to the Base Station.
In addition, there is a special variant of a Subscriber Unit, the SU-E-BS, where

the indoor unit is designed for installation in the Base Station chassis. The
SU-E-BS is intended primarily for backhauling or similar applications.
The following sections provides additional details on the various types of

Subscriber Units.
1.3.1 SU-A/E Subscriber Units

The SU-A/E Subscriber Unit comprises a desktop or wall-mountable Indoor Unit
(IDU) and an outdoor unit that contains the processing and radio modules.
Several ODU types are available to support a wide range of requirements, as
detailed in Table 1-3:
Table 1-3: Subscriber Unit ODU Types
SU Type Antenna Description

SU-A-ODU Vertically polarized high-gain flat antenna integrated on the front
panel
New SU-A-ODU Vertically/horizontally polarized high-gain flat antenna integrated

on the front panel.
The smaller size new SU-A-ODU is available in the 5.4 GHz and
5.8 GHz bands.
SU-E-ODU A connection to an external antenna (not included)
System Description
7
SU-A-ODU and IDU New SU-A-ODU
For each ODU type, several models are available to support various end-users
needs and applications, as detailed in Table 1-4:
Table 1-4: SU-A/E Subscriber Unit Types
SU Type Description
SU-54-BD A high-rate CPE that supports a full LAN
SU-6-1D A medium rate CPE that supports a single Ethernet device

(one MAC address)
SU-6-BD A medium rate CPE that supports a full LAN
SU-3-1D An entry level CPE that supports a single Ethernet device

(one MAC address)
NOTE
Although the achievable throughput for SU-3/SU-6 is lower than that of SU-54, these units use all
modulation levels and may have bursts at up to 54 Mbps.
The IDU provides the interface to the user’s equipment and is powered from the
110/220 VAC mains. The customer's data equipment is connected via a standard
IEEE 802.3 Ethernet 10/100BaseT (RJ 45) interface. The indoor unit is
connected to the outdoor unit via a Category 5 Ethernet cable. This cable carries
Ethernet traffic between the indoor and the outdoor units, and also transfers
power (54 VDC) and control from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit.
1.3.2 SU-I Subscriber Units

The SU-I is a compact Subscriber Unit intended for indoor
installations by a non-professional user. The SU-I connects
to a detached wall/window mountable antenna, and is
available in the following configurations:

8
Subscriber Unit
Table 1-5: SU-I Subscriber Units
SU-I Configuration Description

SU-I-D All-indoor medium rate CPE supporting a full LAN, and a
wall/window antenna kit
SU-I-E All-indoor medium rate CPE supporting a full LAN (antenna not
included)
The SU-I is currently available in the 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz bands.
NOTE
It is recommended to pre-configure the units prior to shipment to end-users.
1.3.3 The SU-E-BS

The SU-E-BS is a special variant of a Subscriber Unit, where the indoor unit is
designed for installation in the Base Station chassis. The outdoor unit is an
SU-E-ODU, with a connection to an external antenna.
The SU-E-BS is intended primarily for backhauling or similar applications,

including applications where it is used in conjunction with a GFSK-based system.
The functionality of the LEDs of the module is the same as the LEDS of a regular
AU-IDU module (with one minor exception-the W-LNK LED indicates whether the
SU is associated with an AU).
System Description
9
1.4 BreezeACCESS VL B&B (4.9 GHz only)
BreezeACCESS VL B&B is available in the 4.9 GHz band to support point-to-

point applications. A B&B point-to-point link includes:
AU-D-SA-4.9-6-VL: A standalone AU with a 25 dBi, 6° high gain directional

antenna.
SU-D-4.9-54-BD-VL: SU-54-BD with a 25 dBi, 6° high gain directional

antenna.

10
Networking Equipment
1.5 Networking Equipment
The Base Station equipment is connected to the backbone through standard data
communication and telecommunication equipment. The 10/100BaseT ports of
the AU modules can be connected directly to a multi-port router or to an Ethernet
switch connected to a router.
The point-to-point link from the Base Station to the backbone can be either wired
or wireless. Data to the Internet is routed to the backbone through standard
routers.
System Description
11
1.6 Management Systems
The end-to-end IP-based architecture of the system enables full management of

all components, from any point in the system. BreezeACCESS VL components
can be managed using standard management tools through SNMP agents that
implement standard and proprietary MIBs for remote setting of operational modes
and parameters. The same SNMP management tools can also be used to manage
other system components including switches, routers and transmission
equipment. Security features incorporated in BreezeACCESS VL units restrict
access for management purposes to specific IP addresses and/or directions, that
is, from the Ethernet and/or wireless link.
In addition, the Ethernet WAN can be used to connect to other Operation Support
Systems including servers, Customer Care systems and AAA (Authentication,
Authorization and Admission) tools.
1.6.1 BreezeCONFIG™
The BreezeCONFIG for BreezeACCESS VL utility is an SNMP-based application
designed to manage BreezeACCESS VL system components and upgrade unit
software versions. The system administrator can use the BreezeCONFIG utility to
control a large number of units from a single location. In addition, BreezeCONFIG
enables you to load an updated configuration file to multiple units
simultaneously, thus radically reducing the time spent on unit configuration
maintenance.
1.6.2 AlvariSTAR™
AlvariSTAR is a comprehensive Carrier-Class network management system for
Alvarion’s Broadband Wireless Access products-based Networks. AlvariSTAR is
designed for today’s most advanced Service Provider network Operation Centers
(NOCs), providing the network Operation, Administration and Maintenance
(OA&M) staff and managers with all the network surveillance, monitoring and
configuration capabilities that they require in order to effectively manage the
BWA network while keeping the resources and expenses at a minimum.
AlvariSTAR is designed to offer the network’s OA&M staff with a unified, scalable
and distributable network management system. The AlvariSTAR system uses a
distributed client-server architecture, which provides the service provider with a
robust, scalable and fully redundant network management system in which all
single points of failure can be avoided.

12
Management Systems
AlvariSTAR provides the following BWA network management functionality:
Device Discovery
Device Inventory
Topology
Fault Management
Configuration Management
Performance Monitoring
Device embedded software upgrade
Security Management
Northbound interface to other Network Management Systems or OSS.
Embedded with the entire knowledge base of BWA network operations,

AlvariSTAR is a unique state-of-the-art power multiplier in the hands of the
service provider that enables the provisioning of satisfied customers. AlvariSTAR
dramatically extends the abilities of the service provider to provide a rich portfolio
of services and to support rapid customer base expansion.
System Description
13
1.7 Specifications
1.7.1 Radio
Table 1-6: Radio Specifications
Item Description
Frequency1 4.9 GHz Family: 4.900 – 5.100 GHz
5.2 GHz Family: 5.150 – 5.350 GHz
5.3 GHz Family: 5.250 – 5.350 GHz
5.4 GHz Family: 5.470 – 5.725 GHz
5.8 GHz Family: 5.725 – 5.850 GHz
Operation Mode Time Division Duplex (TDD)
Channel Bandwidth1 20 MHz

10 MHz (HW Revision C and higher)
Central Frequency Resolution 10 MHz for HW Revision A and B
5 MHz for HW Revision C and higher
Antenna Port AU-D-BS/SA-ODU, SU-E-ODU: N-Type jack, 50 ohm
SU-I: SMA jack, 50 ohm
Max. Input Power HW Revision A: -48 dBm typical
(at antenna port)
HW Revision B and higher: -30 dBm typical
Maximum Output Power2 21 dBm
SU-A-ODU Integral Antenna 21 dBi typical in the 5.150-5.875 GHz band, 20 dBi in the 4.9-5.1
GHz band. 10.5o horizontal x 10.5o vertical, vertical polarization,
compliant with EN 302 085 V1.1.1 Range 1, Class TS 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
New SU-A-ODU Integral 20 +/- 1 dBi typical in the 5.250-5.875 GHz band, 14o horizontal x
Antenna (5.4/5.8 GHz) 14o vertical,
vertical/horizontal polarization, compliant with EN 302 085 V1.2.2
(2003-08) Range 1, RoHS
SU-I-D Detached Antenna 15 dBi typical net (excluding cable loss) in the 5.150-5.875 GHz
band,
45o~55° horizontal x 10°~12° vertical, vertical polarization, RoHS
compliant

14
Specifications
Table 1-6: Radio Specifications
Item Description
AU-D Detached Antennas AU-Ant-5G-16-60: 16 dBi typical, 5.150-5.875 GHz,
60o horizontal x 10o vertical sector antenna, vertical polarization,
compliant with EN 302 085 V1.1.2 CS3
AU-Ant-5G-17-90: 17 dBi typical, 5.150-5.875 GHz,
90o horizontal x 6o vertical sector antenna,
vertical polarization, compliant with EN 302 085 V1.1.2 CS3
AU-Ant-5G-15-120: 15 dBi typical, 5.150-5.875 GHz,
120o horizontal x 6o vertical sector antenna, vertical polarization,
compliant with EN 302 085 V1.1.2 CS3.
AU-Ant-4.9G-15-120: 15 dBi typical, 4.900-5.100 GHz,
124o horizontal x 6.5o vertical sector antenna, vertical
polarization, compliant with EN 302 085 V1.1.2 CS3.
AU-Ant-4.9G-9-Omni: 9 dB typical i, 4.900-5.100 GHz,
360o horizontal x 8o vertical, vertical polarization.
AU-Ant-5.4G-8-Omni: 8 dBi typical, 5.150-5.725 GHz,
360o horizontal x 4.5o vertical, vertical polarization.
AU-Ant-5.8G-8-Omni: 8 dBi typical, 5.725-5.875 GHz,
360 o horizontal x 9o vertical, vertical polarization.
AU-Ant-5.8G-14-120-UK: 14dBi typical, 5.725-5.850 GHz,
120o horizontal x 6.5o vertical sector antenna, vertical
polarization. The antenna pattern complies with Ofcom’s IR
2007 EIRP profiles.
Sensitivity, Minimum (dBm at Modulation Sensitivity Sensitivity Minimum SNR
antenna port, PER<10%, Level4 (HW Rev. A) (HW Rev. B
20 MHz bandwidth3) and higher)
1 -87 dBm -89 dBm 6 dB
2 -86 dBm -88 dBm 7 dB
3 -85 dBm -86 dBm 9 dB
4 -83 dBm -84 dBm 11 dB
5 -80 dBm -81 dBm 14 dB
6 -76 dBm -77 dBm 18 dB
7 -71 dBm -73 dBm 22 dB
85 -69 dBm -71 dBm 23 dB
Modulation OFDM modulation, 64 FFT points; BPSK, QPSK, QAM16, QAM64
System Description
15
1
The actual available frequency channels and bandwidth are defined by the selected Sub-Band, which reflects the
applicable regulatory constraints. For more details refer to section 4.2.2.4).
2
The actual maximum available output power for each modulation level is defined by the selected Sub-Band, which
reflects the applicable regulatory constraints. For some countries the power may also be limited by limitations on
the maximum EIRP (also included in the Sub-Band parameters) and the Antenna Gain parameter. For more details
refer to section 4.2.2.4 and to section 4.2.6.2.8.1. For information on specific HW and Country Code limitations, see
4
the Country Codes document.

3
The sensitivity values are for a bandwidth of 20 MHz. When using a 10 MHz bandwidth, the sensitivity for each
modulation level is 3 dB lower.
4
Modulation Level indicates the radio transmission rate and the modulation scheme. Modulation Level 1 is for the
lowest radio rate and modulation scheme.
5
Modulation Level 8 is supported only in units with HW Revision B and above.
1.7.2 Data Communication
Table 1-7: Data Communication
Item Description
Standard compliance IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD
VLAN Support Based on IEEE 802.1Q
Layer-2 Traffic Prioritization Based on IEEE 802.1p
Layer-3 Traffic Prioritization IP Precedence ToS (RFC791)

DSCP (RFC2474)
Layer 4 Traffic Prioritization UDP/TCP destination ports

16
Specifications
1.7.3 Configuration and Management
Table 1-8: Configuration and Management
Item Description
Management Monitor program via Telnet
SNMP
Configuration upload/download
Management Access From Wired LAN, Wireless Link
Management access protection Multilevel password

Configuration of remote access direction (from Ethernet only,
from wireless link only or from both)
Configuration of IP addresses of authorized stations
Security Authentication messages encryption option
Data encryption option
WEP and AES OCB 128-bit encryption algorithms
FIPS 197 certified encryption (optional for Access Units with
HW revision C or higher (excluding AUS units), under license)
ESSID
SNMP Agents SNMP ver 1 client
MIB II, Bridge MIB, Private BreezeACCESS VL MIB
Allocation of IP parameters Configurable or automatic (DHCP client)
Software upgrade FTP

TFTP
Configuration upload/download FTP
TFTP
System Description
17
1.7.4 Standards Compliance, General
Table 1-9: Standards Compliance, General
Type Standard
EMC FCC Part 15 class B
ETSI EN 300 489-1
Safety UL 1950
EN 60950
Environmental Operation ETS 300 019 part 2-3 class 3.2E for indoor
ETS 300 019 part 2-4 class 4.1E for outdoor
Storage ETS 300 019-2-1 class 1.2E
Transportation ETS 300 019-2-2 class 2.3
Lightning protection EN 61000-4-5, Class 3 (2kV)

(AU-ODU Antenna connection)
Radio FCC Part 15.247

ETSI EN 300 328
ETSI EN 301 893 (2003-04)

18
Specifications
1.7.5 Physical and Electrical

1.7.5.1 SU-A/E Subscriber Unit
NOTE
In the 5.4 and 5.8 GHz band, the equipment may be shipped with a new, smaller size SU-A-ODU
that supports both horizontal and vertical polarization.
1.7.5.1.1 Mechanical
Table 1-10: Mechanical Specifications, SU-A/E Subscriber Unit
Unit Structure Dimensions (cm) Weight (kg)

General An IDU indoor unit and an ODU outdoor
unit with an integral antenna or a
connection to an external antenna
IDU PS1073 Plastic box (black), desktop or wall 14 x 6.6 x 3.5 0.3
mountable
SU-A-ODU Metal box plus an integral cut diamond 41.5 x 36.9 x 6.3 2.3
shaped antenna in a plastic enclosure,
pole or wall mountable
New SU-A-ODU Metal box plus an integral diamond 22 x 22 x 7 1.3

(5.4/5.8 GHz) shaped antenna in a plastic enclosure,
pole or wall mountable
SU-E-ODU Metal box, pole or wall mountable 30.5 x 11.7 x 5.7 1.8
System Description
19
1.7.5.1.2 Connectors
Table 1-11: Connectors, SU-A/E Subscriber Unit
Unit Connector Description

IDU ETHERNET 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45)
Cable connection to a PC: crossed
Cable connection to a hub: straight
RADIO 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45)
AC IN 3 pin AC power plug
SU-A-ODU INDOOR 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45), protected by a waterproof

sealing assembly
New SU-A-ODU IDU COM 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45), protected by a sealing cap
(5.4/5.8 GHz)
SU- E-ODU INDOOR 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45), protected by a waterproof

sealing assembly
ANT N-Type jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected
1.7.5.1.3 Electrical
Table 1-12: Electrical Specifications, SU-A/E Subscriber Unit
Unit Details
General Power consumption: 25W
IDU AC power input: 85-265 VAC, 50-60 Hz
ODU 54 VDC from the IDU over the indoor-outdoor Ethernet cable

20
Specifications
1.7.5.2 SU-I Subscriber Unit

1.7.5.2.1 Mechanical and Electrical
Table 1-13: Mechanical and Electrical Specifications, SU-I Subscriber Unit
Item Details
Dimensions (cm) 11.8 (H) x 20 (L) x 3.1 (W)
Weight (g) 600
Power Consumption 15W maximum
DC Power Input (from Power Supply) 48 VDC
Mains Power Input (to Power Supply) 90-265 VAC, 47-63 Hz
Table 1-14: Connectors, SU-I Subscriber Unit
Connector Description
ETHERNET 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45)
Cable connection to a PC: straigh
Cable connection to a hub: crossed
POWER (48 VDC) DC Power Plug
RF SMA jack
System Description
21
1.7.5.3 Modular Base Station Equipment

Table 1-15: Mechanical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment

BS-SH 19" rack (3U) or desktop 13 x 48.2 x 25.6 4.76
BS-PS-DC DC power supply module 12.9 x 7.0 x 25.3 1.2
BS-PS-AC AC power supply module 12.9 x 7.0 x 25.3 1.2
BS-AU Indoor module of the 12.9 x 3.5 x 25.5 0.15

AU-D-BS access unit
AU-D-BS-ODU pole or wall mountable 30.5 x 11.7 x 5.7 1.8
AU-Ant-5G-16-60 2"-3.5" pole mountable 43.6 x 25 x 1.0 2.2
AU-Ant-5G-17-90 2"-3.5" pole mountable 55 x 25 x 1.1 1.5
AU-Ant-5.4G-8-Omni 2.5"-4.5" pole mountable 70cm high, 6cm base 1.5

diameter
AU-Ant-5.8G-8-Omni Surface or pole mountable 40cm high, 3.2cm base 0.23

diameter
AU-Ant-4.9G-15-120 2"-4" pole mountable 55 x 25 x 1.7 1.5
AU-Ant-5.8G-14-120-UK 1"-4" pole mountable 55 x 7.5 x 5 1

22
Specifications
Table 1-16: Connectors, Modular Base Station Equipment

BS-AU 10/100 BaseT 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45) with 2 embedded LEDs.
RADIO 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45) with 2 embedded LEDs
AU-D-BS-ODU INDOOR 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45), protected by a waterproof

sealing assembly
BS-PS-AC AC-IN 3-PIN AC power plug
BS-PS-DC -48 VDC 3 pin DC D-Type 3 power pins plug

Amphenol 717TWA3W3PHP2V4RRM6
Antenna RF N-Type jack (on a 1.5m cable in the Omni-8-5.8)
Table 1-17: Electrical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment
Unit Details
General 240W max. for a fully equipped chassis (1 PS, 6 AU)
BS-PS-AC AC power input: 85-265 VAC, 47-65 Hz

DC power output: 54 V; 3.3 V
BS-PS-DC DC power input: -48 VDC nominal (-34 to -72), 10 A max

DC power output: 54 V; 3.3 V
BS-AU 3.3 VDC, 54 VDC from the power supply module(s) via the back plane
AU-D-BS-ODU 54 VDC from the BS-AU over the indoor-outdoor Ethernet cable
AU-D-BS (IDU+ODU) Power consumption: 30W
System Description
23
1.7.5.4 Standalone Access Unit

Table 1-18: Mechanical Specifications, Stand Alone Access Unit

General An IDU indoor unit and an
AU-D-BS-ODU outdoor unit
connected to a detached antenna
IDU PS1073 Plastic box (black), desktop or wall 14 x 6.6 x 3.5 0.3
mountable
AU-D-SA-ODU Poll or wall mountable 30.5 x 11.7 x 5.7 1.8
AU-Ant-5G-16-60 2"-3.5" pole mountable 43.6 x 25 x 1.0 2.2
AU-Ant-5.4G-8-Omni 2.5"-4.5" pole mountable 70 cm high, 6 cm 1.5

base diameter
AU-Ant-5.8G-8-Omni Surface or pole mountable 40 cm high, 3.2 cm 0.23

base diameter
AU-Ant-4.9G-15-120 2"-4" pole mountable 55 x 25 x 1.7 1.5
AU-Ant-4.9G-9-Omni 1.5”-3” pole mountable 46 cm high, 5.5 cm 0.6

base diameter
AU-Ant-5.8G-14-120-UK 1"-4" pole mountable 55 x 7.5 x 5 1

24
Specifications
Table 1-19: Connectors, Stand Alone Access Unit

IDU ETHERNET 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45)
RADIO 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45)
AC IN 3-PIN AC power plug
AU-D-SA-ODU INDOOR 10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45), protected by a waterproof

sealing assembly
Antenna RF N-Type jack (on a 1.5m cable in the Omni-8-5.8)
Table 1-20: Electrical Specifications, Stand Alone Access Unit
Unit Details
General Power consumption: 25W
IDU AC power input: 85-265 VAC, 50-60 Hz
AU-D-SA-ODU 54 VDC from the IDU over the indoor-outdoor Ethernet cable
System Description
25
1.7.5.5 25dBi Antenna (for B&B point-to-point link)
Table 1-21: 25dBi Antenna Specifications
Item Description
Regulatory Compliance ETSI EN 302 085 V1.1.2 (2001-02) Range1
Frequency Range 4.900-5.100 GHz
Gain 25dBi min.
Azimuth Beamwidth 6°
Elevation Beamwidth 6°
Polarization Linear (Vertical/Horizontal)
Dimensions (cm) 45 x 45 x 3
Weight (kg) 3 (max, excluding mounting kit)
Connector N-Type, Female
Mounting Kit 2.75”-3.5” pole, 0 to -10° tilt, 2.2kg
1.7.5.6 SU-I-D Wall/Window Detached Antenna
Table 1-22: SU-I-D Wall/Window Detached Antenna Specifications
Item Description
Frequency Range 5.150-5.875 GHz
Gain 15dBi net (excluding cable loss).
Azimuth Beamwidth 45o~55°
Elevation Beamwidth 10°~12°
Polarization Linear (Vertical)
Dimensions (cm) 33 x 9.3 x 2.1
Weight (g) 190
Connector SMA jack
Cable 2 meter, 2 x SMA plug, 3.6 dB max insertion loss

26
Specifications
1.7.6 Environmental
Table 1-23: Environmental Specifications
Type Unit Details

Operating temperature Outdoor units -40 o C to 55 o C
Indoor equipment 0 o C to 40 o C
Operating humidity Outdoor units 5%-95% non condensing, weather protected
Indoor equipment 5%-95% non condensing
System Description
27
2
Chapter 2 - Installation
In This Chapter:
Installation Requirements, page 30
Equipment Positioning Guidelines, page 34
Installing the Outdoor Unit, page 36
Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit, page 46
Installing the SU-I, page 48

2.1 Installation Requirements
This section describes all the supplies required to install the BreezeACCESS VL
system components and the items included in each installation package.
NOTE
Installation requirements for SU-I are provided in section 2.5 on page 48.
2.1.1 Packing List

2.1.1.1 SU-A/E Subscriber Unit
The SU-A/E installation kit includes the following components:
IDU indoor unit with a wall mounting kit
Mains power cord
Any of the following Outdoor Units:
Table 2-1: Subscriber Unit ODU Types
SU Type Antenna Description

SU-A-ODU Vertically polarized high-gain flat antenna integrated on the front panel
New SU-A-ODU Vertically/horizontally polarized high-gain flat antenna integrated on

the front panel.
The smaller size new SU-A-ODU is available in the 5.4 GHz and 5.8
GHz bands.
SU-E-ODU A connection to an external antenna (not included)
NOTE
The SU-A-ODU and SU-E-ODU are supplied without the waterproof sealing assembly for the
INDOOR connector. The sealing assembly is supplied with the IDU to ODU cable kit..
Pole mounting kit for the ODU (the kit for the new, smaller-size ODU is
different from the kit for all other ODUs)

30
Installation Requirements
An IDU to ODU cable kit, including 20m Category 5E Ethernet cable with a
shielded RJ-45 connector crimped on one end, a waterproof sealing assembly
and two shielded RJ-45 connectors (not applicable for the new SU-A-ODU).
2.1.1.2 Modular Base Station Equipment

This section describes the items included in the installation packages for each
Modular Base Station system component.
2.1.1.2.1 BS-SH Base Station Chassis

The BS-SH installation kit includes the following components:
BS-SH chassis with blank panels
Rubber legs for optional desktop installation
2.1.1.2.2 AU-D/E-BS Access Unit

The AU-D/E-BS and installation kit includes the following components:
BS-AU Network Interface module
AU-D/E-BS-ODU outdoor unit
Pole mounting kit for the AU-D/E-BS-ODU
In AU-D-BS kits: Antenna, including pole mounting hardware
RF cable
2.1.1.2.3 BS-PS-AC Power Supply

Up to two BS-PS-AC power supply modules can be included in each Base Station
chassis. The BS-PS-AC installation kit includes the following components:
BS-PS-AC power supply module
Mains power cord
2.1.1.2.4 BS-PS-DC Power Supply

Up to two BS-PS-DC power supply modules can be included in each Base Station
chassis. The BS-PS-DC installation kit includes the following components:
BS-PS-DC power supply module
Installation
31
DC power cable
2.1.1.3 AU-D/E-SA Standalone Access Unit

The AU-D/E-SA installation kit includes the following components:
IDU indoor unit with a wall mounting kit
Mains power cord
AU-D/E-SA-ODU outdoor unit
Pole mounting kit for the AU-D/E-SA-ODU
In AU-D-SA kits: Antenna, including pole mounting hardware
RF cable
2.1.1.4 Optional Items Available from Alvarion
IDU to ODU Category 5 Ethernet cable with a shielded RJ-45 connector

crimped on one end and two shielded RJ-45 connectors (available in different
lengths. For more details refer to section 2.1.2)
Tilt Pole Mounting kit for the new SU-A-ODU
A Y-cable for connecting directly to the IDU COM of the new SU-A-ODU for
configuration/performance monitoring using a portable PC.
2.1.1.5 Additional Installation Requirements

The following items are also required to install the BreezeACCESS VL system
components:
Ethernet cable (straight for connecting to a hub/switch etc., crossed for

connecting directly to a PC’s NIC)
Crimping tool for RJ-45 connectors
Antenna, for E model units supplied without an antenna
Ground cables with an appropriate termination
Mains plug adapter or termination plug (if the power plug on the supplied AC
power cord does not fit local power outlets)

32
Installation Requirements
Portable PC with Ethernet card and Telnet software or BreezeCONFIG for

BreezeACCESS VL* application and a crossed Ethernet cable
Installation tools and materials, including appropriate means (e.g. a pole) for
installing the outdoor unit.
2.1.2 Indoor-to-Outdoor Cables
NOTE
The length of the indoor-to-outdoor Ethernet cable should not exceed 90 meters. The length of the
Ethernet cable connecting the indoor unit to the user's equipment, together with the length of the
Indoor-to-Outdoor cable, should not exceed 100 meters.
Use only Category 5E Ethernet cables from approved manufacturers, listed in

Table 2-2. Consult with Alvarion specialists on the suitability of other cables.
Table 2-2: Approved Category 5E Ethernet Cables
Manufacturer Part Number

Superior Cables Ltd. 612098
www.superior-cables.com
HES Cabling Systems H5E-00481

www.hescs.com
Teldor 8393204101
www.teldor.com
Southbay Holdings Limited TSM2404A0D

11th Fl., 15, Lane 347, Jong Jeng Rd.
Shin Juang City, Taipei County
Taiwan, R.O.C
Attn: Eva Lin
Tel. 886-2-2832 3339
Fax. 886-2-2206 0081
E-mail: eva@south-bay.com.tw
NOTE
In case of missing information (product specifications, ordering information, etc.) regarding these
products on the manufacturer’s web site, it is highly recommended to contact the manufacturer’s
sales representative directly.
Installation
33
2.2 Equipment Positioning Guidelines
This section provides key guidelines for selecting the optimal installation
locations for the various BreezeACCESS VL system components.
CAUTION
ONLY experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes
and, wherever applicable, are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities should
install outdoor units and antennas.
Failure to do so may void the BreezeACCESS VL product warranty and may expose the end user
or Service Provider to legal and financial liabilities. Alvarion and its resellers or distributors are not
liable for injury, damage or regulation violations associated with the installation of Outdoor Units or
antennas.
Select the optimal locations for the equipment using the following guidelines:
The outdoor unit can be either pole or wall mounted. Its location should
enable easy access to the unit for installation and testing.
The higher the placement of the antenna, the better the achievable link
quality.
AU-ODU units should be installed as close as possible to the antenna.
The antenna connected to the AU-ODU unit, should be installed so as to

provide coverage to all Subscriber Units (SUs) within its service area.
NOTE
The recommended minimum distance between any two antennas serving adjacent sectors is 2
meters. The recommended minimum distance between two antennas serving opposite cells
(installed back-to-back) is 5 meters.
The antenna of the SU (integrated or external)) should be installed to provide

a direct, or near line of sight with the Base Station antenna. The antenna
should be aligned to face the Base Station.
In some cases it might be necessary to up/down-tilt the antenna. An optional

Tilt accessory for the ODU providing a tilt range of +/-15° is available from
Alvarion. The tilt option might be necessary to either improve the link
conditions or, if the SU is too close to the Base Station, to reduce the receive
signals strength. As a rule of thumb, if the SU is located at a distance of less
than 300 meters from the Base Station, it is recommended to up-tilt the
antenna by approximately 10° to 15° (especially in line-of-sight conditions) to
avoid saturation of the receivers by too strong signals.

34
Equipment Positioning Guidelines
The indoor equipment should be installed as close as possible to the location

where the indoor-to-outdoor cable enters the building. The location of the
indoor equipment should take into account its connection to a power outlet
and the customer’s equipment.
Installation
35
2.3 Installing the Outdoor Unit
The following sections describe how to install the outdoor units, including pole
mounting the ODU, and connecting the indoor-to-outdoor, grounding and RF
cables.
NOTE
Ensure that outdoor units, antennas and supporting structures are properly installed to eliminate
any physical hazard to either people or property. Make sure that the installation of the outdoor unit,
antenna and cables is performed in accordance with all relevant national and local building and
safety codes. Even where grounding is not mandatory according to applicable regulation and
national codes, it is highly recommended to ensure that the outdoor unit and the antenna pole
(when using external antenna) are grounded and suitable lightning protection devices are used so
as to provide protection against voltage surges and static charges. In any event, Alvarion is not
liable for any injury, damage or regulation violations associated with or caused by installation,
grounding or lightning protection.
2.3.1 Pole Mounting the Outdoor Unit
NOTE
This section is not applicable for the new SU-A-ODU. For details on pole mounting the new
SU-A-ODU refer to section 2.3.2.
The Outdoor Unit can be mounted on a pole using one of the following options:
Special clamps and threaded rods are supplied with each unit. There are two
pairs of threaded holes on the back of the unit, enabling to use the special
clamps for mountingthe unit on diverse pole diameters.
Special grooves on the sides of the unit enable the use of metal bands to
secure the unit to a pole. The bands must be 9/16 inches wide and at least 12
inches long. The metal bands are not included with the installation package.
NOTE
Be sure to mount the unit with the bottom panel, which includes the LED indicators, facing
downward.

36
Installing the Outdoor Unit
Figure 2-1: Threaded Holes/Grooves
Figure 2-2 illustrates the method of mounting an outdoor unit on a pole, using
the clamps and threaded rods.
Figure 2-2: 3" Pole Installation Using Special Clamps
NOTE
There is a groove on one end of the threaded rod. Be sure to insert the threaded rods with the
grooves pointing outward, as these grooves enable you to use a screwdriver to fasten the rods to
the unit.
Installation
37
2.3.2 Pole Mounting the New SU-A-ODU

The new SU-A-ODU can be mounted on a 1" to 4" pole using one of the following
options:
A pole mounting kit is supplied with each unit. The kit includes a special
clamp and a pair of threaded rods, flat washers, spring washers and nuts.
There are two pairs of threaded holes on the back of the unit, enabling to use
the mounting kit for installing the unit using either vertical or horizontal
polarization. The clamp enables installing the unit on diverse pole diameters
from 1" to 4".
A Tilt Pole Mounting kit, providing a tilt range of +/-15° is available from
Alvarion. The Tilt kit can be attached to the ODU and be mounted on a 1" to
4" pole using two 9/16" wide metal bands.
2.3.2.1 Polarization
The new SU-A-ODU can be pole mounted to provide either vertical or horizontal
polarization.
Figure 2-3: Back View of the new SU-A-ODU
The Polarization Arrow on the back of the unit indicates the type of polarization.
For vertical polarization install the unit with the Polarization Arrow pointing
upward (as in the figure above).

38
For horizontal polarization install the unit with the Polarization Arrow
pointing sideward and the connectors facing downward.
2.3.2.2 Pole Mounting the ODU Using the Clamp

Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5 illustrate how to mount an ODU on a pole, using the
clamp and threaded rods.
NOTE
There is a groove on one end of the threaded rod. Be sure to insert the threaded rods with the
grooves pointing outward, and fasten them to the unit using a screwdriver. Install the unit with the
bottom panel, which includes the connectors, facing downward.
Figure 2-4: New SU-A-ODU Pole Installation Using the Special Clamp, Vertical Polarization
Installation
39
Figure 2-5: New SU-A-ODU Pole Installation Using the Special Clamp, Horizontal Polarization

40
2.3.2.3 Pole Mounting the ODU with the Tilt Accessory
Figure 2-6: New SU-A-ODU Pole Installation Using the Tilt Accessory, Vertical Polarization
To mount the ODU on a pole using the Tilt accessory:
1 Attach the Tilt accessory to the ODU using the two pairs of flat washers,
spring washers and nuts supplied in the Tilt kit.
2 Mount the Tilt accessory on a 1" to 4" pole using two 9/16" metal bands.
3 Release slightly the Tilt Control Screw, tilt the ODU downward/upward as
required, and re-tighten the screw.
Installation
41
2.3.3 Connecting the Grounding and Antenna

Cables
The Grounding screw (marked ╤) is located on the bottom panel of the outdoor
unit (in the new SU-A-ODU it is located on the backside of the unit). The Antenna
RF connector (marked ) is located on the top panel of the AU-ODU/SU-E-ODU.
To connect the grounding cable:
1 Connect one end of a grounding cable to the grounding terminal and tighten
the grounding screw firmly.
2 Connect the other end of the grounding cable to a good ground (earth)
connection.
To connect the RF cable (units with external antenna):
1 Connect one end of the coaxial RF cable to the RF connector on the top panel
of the unit
2 Connect the other end of the RF cable to the antenna.
3 The RF connectors should be properly sealed to protect against rain and

moisture.
Figure 2-7: Bottom Panel of the ODU

(all ODUs except to new SU-A-ODU, shown without the sealing assembly)

42
Figure 2-8: Bottom Panel of the New SU-A-ODU (without IDU COM Sealing Cap)
NOTE
The MAC Address of the unit is marked on both the ODU and the indoor unit (on the print side of
the BS-AU module or on the bottom side of the Universal IDU). If for any reason the ODU is not
used with the IDU with which it was shipped, the MAC Address of the system is in accordance with
the marking on the ODU.
2.3.4 Connecting the Indoor-to-Outdoor Cable

2.3.4.1 Units with an Installed Waterproof Seal (not applicable to
new SU-A-ODU)
To connect the indoor-to-outdoor cable:
1 Remove the two screws holding the waterproof seal to the outdoor unit and
remove the waterproof seal.
2 Unscrew the top nut from the waterproof seal.
Figure 2-9: The Waterproof Seal
Installation
43
3 Route a straight Category 5E Ethernet cable (8-wire, 24 AWG) through both

the top nut and the waterproof seal.
NOTE
Use only Category 5E 4x2x24# FTP outdoor cables from an approved manufacturer. See list of
approved cables and length limitations in section 2.1.2.
4 Insert and crimp the RJ-45 connector. Refer to Appendix D for instructions
4
on preparing the cable.
5 Connect the Ethernet cable to the outdoor unit RJ-45 connector.
6 Replace the waterproof seal and then the top nut. Make sure that the external
jack of the cable is well inside the waterproof seal to guarantee a good seal.
7 Route the cable to the location selected for the indoor equipment.
8 Assemble an RJ-45 connector with a protective cover on the indoor end of the
indoor-to-outdoor cable.
2.3.4.2 Units with a Waterproof Seal Supplied with the Ethernet

Cable (not applicable to new SU-A-ODU)
To connect the indoor-to-outdoor cable:
1 Verify that the o-ring supplied with the cable kit is in place.
2 Connect the RJ-45 connector of the Ethernet cable to the outdoor unit.
3 Attach the waterproof seal to the unit. Tighten the top nut.
5 Assemble an RJ-45 connector with a protective cover on the indoor end of the
indoor-to-outdoor cable.
See Appendix D for instructions on preparing the cable.
2.3.4.3 New SU-A-ODU

1 The sealing cap has a special groove allowing to insert an ethernet cable with
an already assembled RJ-45 connector through the cap. To expose the groove,
lightly squeeze the cap. Carefully insert the cable with the assembled
connector through the groove.

44
Figure 2-10: Inserting the IDU COM Cable into the Sealing Cap
2 Connect the Ethernet cable to the IDU COM RJ-45 connector.
3 Put the sealing cap back in its place. Make sure that the small protrusion on
the side of the cap fits inside the hole on the connector's protective body.
Figure 2-11: Connecting the IDU COM connector and inserting the Sealing Cap
4 Use appropriate sealing material to protect the connection against moisture

and humidity. Use removable sealing material to enable future access to the
connector.
NOTE
®
Use high quality sealing material such as Scotch 130C Linerless Rubber Splicing Tape from 3M to
ensure IP-67 compliant protection against dust and water.
6 Assemble a shielded RJ-45 connector with a protective cover on the indoor

end of the IDU-ODU cable. See Appendix D for instructions on preparing the
cable.
Installation
45
2.4 Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit
The unit can be placed on a desktop or a shelf. Alternatively, it may be

wall-mounted using the kit supplied with the unit.
Figure 2-12: IDU PS 1073 Front Panel
The RADIO connector and RESET button are located on the front panel, the
ETHERNET connector is located on the side panel and LEDs are located on the
top panel.
CAUTION
Do not connect the data equipment to the RADIO port. The RADIO port supplies DC power to the
ODU, and this may harm other equipment connected to it.
To install the IDU:
1 Connect the Indoor-to-Outdoor cable to the RADIO connector, located on the

front panel of the indoor unit.
2 Connect the power cord to the unit's AC socket, located on the rear panel.
Connect the other end of the power cord to the AC mains. The unit can
operate with AC mains of 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz.
NOTE
The color codes of the power cable are as follows:
Brown Phase ~
Blue Neutral 0
Yellow/Green Ground
3 Verify that the POWER LED is lit, indicating that power is supplied to the
unit.
4 Configure the basic parameters as described in section 3.1.
5 Connect the 10/100 BaseT ETHERNET connector to the network. The cable
connection should be a straight Ethernet if connecting the indoor unit to a
hub/switch and a crossed cable if connecting it directly to a PC Network
Interface Card (NIC).

46
Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit
NOTE
The length of the Ethernet cable connecting the indoor unit to the user's equipment, together with
the length of the Indoor-to-Outdoor cable, should not exceed 100 meters.
2.4.1 RESET Button Functionality

Using a sharp object, press the recessed RESET button for a short time to reset
the unit and reboot from the Main version.
In units with ODU HW revision C and an IDU PS 1073, the RESET button can be
used for setting the unit to its factory defaults. Press the button for at least 5
seconds (until the ETH LED of the IDU stops blinking): the unit will reboot with
the factory default configuration.
NOTE
Reset the ODU using the RESET button on the IDU after connecting or reconnecting the indoor
and outdoor units with the indoor-to-outdoor cable.
Installation
47
2.5 Installing the SU-I
The following sections describe how to install the SU-I CPE.
2.5.1 Installation Requirements

2.5.1.1 Packing List
SU-I CPE
Power Adapter
3 meters Ethernet Cable
Wall/window mountable detached antenna kit, including wall/window

mounting accessories and a 2 meters SMA-SMA (M/M) RF cable (only with
SU-I-D).
2.5.1.2 Additional/Optional Items
Wall Mounting Bracket kit for the SU-I CPE*.
Mains plug adapter or termination plug (if the power plug on the power
adapter not fit local power outlets. The Power Adapter is supplied with a North
American power plug and an EU power connector adapter).
Portable PC with an Ethernet card and a straight Ethernet cable for

configuring parameters using either Telnet or BreezeCONFIG for
BreezeACCESS VL application. TFTP server SW is required for downloading
SW versions.
Other installation tools and materials (means for securing cables to walls,
etc.).
NOTE
Items marked with an asterisk (*) are available from Alvarion.

48
Installing the SU-I
2.5.2 SU-I Connectors and LEDs
Figure 2-13: SU-I Panel
Table 2-3: SU-I Panel Components
Name Description Functionality

Status Self-test and power Green: Power is available and self-test passed.
indication Blinking Amber: Testing (not ready for operation)
Red: Self-test failed. Fatal error
Ethernet Ethernet activity/ Green: Ethernet link between the SU-I and the data
connectivity indication equipment is detected, no activity
Blinking Green: Ethernet connectivity is OK, with
traffic on the port. Blinking rate proportional to traffic
rate.
Red: No Ethernet connectivity between the SU-I and
the data equipment.
W-Link Wireless Link traffic Green: Unit is associated with an AU, no wireless link
Indication activity
Blinking Green: Data received or transmitted on the
wireless link. Blinking rate is proportional to traffic
rate.
Off: Wireless link disabled
Installation
49

SNR bar Received signal Red LED: Signal is too low (SNR < 4dB).
strength Indication 8 green LEDs: Quality of the received signal.
Orange LED: Signal is too high (SNR > 50dB).
ETH RJ-45 Connector Connection to the user's LAN/PC:
Cable connection to a hub/switch/router: Crossed

Cable connection to a PC: Straight
RF SMA Jack Connection to detached antenna
48V DC DC Power Jack Connection to Power Adapter
* After power-up, the SIGNAL LEDs illuminates for a few seconds until self-test is
finished.
2.5.3 Installation Guidelines

The unit can be placed on a desktop or a shelf. It can also be wall mounted using
the optional bracket available from Alvarion. It uses a detached antenna.
Instructions for the available installation options of the detached antenna
(included in the SU-I-D package) are provided in the antenna package and in
Section 2.5.5.
It is recommended to install the antenna on a window or on a wall according to

specific conditions of the location. The antenna should be facing the direction of
the Base Station. Use only the RF cable supplied with the antenna (if needed, use
a longer Ethernet cable).
Avoid metal obstacles such as metal window frames or metal film anti-glare
windows in the transmission path.
Position the antenna away from electrical equipment, including the data
equipment, monitor etc., metal furniture, and moving metal objects such as metal
fans or doors.
2.5.4 Installing the SU-I

2.5.4.1 Connecting the SU-I
To install the SU-I:
1 Connect the Power Adapter DC cable to the POWER jack. Connect the Power
Adapter to the AC mains.

50
Installing the SU-I
2 Verify that the green Status LED located on the unit's front panel illuminates,
indicating that the power supply to the unit is OK and self test passed
successfully.
3 Connect the RF cable supplied with the antenna to the SMA jack located on
the unit’s front panel. Install the antenna using the instructions provided in
Section 2.5.5 on page 52, and connect to it the other end of the RF cable. Do
not over-tighten the SMA connectors.
4 If parameters are not pre-configured, configure the basic parameters as

described in Section 3.1.
5 Align the antenna as described in Section 3.3.
6 Connect the 10/100 Base-T Ethernet connector to the data equipment. The
cable connection should be a crossed Ethernet if connecting to a hub/switch
and a straight cable if connecting directly to a PC Network Interface Card
(NIC).
7 Verify proper operation of the Ethernet link (see Table 2-3 for the Ethernet
activity LED indication). To verify data connectivity from the end-user's PC or
from a portable PC connected to the unit, ping a known device in the network,
or try connecting to the Internet.
2.5.4.2 Wall Mounting the SU-I

The wall mounting kit for the SU-I includes a bracket, 2 screws, and 2 plastic
anchors. Refer to Figure 2-14.
1 If anchors are needed (wall-board, plaster board, etc.), drill two holes for the
anchors using a 6 mm drill bit and insert anchors. The distance between the
two holes should be 86 mm. Use the drilling template supplied with the SU-I.
2 Fasten the two screws provided with the kit directly to the anchors.
3 Use the two hangers on the rear to hang the mounting bracket on the two
screws. Make sure the bracket is stable.
4 Insert one side of the SU-I's base diagonally under the designated rail.
5 Gently apply pressure on the opposite side of the SU-I, until a clicking sound
is heard and the two bracket studs are locked onto the SU-I's base.
6 To dismount the SU-I, gently push the two bracket studs in the direction of
the wall and lift the CPE diagonally. Pull the CPE until free from the rail.
Installation
51
Figure 2-14: SU-I Wall Mount
2.5.5 Installing the Detached Antenna

The detached antenna kit includes the following components:
ALA04-200160 panel antenna
2 meter SMA-SMA (M/M) RF cable
Simple wall mounting kit, enabling installation on a wall (without any

capability for adjusting the direction). For installation instructions see
Section 2.5.5.1.
Wall mounting kit with rotation capability, enabling installation on a wall with
capability for adjusting the direction. For installation instructions see Section
2.5.5.2.

52
Installing the SU-I
Simple window mounting accessories, enabling installation on a glass window

(without any capability for adjusting the direction). For installation
instructions see Section 2.5.5.3.
Window mounting kit with rotation capability, enabling installation on a glass

window (with rotation capability for adjusting the direction). For installation
instructions see Section 2.5.5.4.
NOTE
Ensure that the antenna is mounted vertical to the floor, with the connector facing downward, and
the front of the antenna facing to the exterior of the building, preferably directed towards the Base
Station.
2.5.5.1 Wall Mount

The installation kit includes 2 plastic anchors and 2 #8 screws.
1 If anchors are needed (wall-board, plaster board, etc.), drill two holes for the
anchors using a 5 mm drill bit and insert anchors. Use a 9/64" drill bit for
screwing directly into a solid surface (stud).
2 Fasten the antenna to the wall. Refer to Figure 2-15 for directions. Use the
two #8 screws provided with the kit. Do not over tighten.
3 Connect the antenna cable to the connector located on the bottom side of the
antenna. Hand tighten, do not use a wrench or a similar tightening tool. Do
not over tighten.
Installation
53
Figure 2-15: Wall Mounting the Antenna
2.5.5.2 Wall Mount with Rotation Capability

The installation kit includes 4 L-type mounting plates (one top, one bottom, one
Wall-V and one Wall-H), 6 M5 screws (with washers and spring washers), 2
plastic anchors and 2 #8 screws.
1 If anchors are needed (wall-board, plaster board, etc.), drill two holes (361
mm apart) for the anchors using a 5 mm drill bit and insert anchors. Use a
9/64" drill bit for screwing directly into a solid surface (stud).
2 Assemble the top L-type plate with the Wall-V L-type plate. Note, the Wall-V
plate is the one with the vertical ellipse on the short side. Make sure the
inscriptions are facing upwards. Use two M5 screws to fasten the plates
together. Do not over tighten. See Figure 2-16.
3 Assemble the bottom L-type plate with the Wall-H L-type plate. Note, the
Wall-H plate is the one with the horizontal ellipse on the short side. Make
sure the inscriptions are facing upwards. Use two M5 screws to fasten the
plates together. Do not over tighten.

54
Installing the SU-I
4 Attach the assembled plates to the flat rear-side of the antenna. Use the two
remaining M5 screws to fasten them.
5 Fasten the antenna to the wall. Use the two #8 screws provided with the kit.
Do not over tighten.
antenna. Use only the torque key supplied with the antenna. Do not over
tighten. Do not use a wrench or a similar tightening tool.
7 Rotate the antenna left or right so the domed surface of the antenna is facing
the direction of the Base Station. Check the received Signal LEDs to ensure
the antenna is aimed correctly.
Figure 2-16: Wall Mount with Rotation Capability
Installation
55
2.5.5.3 Window Mount

The installation kit includes 2 suction cups.
1 Attach the suction cups to the antenna. Refer to Figure 2-17 for directions.
2 Determine the location of the antenna on the glass. Attach it to the window by
pressing the suction cups onto the glass.
Figure 2-17: Window Mounting the Antenna

56
Installing the SU-I
2.5.5.4 Window Mount with Rotation Capability

The installation kit includes the following: 4 PHK40*16PT screws (1), 2 M4
washers (2), 2 rotation bars (3) and 2 suction cups (4).
1 Attach the rotation bars to the antenna and the suction cups to the rotation
bars. Refer to Figure 2-18 for directions.
2 Determine the location of the antenna on the glass. Attach it to the window by
pressing the suction cups onto the glass.
4 Rotate the antenna left or right so the domed surface of the antenna is facing
the direction of the Base Station. Check the received Signal LEDs to ensure
the antenna is aimed correctly.
Installation
57
Figure 2-18: Window Mounting with Rotation Capability

58
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment
2.6 Installing the Modular Base Station

Equipment
The following sections describe the slot assignment for the Base Station chassis,
provide illustrated descriptions of the power supply modules and Access Unit
network interface modules, and describe how to install the Base Station
equipment.
2.6.1 BS-SH Slot Assignment

The Base Station chassis comprises ten slots, as shown in Figure 2-19.
Figure 2-19: BS-SH Chassis Slot Assignment
To enable power supply redundancy, two BS-PS power supply modules can be
installed in the wider side slots. If a single power supply module is used, it can be
inserted into either one of the two available slots.
The remaining eight slots can hold up to six BS-AU modules. Unused slots
should remain covered until required.
The design of the BS-SH supports collocation of BreezeACCESS VL Access Units

with Access Units belonging to other BreezeACCESS families using GFSK
modulation. It supports any mixture of BS-AU modules with BreezeACCESS
GFSK BS-AU modules, including an optional BS-GU-GPS module. If Access Units
belonging to other BreezeACCESS families are used, then it is necessary to use
two power supply modules: one BS-PS (AC or DC) power supply for the
BreezeACCESS VL Access Units and one BS-PS GFSK (AC or DC) for the
BreezeACCESS GFSK Access Units.
Installation
59
2.6.2 BS-PS-AC Power Supply Module

The BS-PS-AC is an AC to DC converter that provides power to all the BS-AU
modules installed in the BS-SH chassis. Figure 2-20 shows the BS-PS-AC front
panel.
Figure 2-20: BS-PS-AC Front Panel
The BS-PS-AC includes a power input connector, marked AC IN, for connecting
the AC power cord to the mains.
The ON/OFF Power Switch controls the flow of mains power to the power supply
module.
Table 2-4: BS-PS LED Functionality
Name Description
54V Green LED. Indicates that the 54V power supply module is OK
3.3V Green LED. Indicates that the 3.3V power supply module is OK
OVER TEMP Red LED. Indicates an over temperature condition in the power supply
module

60
2.6.3 BS-PS-DC Power Supply Module

The BS-PS-DC is a DC-to-DC converter that provides power to all the BS-AU
modules installed in the BS-SH chassis. Figure 2-21 shows the BS-PS-DC front
panel.
Figure 2-21: BS-PS-DC Front Panel
The BS-PS-DC provides a power input connector, marked -48VDC, for connecting
the -48 VDC power source to the module.
The color codes of the cable wires are as follows:
Black (pin 2): 48 VDC
White (pin 1): + (Return)
Shield (pin 3)
The ON/OFF Power Switch controls the flow of mains power to the power supply
module.
The functionality of the LEDs is described in Table 2-4.
Installation
61
2.6.4 BS-AU Network Interface Module

Figure 2-22 shows the front panel of the BS-AU Access Unit Network Interface
module.
Figure 2-22: BS-AU Front Panel
The BS-AU provides the following interfaces:
10/100 BaseT: A 10/100BaseT Ethernet connector for connecting the BS-AU

to the network. A straight Ethernet cable should be used to connect the
module to a hub, router or switch.
RADIO: A 10/100BaseT Ethernet connector for connecting the BS-AU to an

AU-ODU outdoor unit.
CAUTION
Do not connect the data equipment to the RADIO port. The RADIO port supplies DC power to the
ODU, and this may harm other equipment connected to it.
The recessed RESET switch on the front panel is for resetting the outdoor unit.

62
2.6.5 Installing the BS-SH Chassis and Modules

This section describes how to install the power supply and Access Unit network
interface modules in the Base Station chassis.
To install the BS SH chassis and modules:
1 Install the BS-SH chassis in a 19” cabinet. To prevent over-heating, leave a

free space of at least 1U between the upper/lower covers of the BS-SH chassis
and other units in the cabinet.
OR
Place the BS-SH chassis on an appropriate shelf or table. When mounting the
BS-SH on a shelf or table, attach the rubber legs supplied with the unit.
2 Connect one end of a grounding cable to the ground terminal located on the
rear panel of the BS-SH chassis and firmly tighten the grounding screw.
3 Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable to a ground connection or to

the cabinet, if applicable.
4 Carefully insert the BS-PS power supply and the BS-AU modules into the
relevant slots and push firmly until they are securely locked. Before insertion,
verify that the switches of all BS-PS modules are in the OFF position. Refer to
section 2.6.1 for a description of the slot assignment.
5 Close the captive screws attached to each module.
6 Place blank covers over all of the unused slots.
7 Connect the indoor-to outdoor cable(s) to the RADIO connector(s) of the

BS-AU module(s).
8 If a BS-PS-DC power supply is used, connect the DC power cord to the -48
VDC IN jack of the BS-PS-DC power supply. If a redundant power supply
module is installed, connect a DC power cord also to the second DC power
module. Connect the power cord(s) to the -48 VDC power source, as follows:
a Connect the black wire to the 48 VDC contact of the power source.
b Connect the white wire to the + (Return) contact.
c Connect the shield to the ground.
9 If a BS-PS-AC power supply is used, connect the AC power cord to the AC IN

jack of the BS-PS-AC power supply. If a redundant power supply module is
installed, connect an AC power cord also to the second AC power module.
Connect the power cord(s) to the mains outlet.
10 Switch the BS-PS-AC/DC power supplies to ON. Verify that all power
indicator LEDs on the BS-PS-AC/DC front panel are ON and that the
Installation
63
OVERTEMP alarm indicator is off. Refer to Table 2-4 for a description of these
LEDs.
11 Configure the basic parameters in all BS-AU modules as described in section

3.1.
12 Connect the 10/100 BaseT LAN connector(s) to the network. The cable
connection should be straight Ethernet if connecting the indoor unit to a
hub/switch and a crossed cable if connecting it directly to a PC Network
Interface Card (NIC).
NOTE
The length of each of the Ethernet cables (the cable connecting the indoor unit to the user's
equipment and the Indoor-to-Outdoor cable) should not exceed 100 meters.
Reset the unit using the RESET button after connecting or reconnecting the indoor and outdoor
units with the indoor-to-outdoor cable.

64
3
Chapter 3 - Commissioning
About This Chapter:
Configuring Basic Parameters, page 66
Using the Optional Y-cable (New SU-A-ODU), page 69
Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna, page 70
Configuring the Subscriber Unit’s Maximum Modulation Level, page 72
Operation Verification, page 74

3.1 Configuring Basic Parameters
After completing the installation process, as described in the preceding chapter,

the basic parameters must be configured to ensure that the unit operates
correctly. After the basic parameters have been configured, additional parameters
can be remotely configured via the Ethernet port or the wireless link using Telnet
or SNMP management, or by loading a configuration file.
Refer to section 4.1 for information on how to access the Monitor program using
Telnet and how to use it.
The Basic Configuration menu includes all the parameters necessary for the
initial installation and operation of Subscriber and Access Units. In many
installations, most of these parameters should not be changed from their default
values. The basic parameters and their default values are listed in Table 3-1.
Refer to Chapter 4 for detailed information on the applicable parameters.
Table 3-1: Basic Parameters
Parameter Default Value Comment

Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode (in Auto Negotiation
Unit Control Parameters)
IP Address 10.0.0.1
Subnet Mask 255.0.0.0
Default Gateway Address 0.0.0.0
DHCP Options Disable
Access to DHCP AU: From Ethernet Only

SU: From Wireless Only
ESSID ESSID1
Sub-Band Select (AU) 1 Applicable only if more

than one Sub-Band is
available
Frequency (AU) The lowest frequency in

the selected Sub-Band
User Defined Frequency Subsets All frequencies

(SU)

66
Configuring Basic Parameters

Transmit Power Dependent on HW Transmit Power in SU
revision, unit type and cannot be higher than the
Sub-Band Maximum Tx Power
parameter.
Maximum Tx Power (SU) Dependent on HW Maximum Tx Power

revision and Sub-Band cannot be higher than the
upper limit according to
the Sub-Band in use.
Tx Power (AU) On
Antenna Gain (units with external According to the antenna If set to “Not Set Yet”,
antenna) supplied with the unit and must be configured
the Sub-Band. according to actual value,
taking into account
cable’s attenuation.
ATPC Option Enable
Best AU Support (SU) Disable
Preferred AU MAC Address (SU) 00-00-00-00-00-00 (none) Applicable only when

Best AU Support is
enabled.
Cell Distance Mode (AU) Automatic
Maximum Cell Distance (AU) 0 (No Compensation)
Fairness Factor (AU) 100 (%)
Per SU Distance Learning (AU) Disable
Maximum Modulation Level (SU) 8 (or the highest value Refer to section 3.4.
supported according to
the country code). No
higher than 7 for units
with HW revision A.
VLAN ID-Management 65535
Commissioning
67

Authentication Algorithm Open System Availability of security
parameters depends on
Data Encryption Option Disable
support according to the
Security Mode WEP country code.
Default Multicast Key (AU) Key 1
Promiscuous Authentication (AU) Disable
Default Key (SU) Key 1
Key 1 to Key 4 00……0 (32 zeros,

meaning no key)
NOTE
Some parameters are changed to their new values only after reset (refer to Appendix F for more
details). After the basic parameters are configured, the unit should be reset in order to activate the
new configuration.

68
Using the Optional Y-cable (New SU-A-ODU)
3.2 Using the Optional Y-cable (New

SU-A-ODU)
A special Y-cable, available from Alvarion, enables to connect a a portable PC

directly to the IDU COM port of the SU-A-ODU. This enables the installer to
perform the entire process of configuring basic parameters, aligning the antenna
and verifying proper operation of the unit right after completing the installation,
minimizing the number of times the installer must climb to the roof. It also
enables simpler configuration/performance monitoring during various
maintenance/testing actions.
Figure 3-1: Connecting the Y-cable
Commissioning
69
3.3 Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna
NOTE
This antenna alignment process described in this section is applicable to both the SU-A-ODU and
the SU-I antenna, unless stated otherwise.
The SNR bar display is located on the bottom panel of the SU-A-ODU/front panel
of the SU-I indoor unit. The ten LEDs indicate the quality of the received signal.
The higher the number of green LEDs indicating On, the higher the quality of the
received signal. This section describes how to align the Subscriber Unit antenna
using the SNR bar display.
NOTE
Antenna alignment using the SNR bar display is possible only after the Subscriber Unit is
associated with an Access Unit. The associated Access Unit must be operational and the basic
Subscriber Unit parameters must be correctly configured. Otherwise, the unit will not be able to
synchronize with the Access Unit. As the SNR measurement is performed on received frames, its
results are meaningless unless the Subscriber Unit is associated with an Access Unit.
To align the Subscriber Unit antenna:
1 Align the antenna by pointing it in the general direction of the Base Station.
2 Verify that the power indication of the unit ( / )is On.
3 Verify that the W-LINK LED ( / ) of the ODU is On, indicating that the unit
is associated with an Access Unit. If the W-LINK LED is Off, check that the
ESSID and Frequency parameters are correctly configured. If the SU is still
not associated with the AU, increase the transmit power level to its maximum
value. If the unit is still not associated with the AU, improve the quality of the
link by changing the direction of the antenna or by placing the antenna at a
higher or alternate location.
4 Rotate the antenna until the maximum SNR reading is achieved, where at
least 1 green LED is on. If you encounter prolonged difficulty in illuminating
the minimum required number of green LEDs, try to improve the reception
quality by placing the antenna at a higher point or in an alternate location.
5 Ensure that the front of the antenna is always facing the Base Station.
However, in certain conditions, such as when the line of site to the Base
Station is hampered, better reception may be achieved using a reflected
signal. In this case, the antenna is not always directed toward the Base
Station.
6 Secure the unit firmly to the pole (SU-A-ODU)/fasten the rotation screws (SU-
I antenna).

70
Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna
NOTE
In some cases, the antenna may need to be tilted to ensure that the level at which the SU receives
transmissions from the AU (and vice versa) is not too high. As a rule of thumb, if the SU is located
at a distance of less than 300 meters from the AU, it is recommended to up-tilt the antenna by
approximately 10° to 15°. To guarantee a safety margin from the saturation level (received signal
of –40 dBm at the antenna port), the SNR should not be higher than 50 dB. The orange LED of the
SNR bar indicates that the SNR is higher than 50 dB.
Commissioning
71
3.4 Configuring the Subscriber Unit’s

Maximum Modulation Level
This section describes how to configure the maximum modulation level for
Subscriber Units.
NOTE
If the unit is associated with the AU, then the final configuration of the Maximum Modulation Level
parameter may be performed remotely, for example, from the site of the AU or from another site.
To configure the Maximum Modulation Level:
1 If the SNR of the SU at the AU is too low, it is recommended that you

configure the Maximum Modulation Level parameter to a value that is lower
than the maximum supported by the unit. This can decrease the number of
retransmissions due to attempts to transmit at modulation levels that are too
high for the actual quality of the link.
2 Check the SNR of the SU at the AU. You can use Telnet to view the SNR
values in the MAC Address Database, which can be accessed from the Site
Survey menu. If the ATPC algorithm is not enabled in both AU and SU, the
test should be done with the Initial Power Level at the SU configured to its
maximum value. If the SNR is lower than the values required for the
maximum modulation level according to Table 3-2, it is recommended that
you decrease the value of the Maximum Modulation Level.
NOTE
The SNR measurement at the AU is accurate only when receiving transmissions from the
applicable SU. If necessary, use the Ping Test utility in the Site Survey menu to verify data
transmission.
3 Configure the Maximum Modulation Level according to Table 3-2, using the
typical SNR values. It is recommended that a 2 dB margin be added to
compensate for possible measurement inaccuracy or variance in the quality of
the link.

72
Configuring the Subscriber Unit’s Maximum Modulation Level
Table 3-2: Recommended Maximum Modulation Level*
SNR Maximum Modulation Level

SNR > 23 dB 8
21 dB < SNR < 23 dB 7
16 dB < SNR < 21 dB 6
13 dB < SNR < 16 dB 5
10 dB < SNR < 13 dB 4
8 dB < SNR < 10 dB 3
7 dB < SNR < 8 dB 2
6 dB < SNR < 7 dB 1

* The maximum supported value depends on the unit’s HW revision and on the Max Modulation
Level according to the Sub-Band.
Commissioning
73
3.5 Operation Verification
The following sections describe how to verify the correct functioning of the
Outdoor Unit, Indoor Unit, Ethernet connection and data connectivity.
3.5.1 Outdoor Unit Verification

To verify the correct operation of the Outdoor Unit, examine the LED indicators
located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit.
The following tables list the provided LEDs and their associated indications.
NOTE
Verifying the correct operation of the Outdoor Unit using the LEDs, as described below, is only
possible after the configuration and alignment processes are completed.
Table 3-3: AU-ODU LEDs

W-LINK Wireless Link Green – Unit is associated with one or
Indictor more SUs
Blinking red – No associations
Off – Wireless link is disabled
Status Self-test and power Green – Power is available and
indication self-test passed.
Blinking Amber – Testing (not ready for
operation)
Red – Self-test failed – fatal error
ETH Ethernet activity/ Green –Ethernet link detected.
connectivity
Amber – No Ethernet connectivity between
indication the indoor and outdoor units.

74
Operation Verification
Table 3-4: SU-ODU LEDs

W-LINK Wireless Link Green – Unit is associated with an AU,
Indictor no wireless link activity
Blinking Green – Data received or
transmitted on the wireless link.
Blinking rate is proportional to wireless
traffic rate
Off – Wireless link is disabled
Status Self-test and power Green – Power is available and
indication self-test passed.
Blinking Amber – Testing (not ready for
operation)
Red – Self-test failed – fatal error
ETH Ethernet activity/ Green – Ethernet link between the
connectivity indoor and outdoor units is detected,
indication no activity
Blinking Green – Ethernet connectivity
is OK, with traffic on the port. Blinking
rate proportional to traffic rate.
Red – No Ethernet connectivity
between the indoor and outdoor units.
SNR BAR Received signal Red LED: Signal is too low
(SU-RA) strength Indication (SNR<4 dB)
8 green LEDs: Quality of the received
signal
Orange LED: Signal is too high
(SNR > 50 dB)
Commissioning
75
Table 3-5: SU-ODU SNR Bar LED Functionality
SNR Bar LEDs SNR (typical)

LED 1 (red) is On Signal is too low (SNR < 4 dB)
LED 2 (green) is On SNR > 4 dB
LEDs 2 to 3 (green) are On SNR > 8 dB
LEDs 2 to 9 (green) and 10 (orange) are On Signal is too high (SNR > 50 dB)

76
3.5.2 Indoor Unit Verification

To verify the correct operation of the indoor equipment, examine the LED
indicators located on the top panel of the SU IDU and AU IDU units, or on the
front panel of the BS-AU module.
Table 3-6 provides information for the BS-AU IDU LEDs. Table 3-7 lists the LEDs
of the PS1073 IDU.
Table 3-6: BS-AU LEDs

W-LINK Wireless link activity Green - At least one SU is associated.
Blinking Red - No SU is associated.
Off - Wireless link is disabled.
ODU CURRENT Current Consumption of Red - over current.
CONSUMPTION the Outdoor Unit
Blinking Red - open circuit or below
anticipated current consumption.
Green - within tolerance.
ODU STATUS Outdoor Unit Self-test Green - Self test passed and ODU
ready for operation.
Blinking Amber - Testing (not ready
for operation)
Red - fatal failure.
IDU PWR Power indication for the Green - IDU power is OK.
Indoor Unit
Off - no power is supplied to the IDU.
ALARM Indoor Unit Alarm Red - a fatal failure indication.
Indication
Off - IDU is functioning properly.
Commissioning
77
Table 3-7: PS1073 SU IDU / AU-SA IDU LEDs

POWER Power Indication Green – IDU power is OK
Off – No power or power failure
ETH Self test and end-to- Off – No Ethernet connectivity has
end Ethernet been detected between the outdoor
connectivity unit and the device connected to the
indoor unit.
Green – Self-test passed and Ethernet
connection confirmed by the outdoor
unit (Ethernet integrity check passed).
3.5.3 SU-I Unit Verification

To verify the correct operation of the SU-I unit, examine the LED indicators
located on the front panel of the SU-I unit.
The following tables list the provided LEDs and their associated indications.

78
Table 3-8: SU-I LEDs

Self-test and power Green: Power is available and self-test
indication passed.
Status Blinking Amber: Testing (not ready for
operation)
Red: Self-test failed. Fatal error
Ethernet activity/ Green: Ethernet link between the SU-I and

connectivity indication the data equipment is detected, no activity
Blinking Green: Ethernet connectivity is
Ethernet OK, with traffic on the port. Blinking rate
proportional to traffic rate.
Red: No Ethernet connectivity between
the SU-I and the data equipment.
Wireless Link traffic Green: Unit is associated with an AU, no

Indication wireless link activity
Blinking Green: Data received or
W-Link
transmitted on the wireless link. Blinking
rate is proportional to traffic rate.
Off: Wireless link disabled
Commissioning
79
Table 3-9: SU-I SNR Bar LED Functionality
SNR Bar LEDs SNR (typical)

LED 1 (red) is On Signal is too low (SNR < 4 dB)
LED 2 (green) is On SNR > 4 dB
LEDs 2 to 9 (green) and 10 (orange) are On Signal is too high (SNR > 50 dB)
3.5.4 Verifying the Ethernet Connection (Modular

Base station)
After connecting the unit to an Ethernet outlet, verify that the Ethernet Integrity
Indicator, which is the yellow LED embedded in the 10/100 BaseT connector, is
on. This indicates that the unit is connected to an Ethernet segment. The
Ethernet Activity Indicator, which is the green embedded LED, should blink
whenever the unit receives or transmits traffic on the 10/100 BaseT port.
3.5.5 Verifying the Indoor-to-Outdoor Connection

(Modular Base Station)
After connecting the unit to an Ethernet outlet, verify that the Ethernet Integrity
Indicator, which is the yellow LED embedded in the RADIO connector, is on. This
indicates that the unit has detected an Ethernet link connection. The Ethernet
Activity Indicator, which is the green embedded LED, should blink whenever the
unit receives or transmits traffic on the RADIO port.
3.5.6 Verifying Data Connectivity

To verify data connectivity, from the end-user’s PC or from a portable PC
connected to the unit, ping the Access Unit, or try to connect to the Internet.

80
4
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
In This Chapter:
Working with the Monitor Program, page 82
Menus and Parameters, page 85

4.1 Working with the Monitor Program
4.1.1 Accessing the Monitor Program Using Telnet

1 Connect a PC to the Ethernet port, using a crossed cable.
2 Configure the PC's IP parameters to enable connectivity with the unit. The
default IP address is 10.0.0.1.
3 Run the Telnet program. The Select Access Level menu is displayed.
4 Select the required access level, depending on your specific access rights. A
password entry request is displayed. Table 4-1 lists the default passwords for
each of the access levels.
Table 4-1: Default Passwords
Access Rights Password

Read-Only public
Installer user
Administrator private
NOTE
Following three unsuccessful login attempts (using incorrect passwords), the monitor program is
blocked for several minutes. To enable access to the monitor program during that time, the unit
must be reset via SNMP or by disconnecting/reconnecting power.
If you forgot the password, type "h" at the Access Level selection prompt. Type “Recover” at the
prompt to get a challenge string consisting of 8 characters. Contact Alvarion's Customer Service
and give them the challenge string (after user identification) to receive a one-time password.
Aftering entering this password at the prompt, the unit will reboot with the default Administrator
password (private). Three consecutive errors in entering the one-time password will invalidate it
and block the monitor program. A new challenge string should be used to receive a new one-time
password.
5 Enter your password and press Enter. The Main Menu is displayed as shown
in Figure 4-1. The unit type, SW version number and SW release date
displayed in the Main Menu vary according to the selected unit and SW
version.

82
Working with the Monitor Program
BreezeACCESS VL/AU
Official Release Version – 4.0.27
Release Date: Feb 13 2007, 12:59:23
Main Menu
==========
1 – Info Screens
2 – Unit Control
3 - Basic Configuration
4 – Site Survey
5 - Advanced Configuration
x - Exit
>>>
Figure 4-1: Main Menu (Administrator Level)
NOTE
If the Telnet session is not terminated properly; for example, if you simply close the window, the
monitor program is blocked for several minutes. To enable access to the monitor program during
that time, the unit must be reset via SNMP or by disconnecting/reconnecting power.
The display of the Main Menu varies depending on the user's access level, as
follows.
For users with read only access rights, only the Info Screens option is
displayed. Users with this access level are not able to access the Unit Control,
Basic Configuration, Site Survey and Advanced Configuration menus.
For users with Installer access rights, the first four menu items, Info Screens,
Unit Control, Basic Configuration and Site Survey, are displayed. Users with
this access level are not able to access the Advanced Configuration menu.
For users with Administrator access rights, the full Main Menu is displayed.
These users can access all menu items.
4.1.2 Common Operations

The following describes the standard operations used when working with the
Monitor program.
Type an option number to open or activate the option. In certain cases you
may need to click Enter.
Click Esc to exit a menu or option.
Operation and Administration

83
NOTE
The program is automatically terminated following a determined period of inactivity. The default
time out is 5 minutes and is configured with the Log Out Timer parameter.
In some cases, to activate any configuration changes, you must reset the unit.
Certain settings are automatically activated without having to reset the unit.
Refer to Appendix F for information on which parameters are run time
configurable, which means that the unit need not be reset for the parameter to
take effect, and which parameters do require that the unit be reset.

84
Menus and Parameters
4.2 Menus and Parameters
The following sections describe the menus and parameters provided by the
Monitor program.
4.2.1 Main Menu

The Main Menu enables to access the following menus, depending on your access
level, as described in section 4.1.
Info Screens: Provides a read only display of current parameter values.

Available at all access levels.
Unit Control: Enables to access general operations, such as resetting the

unit, reverting to factory default parameters, changing passwords and
switching between software versions. Available at the Installer and
Administrator access levels.
Basic Configuration: Enables to access the set of parameters that are

configured during the installation process. These parameters are also
available in the Advanced Configuration menu. Available at the Installer and
Administrator access levels.
Site Survey: Enables to activate certain tests and view various system
counters. Available at the Installer and Administrator access levels.
Advanced Configuration: Enables to access all system parameters, including

the Basic Configuration parameters. Available only at the Administrator access
level.
4.2.2 Info Screens Menu

The Info Screens menu enables you to view the current values of various
parameter sets. The parameter sets are identical to the main parameter groups in
the configuration menus. You can view a specific parameter set or choose to view
all parameters at once. While this menu is available at all access levels, some
security related parameters including the encryption Keys, ESSID and Operator
ESSID are only displayed to users with Administrator access rights.
The Info Screens menu includes the following options:
Show Unit Status
Show Basic Configuration

85
Show Advanced Configuration
Show Country Dependent Parameters
Show All Parameters
4.2.2.1 Show Unit Status

The Show Unit Status menu is a read only menu that displays the current values
of the following parameters:
Unit Name: As defined in the Unit Control menu.
Unit Type: Identifies the unit's function: AU-BS, AU-SA, AUS-BS, AUS-SA,
SU-3-1D, SU-6-1D, SU-6-BD, SU-54-BD, SU-I.
Unit MAC Address: The unit's unique IEEE MAC address.
Current Number of Associations (AU only): The total number of SUs

associated with this AU. This number may include units that are not
currently active as there is no aging algorithm for associated SUs.
NOTE
An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the following conditions:
A SNAP frame is received from another AU indicating that the SU is now associated with the
other AU.
The SU failed to respond to a certain number of consecutive frames transmitted by the AU and
is considered to have "aged out".
Number of Associations Since Last Reset: For SUs - displays the total
number of associations with any AU since the last reset, including duplicate
associations with the same AU. For AUs - displays the number of SUs that
have associated with the AU since the last reset, including duplicate
associations with the same SU.
Unit Status (SU only): The current status of the SU. There are two status
options:
SCANNING: The SU is searching for an AU with which to associate. If the

DFS Option is enabled and the SU is currently looking for its previous AU,
the AU’s MAC Address will be displayed.
ASSOCIATED: The SU is associated with an AU.

86
AU MAC Address (SU only): The MAC address of the AU with which the unit
is currently associated. If the unit is not associated with any AU, the address
defaults to the IEEE broadcast address, which is FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF.
Unit Hardware Version: The version of the outdoor unit hardware.
Unit BOOT Version: The version of the BOOT SW.
Time Since Last Reset
Flash Versions:
Running from: Shows whether the unit is running from the Main or from
the Shadow Version.
Main Version File Name: The name of the compressed file (with a “.bz”
extension) of the version currently defined as the main version.
Main Version Number: The software version currently defined as the

main version.
Shadow Version File Name: The name of the compressed file (with a “.bz”
extension) of the version currently defined as the shadow (backup) version.
Shadow Version Number: The software version currently defined as the

shadow (backup) version.
Radio Band: The radio band of the unit.
Log Out Timer: The value of the Log Out Timer as defined in the Unit Control
menu.
Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode: The Ethernet port negotiation mode as

defined in the Unit Control menu.
Ethernet Port State: The actual state of the Ethernet port.

87
FTP Parameters: General FTP parameters (common to SW Version Download,

Configuration File Upload/Download and Event File Upload using FTP):
FTP Server IP Address
FTP Gateway IP Address
FTP User Name
FTP Password
FTP Software Download Parameters: The parameters for SW download

using FTP, as defined in Unit Control menu.
FTP Source Directory
FTP SW Version File Name
Configuration File Download/Upload Parameters: The parameters for

Configuration file upload/download using FTP, as defined in the Unit Control
menu.
Configuration File Name
Configuration File Source Directory
Operator Defaults File Name
FTP Log File Upload Parameters: The parameters for Event Log file upload
using FTP, as defined in the Unit Control menu.
FTP Log File Name
FTP Log File Destination Directory
Event Log Policy
4.2.2.2 Show Basic Configuration

The Show Basic Configuration menu is a read only menu that displays the
current values of the parameters included in the Basic Configuration menu.

88
4.2.2.3 Show Advanced Configuration

The Show Advanced Configuration menu enables to access the read only sub
menus that display the current values of the parameters included in the
applicable sub menus of the Advanced Configuration menu.
4.2.2.4 Show Country Dependent Parameters

Each country has its radio regulation regarding transmissions in the applicable
bands that affect parameters such as available frequencies, bandwidth, transmit
power, etc. Some other parameters and options may also vary among countries.
For each country, one or more sets of parameters are pre-configured in the
factory. If more than one set is available, the set to be used can be selected. The
Show Country Dependent Parameters displays the available set(s) of these
parameters, and includes the following:
Country Code: The up to 3 digits country code according to ISO 3166 and
the country name. Some regulatory requirements apply to more than one
country. In these cases the Country Code includes a 4 digits proprietary
group code and the Country Group name (for example FCC).
Data Encryption Support: Indicates whether data encryption is supported

for the applicable country.
AES Encryption Support: Indicates whether encryption using AES is

supported for the applicable country.
Authentication Encryption Support: Indicates whether authentication

encryption is supported for the applicable country.
For each of the available sets (Sub-Bands), the following information is provided:
Sub-Band ID and Frequencies
Allowed Bandwidth: If more than one bandwidth is allowed, then each

bandwidth is associated with a different sub-band, as the bandwidth may
affect the available frequencies.
Regulation Max Tx Power at Antenna Port: The maximum transmit power

allowed at the antenna port of the unit.
Regulation Max EIRP: The maximum allowed EIRP (Effective Isotropic

Radiated Power) in dBm, or No Limit.
Min Modulation Level: The lowest allowed modulation level.

89
Max Modulation Level: The highest allowed modulation level.
Burst Mode: Indicates whether Burst Mode operation is allowed.
Maximum Burst Duration: If Burst Mode is allowed, this parameter displays

the upper limit for the Maximum Burst Duration.
DFS Option: Indicates whether the DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection)

mechanism for identification and avoidance of channels with radar activity is
supported.
Minimum HW Revision Support: The minimum HW revision required to

support the Sub-Band.
New Country Code files can be uploaded remotely using TFTP (see Appendix B).
4.2.2.5 Show All Parameters

The Show All Parameters menu is a read only menu that displays the current
values of all status and configuration parameters.
NOTE
The values of some security related parameters, including the encryption Keys, ESSID and
Operator ESSID, are available only with Administrator access rights.
4.2.3 Unit Control Menu

The Unit Control menu enables configuring control parameters for the unit. The
Unit Control menu includes the following options:
Reset Unit
Default Settings
Change Unit Name
Change Password
Flash Memory Control
SW Version Download
Configuration File Upload/Download
Log Out Timer

90
Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode
Change System Location
Event Log Menu
Feature Upgrade
4.2.3.1 Reset Unit

The Reset Unit option enables resetting the unit. After reset, any modifications
made to the system parameters are applied.
4.2.3.2 Default Settings

The Set defaults submenu enables resetting the system parameters to a
predefined set of defaults or saving the current configuration as the set of
Operator Defaults.
The Default Setting options are available only to users with Administrator access
rights.
The available options are:
Set Defaults
Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults
4.2.3.2.1 Set Defaults

The Set Defaults submenu enables reverting the system parameters to a
predefined set of defaults. There are two sets of default configurations:
A Factory Defaults: This is the standard default configuration.
B Operator Defaults: Operator Defaults configuration can be defined by the

Administrator using the Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults
option in this menu. It may also be defined at the factory according to specific
operator's definition. The default Operator Defaults configuration is the
Factory Defaults configuration.
The current configuration file and the Operator Defaults configuration file can be
uploaded/downloaded by the unit using FTP. For more information, see section
4.2.3.7 option. These files can also be uploaded/downloaded remotely using TFTP
(see Appendix B).
The available options in the Set Defaults submenu are:
Set Complete Factory Defaults

91
Set Partial Factory Defaults
Set Complete Operator Defaults
Set Partial Operator Defaults
Cancel Current Pending Request
4.2.3.2.1.1 Set Complete Factory Defaults

Select this option to reset the unit to the standard Factory Defaults configuration,
excluding several parameters that are listed in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2: Parameters not reset after Set Complete Factory/Operator Defaults
Parameters Group Parameter

Unit Control Parameters All Passwords
FTP Server IP address* (see note below)
FTP Gateway IP address* (see note below)
FTP User Name* (see note below)
FTP Password* (see note below)
Air Interface Parameters Selected Sub-Band (AU)
Frequency (AU)
DFS Option (AU)
Frequency Subset (AU)
Antenna Gain (AU)
NOTE
The FTP parameters are not set to their default values after Set Complete Operator Defaults.
However, they are set to their default value after Set Complete Factory Defaults. Note that in this
case they are set to the default values immediately upon selecting the Set Complete Factory
Default option (even before the next reset).
4.2.3.2.1.2 Set Partial Factory Defaults

Select this option to reset the unit to the standard Factory Default configuration,
excluding the parameters that are required to maintain connectivity and
management access. The parameters that do not change after Set Partial Factory
Defaults are listed in Table 4-3.

92
Table 4-3: Parameters that are not reset after Set Partial Factory/Operator Defaults

Unit Control parameters Passwords
FTP Server IP address
FTP Gateway IP Address
FTP User Name
FTP Password
IP Parameters IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway Address
DHCP Option
Access to DHCP
Security Parameters Authentication Algorithm
Default Key (SU)
Data Encryption Mode
Default Multicast Key (AU)
Security Mode
Key # 1 to Key # 4

93

Air Interface Parameters ESSID
Operator ESSID Option (AU)
Operator ESSID (AU)
Cell Distance Mode (AU)
Maximum Cell Distance (AU)
Per SU Distance Learning Option (AU)
Selected Sub-Band (AU)
Frequency (AU)
DFS Option (AU)
SU Waiting Option (AU)
Channel Reuse Option (AU)
Radar Activity Assessment Period (AU)
Maximum Number of Detections in Assessment

Period (AU)
Frequency Subset (AU)
ATPC Option (AU)
Transmit Power
Maximum Tx Power (SU)
Tx Control (AU)
Best AU Support (SU)
Preferred AU MAC Address (SU)
All Noise Immunity Control parameters
Network Management Parameters AP Client IP Address (SU)
Performance Parameters Adaptive Modulation Decision Thresholds

94

Bridge Parameters VLAN ID – Management
Service Provider VLAN ID (SU)
VLAN QinQ Protocol Ethertype
MAC Address List (AU)
MAC Address List Action (AU)
Service Parameters DRAP Option (AU)
UDP Port (AU)
Max Number of Voice Calls (AU)
DRAP TTL (AU)
Wireless Link Prioritization Option (AU)
Low Priority AIFS (AU)
Number of HW Retries for High Priority Traffic (AU)
Number of HW Retries for Low Priority Traffic (AU)
AU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic (AU)
AU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic (AU)
SU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic (AU)
SU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic (AU)
Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent
4.2.3.2.1.3 Set Complete Operators Defaults

Select this option to reset the unit to the Operator Defaults configuration,
excluding several parameters that are listed in Table 4-2.
4.2.3.2.1.4 Set Partial Operator Defaults

Select this option to reset the unit to the Operator Defaults configuration,
excluding the parameters that are required to maintain connectivity and
management access. The parameters that do not change after Set Partial
Operator Defaults are listed in Table 4-3.

95
4.2.3.2.1.5 Cancel Current Pending Request

After selecting one of the Set defaults options, it will be executed after the next
reset. This option enables to cancel the pending request before execution
(provided the unit has not been reset yet).
4.2.3.2.2 Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults

The Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults enables defining the
current configuration of the unit as the Operator Defaults configuration.
4.2.3.3 Change Unit Name

The Change Unit Name option enables changing the name of the unit, which is
also the system's name in the MIB2. The name of the unit is also used as the
prompt at the bottom of each Monitor window.
Valid values: A string of up to 32 printable ASCII characters.
The default unit name is an empty string.
4.2.3.4 Change Password

The Change Password submenu enables changing the access password(s). The
Change Password submenu is available only to users with Administrator access
rights.
Refer to section 4.1 for a list of the default passwords for each of the access levels.
4.2.3.5 Flash Memory Control

The Flash Memory Control submenu enables selecting the active software version
for the unit.
The flash memory can store two software versions. One version is called Main and
the other is called Shadow. New software versions are loaded as the shadow
version. You can select the shadow version as the new active version by selecting
Reset and Boot from Shadow Version. However, after the next reset, the main
version is re-activated. To continue using the currently active version after the
next reset, select Use Running Version After Reset: The previous shadow
version will be the new main version, and vice versa.
The parameters configured in the unit are not changed as a result of loading new
software versions unless the new version includes additional parameters or
additional changes in the list of parameters. New parameters are loaded with
their default values.
Select from the following options:

96
Reset and Boot from Shadow Version: Activates the shadow (backup)
software version. The unit is reset automatically. Following the next reset the
unit will switch to the main version.
Use Running Version After Reset: Defines the current running version as
the new main version. This version will also be used following the next reset.
4.2.3.6 SW Version Download

The SW Version Download submenu enables the optional downloading of a SW
Version file from a remote FTP server. The SW Version Download submenu
includes the following options:
Execute FTP GET SW Version: The Execute FTP GET SW Version option
executes the SW Version FTP download according to the parameters defined
below.
FTP SW Source Dir: The FTP SW Source Dir option enables defining the
source directory of the SW version file.
Valid values: A string of up to 80 printable ASCII characters. To clear the field

press "."
The default is an empty string.
FTP SW Version File Name: The FTP SW Version File Name option enables
defining the name of the SW version file in the FTP server.
Valid values: A string of up to 20 printable ASCII characters. An empty string

is not allowed.
The default is VxWorks.bz.
FTP Server IP Address: The FTP Server IP Address option enables defining
the IP address of the FTP server that is hosting the SW Version file.
The default is: 10.0.0.253.
FTP Gateway IP Address: The FTP Gateway IP Address option enables

defining the FTP default gateway address.
FTP User Name: The FTP User Name option enables defining the user name
to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the SW Version file.

97
The default is: vx
FTP Password: The FTP Password option enables defining the password to be
used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the SW Version file.
The default is: vx
Show SW Version Download Parameters and Status: Displays the current

values of the SW Version Download parameters, the current SW version and
the SW versions stored in the Flash memory.
NOTE
There is one set of general FTP parameters (FTP Server IP Address, FTP Gateway IP Address,
FTP User Name and FTP Password). This set (or relevant parts of the set) serves the SW
Download Procedure, the Configuration File Upload/Download procedure and the Event Log File
Upload procedure. Changing any of these parameters in the menu for any procedure will
automatically change its value in the menu for the other procedures.
4.2.3.7 Configuration File Upload/Download

The Configuration File Upload/Download submenu enables the optional
uploading or downloading of a configuration or an Operator Defaults file from a
remote FTP server. The Configuration File Upload/Download submenu includes
the following options:
Execute FTP GET/PUT Configuration File: The Execute FTP GET/PUT

Configuration File executes the upload/download of a Configuration file or an
Operator Defaults file according to the parameters defined below. The
following options are available:
Execute FTP Get Configuration File (cfg)
Execute FTP Put Configuration File (cfg)
Execute FTP Get Operator Defaults File (cmr)
Execute FTP Put Operator Defaults File (cmr)
FTP Configuration File Source Dir: The FTP Configuration File Source Dir
option enables defining the source directory of the configuration/Operator
Defaults file.

98

press "."
Configuration File FTP File Name: The Configuration File FTP File Name
option enables defining the name of the configuration file to be
uploaded/downloaded.

is not allowed.
The default is config.cfg.
Operator Defaults FTP File Name: The Operator Defaults File Name option
enables defining the name of the Operator Defaults file to be
uploaded/downloaded.

is not allowed.
The default is operator.cmr.
FTP Server IP Address: The FTP Host IP Address option enables defining the
IP address of the FTP server that is hosting the file.
The default is: 10.0.0.253

to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file.
The default is: vx
used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file.
The default is: vx

99
Show Configuration File Upload/Download Parameters: Displays the

current values of the Configuration File Upload/Download parameters.
NOTE
Download procedure, the Configuration File Upload/Download procedure and the Event Log File
Upload procedure. Changing any of these parameters in the menu for either procedure will
4.2.3.8 Log Out Timer

The Log Out Timer parameter determines the amount of inactive time following
which the unit automatically exits the Monitor program.
The time out duration can range from 1 to 999 minutes.
The default value is 5 minutes.
4.2.3.9 Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode

The Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode submenu displays the current Ethernet port
state and enables defining the negotiation mode of the Ethernet port. The
available options are:
Force 10 Mbps and Half-Duplex
Force 10 Mbps and Full-Duplex
Auto Negotiation (10/100 Mbps and Half/Full Duplex)
The default is Auto Negotiation (10/100 Mbps and Half/Full Duplex)
4.2.3.10 Change System Location

The Change System Location option enables changing the system location of the
unit, which is also the sys location in MIB2. The System Location is also
displayed as a part of the Monitor menu’s header.
The default system location is an empty string.

100
4.2.3.11 Event Log Menu

The Event Log Menu enables controlling the event log feature. The event log is an
important debugging tool and a flash memory sector is dedicated for storing it.
Events are classified according to their severity level: Message (lowest severity),
Warning, Error or Fatal (highest severity).
The severity level of events that should be saved in the Event Log is configurable.
Events from the configured severity and higher are saved and may be displayed
upon request. Log history can be displayed up to the full number of current
active events. In the log, an event is defined as active as long as it has not been
erased (a maximum of 1000 events may be stored). The Event Log may be read
using TFTP, with remote file name <SNMP Read Community>.log (the default
SNMP Read Community is “public”). The Event Log may also be uploaded to a
remote FTP server.
The Event Log Menu includes the following options:
Event Log Policy
Display Event Log
Erase Event Log
Event Load Upload
4.2.3.11.1 Event Log Policy

The Event Log Policy determines the minimal severity level. All events whose
severity is equal to or higher than the defined severity are logged.
Valid values are: Message (MSG) Level, Warning (WRN) Level, Error (ERR) Level,
Fatal (FTL) Level, Log None.
The default selection is Warning Level severity.
4.2.3.11.2 Display Event Log

The Display Event Log option enables viewing how many events are logged and
selecting the number of events to be displayed (up to 1000). The display of each
event includes the event time (elapsed time since last reset), the severity level and
a message string. The events are displayed according to the time at which they
were generated, with the most recent event displayed last (first in – first out).
4.2.3.11.3 Erase Event Log

The Erase Event Log option enables clearing the event log.

101
4.2.3.11.4 Event Log Upload

The Event Log Upload submenu enables the optional uploading of the event log
file to a remote FTP server. The Event Log Upload submenu includes the following
options:
FTP Event Log Upload Execute: The FTP event Log Upload Execute executes
the upload of the Event Log file according to the parameters defined below.
Event Log Destination Directory: The Event Log Destination Directory

enables defining the destination directory for the Event Log File.

press "."
Event Log File Name: The Event Log File Name option enables defining the
name of the event log file to be uploaded.
The default is logfile.log.
FTP Server IP Address: The FTP Host IP Address option enables defining the
IP address of the FTP server that is hosting the file.
The default is: 10.0.0.253

to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file.
The default is: vx
used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file.
The default is: vx

102
Show FTP Event Log File Upload Parameters: Displays the current values
of the Event Log Upload parameters.
NOTE
Download procedure, the Configuration File Upload/Download procedure and the Event Log File
Upload procedure. Changing any of these parameters in the menu for either procedure will
4.2.3.12 Feature Upgrade

The Feature Upgrade option enables to enter a license string for upgrading the
unit to support new features and/or options. Upon selecting the Manual Feature
Upgrade option the user will be requested to enter the license string. Each license
string is associated with a unique MAC Address and one feature/option. If the
encrypted MAC Address in the license string does not match the unit’s MAC
Address, the string will be rejected. If there is a match, a message notifying of the
new feature/option will be displayed. The unit must be reset for the change to
take effect.
The license string should comprise 32 to 64 hexadecimal digits.
New Feature License files can be uploaded remotely using TFTP (see Appendix B).
4.2.4 Basic Configuration Menu

The Basic Configuration menu includes all parameters required for the initial
installation and operation of the unit. After the unit is properly installed and
operational, additional parameters can be configured either locally or remotely
using Telnet or SNMP management.
NOTE
All parameters in the Basic Configuration menu are also available in the relevant sub menus of the
Advanced Configuration menu.
The Basic Configuration menu enables to access the following parameter sets:
4.2.4.1.1 IP Parameters
IP Address
Subnet Mask
DHCP Client

103
DHCP Option
Access to DHCP
Refer to section 4.2.6.1 for a description of these parameters.
4.2.4.1.2 Air Interface Parameters
ESSID
Operator ESSID Parameters (AU)
Operator ESSID Option
Operator ESSID
Frequency Definition
Select Sub-Band (AU, if more than one is available)
Frequency (AU)
User Defined Frequency Subsets (SU)
Best AU Parameters (SU)
Best AU Support
Preferred AU MAC Address
Cell Distance Parameters (AU)
Cell Distance Mode
Maximum Cell Distance
Fairness Factor
Per SU Distance Learning
ATPC Parameters
ATPC Option
Transmit Power

104
Maximum Tx Power (SU)
Tx Control (AU)
Antenna Gain
4.2.4.1.3 Performance Parameters
Maximum Modulation Level (SU)
4.2.4.1.4 Bridge Parameters
VLAN Support
VLAN ID – Management
4.2.4.1.5 Security Parameters
Authentication Algorithm
Data Encryption Option
Security Mode
Default Multicast Key (AU)
Default Key (SU)
Key 1 to Key 4
Promiscuous Authentication (AU)
Some or all of the security parameters may not be available in units that do not
support the applicable features. Refer to section 4.2.6.7 for a description of these
parameters.
4.2.5 Site Survey Menu

The Site Survey menu displays the results of various tests and counters for
verifying the quality of the wireless link. These tests can be used to help

105
determine where to position the units for optimal coverage, antenna alignment
and troubleshooting. The counters can serve for evaluating performance and
identifying potential problems. In the AU, there is also an extensive database for
all SUs served by it.
The Site Survey menu includes the following options:
Traffic Statistics
Ping Test
Continuous Link Quality display (SU only)
MAC Address Database
Per Modulation Level Counters
Link Capability
4.2.5.1 Traffic Statistics

The traffic statistics are used to monitor, interpret and analyze the performance
of the wired and wireless links. The counters display statistics relating to wireless
link and Ethernet frames. The Traffic Statistics menu includes the following
options:
Display Counters: Select this option to display the current value of the
Ethernet and wireless link (WLAN) counters.
Reset Counters: Select this option to reset the counters.
4.2.5.1.1 Ethernet Counters

The unit receives Ethernet frames from its Ethernet port and forwards the frames
to its internal bridge, which determines whether each frame should be
transmitted to the wireless medium. Frames discarded by the unit's hardware
filter are not counted by the Ethernet counters. For units with HW revision B and
lower, the maximum length of a regular IEEE 802.1 Ethernet packet that can be
accepted from or transmitted to the Ethernet port is 1514 bytes, excluding CRC
and VLAN(s). For units with HW revision C and higher, the maximum length of an
Ethernet packet that can be accepted from or transmitted to the Ethernet port
(excluding CRC) is 1600 bytes, including VLAN(s) for single or double-tagged
packets.

106
The unit transmits valid data frames received from the wireless medium to the
Ethernet port, as well as internally generated frames, such as responses to
management queries and pings received via the Ethernet port.
The Ethernet Counters include the following statistics:
Total received frames via Ethernet: The total number of frames received
from the Ethernet port. This counter includes both invalid frames (with errors)
and valid frames (without errors).
Transmitted wireless to Ethernet: The number of frames transmitted by the

unit to the Ethernet port. These are generally frames received from the
wireless side, but also include frames generated by the unit itself.
4.2.5.1.2 WLAN Counters

The unit submits data frames received from the Ethernet port to the internal
bridge, as well as self generated control and wireless management frames. After a
unicast data frame is transmitted, the unit waits for an acknowledgement (ACK)
message from the receiving unit. Some control and wireless management frames,
as well as broadcast and multicast frames sent to more than one unit, are not
acknowledged. If an ACK is not received after a predefined time, which is
determined by the Maximum Cell distance parameter, the unit retransmits the
frame until an ACK is received. If an ACK is not received before the number of
retransmissions has reached a maximum predefined number, which is
determined by the Number of HW Retries parameter, the frame is dropped.
Each packet to be transmitted to the wireless link is transferred to one of three

queues: Low, Medium and High. Packets in the High queue have the highest
priority for transmission, and those in the Low queue have the lowest priority.
The packets in the High queue will be transmitted first. When this queue is
emptied, the packets in the Medium queue will be sent. Finally, when both the
High and Medium queues are empty, the packets in the Low queue will be sent.
Data packets are routed to either the High or Low queue, according to the queue
selected for them before the MIR/CIR mechanism (for more information see
section 4.2.6.6.3).
Broadcasts/multicasts are routed to the Medium queue (applicable only for AU).
Control and wireless management frames generated in the unit are routed to the
High queue.
Any frame coming from the Ethernet port, which is meant to reach another
BreezeACCESS VL unit via the wireless port (as opposed to messages intended for
stations behind other BreezeACCESS VL units), is sent to the High queue,
regardless of the priority configuration.

107
The Wireless Link Counters include the following statistics:
Total transmitted frames to wireless: The number of frames transmitted to

the wireless medium. The total includes one count for each successfully
transmitted unicast frame (excluding retransmissions), and the number of
transmitted multicast and broadcast frames, including control and wireless
management frames. In the AU, there are also separate counters for the
following:
Beacons (AU only)
Management and Other Data frames, including successfully transmitted

unicast frames and multicast/broadcast data frames (excluding
retransmissions, excluding Beacons in AU)
Total Transmitted Unicasts (AU only): The number of unicast frames

successfully transmitted to the wireless medium, excluding retransmissions.
This count is useful for calculating the rates of retransmissions or dropped
frames, as only unicast frames are retransmitted if not acknowledged.
Total submitted frames (bridge): The total number of data frames submitted
to the internal bridge for transmission to the wireless medium. The count
does not include control and wireless management frames, or
retransmissions. There are also separate counts for each priority queue
through which the frames were routed (High, Mid and Low).
Frames dropped (too many retries): The number of dropped frames, which
are unsuccessfully retransmitted without being acknowledged until the
maximum permitted number of retransmissions. This count includes dropped
data frames as well as dropped control and wireless management frames.
Total retransmitted frames: The total number of retransmissions, including

all unsuccessful transmissions and retransmissions.
Total transmitted concatenated frames: The total number of concatenated

frames transmitted successfully to the wireless medium, excluding
retransmissions. There are also separate counts for concatenated frames that
include one frame (Single), two frames (Double) or more than two frames
(More). For more details refer to section 4.2.6.5.10.
Total Tx events: The total number of transmit events. Typically,

transmission events include cases where transmission of a frame was delayed
or was aborted before completion. The following additional counters are
displayed to indicate the reason for and the nature of the event:

108
Dropped: The number of dropped frames, which are unsuccessfully

retransmitted without being acknowledged until the maximum permitted
number of retransmissions.
Underrun: The number of times that transmission of a frame was aborted

because the rate of submitting frames for transmission exceeds the
available transmission capability.
Others: The number of frames whose transmission was not completed or

delayed due to a problem other than those represented by the other
counters.
Total received frames from wireless: The total number of frames received
from the wireless medium. The count includes data frames as well as control
and wireless management frames. The count does not include bad frames and
duplicate frames. For a description of these frames, refer to Bad frames
received and Duplicate frames discarded below.
Total received data frames: The total number of data frames received from
the wireless medium, including duplicate frames. Refer to Duplicate frames
discarded below.
Total Rx events: The total number of frames that were not received properly.
The following additional counters are displayed to indicate the reason for the
failure:
Phy: The number of Phy errors (unidentified signals).
CRC: The number of frames received from the wireless medium containing
CRC errors.
Overrun: The number of frames that were discarded because the receive
rate exceeded the processing capability or the capacity of the Ethernet
port.
Decrypt: The number of frames that were not received properly due to a
problem in the data decryption mechanism.
Total received concatenated frames: The total number of concatenated

frames received from the wireless medium, including duplicate frames. There
are also separate counts for concatenated frames that include one frame
(Single), two frames (Double) or more than two frames (More). For more details
refer to section 4.2.6.5.10.

109
Bad fragments received: The number of fragments received from the wireless
medium containing CRC errors.
Duplicate frames discarded: The number of data frames discarded because

multiple copies were received. If an acknowledgement message is not received
by the originating unit, the same data frame can be received more than once.
Although duplicate frames are included in all counters that include data
frames, only the first copy is forwarded to the Ethernet port.
Internally discarded MIR\CIR: The number of data frames received from the
Ethernet port that were discarded by the MIR/CIR mechanism to avoid
exceeding the maximum permitted information rate.
4.2.5.2 Ping Test

The Ping Test submenu is used to control pinging from the unit and includes the
following options:
Destination IP Address: The destination IP address of the device being

pinged. The default IP address is 192.0.0.1.
Number of Pings to Send: The number of ping attempts per session. The
available range is from 0 to 9999. The default value is 1. Select 0 for
continuous pinging.
Ping Frame Length: The ping packet size. The available range is from 60 to
1472 bytes. The default value is 64 bytes.
Ping Frame Timeout: The ping frame timeout, which is the amount of time
(in ms) between ping attempts. The available range is from 100 to 60,000 ms.
The default value is 200 ms.
Start Sending: Starts the transmission of ping frames.
Stop Sending: Stops the transmission of ping frames. The test is

automatically ended when the number of pings has reached the value
specified in the No. of Pings parameter, described above. The Stop Sending
option can be used to end the test before completing the specified number of
pings, or if continuous pinging is selected.
Show Ping Test Values: Displays the current values of the ping test
parameters, the transmission status, which means whether it is currently
sending or not sending pings, the number of pings sent, and the number of
pings received, which means the number of acknowledged frames.

110
4.2.5.3 Link Quality (SU only)

The Link Quality submenu enables viewing continuously updated information on
the quality of the wireless link. The Link quality submenu includes the following
options:
4.2.5.3.1 Continuous Average SNR Display

The Continuous Average SNR Display option displays continuously updated
information regarding the average quality of the received signal, using Signal to
Noise Ratio (SNR) measurements.
Click the Esc key to abort the test.
4.2.5.3.2 Continuous UpLink Quality Indicator Display

The Continuous UpLink Quality Indicator Display option displays continuously
updated information regarding the average quality of the wireless link to the AU,
using the dynamically updated average modulation level measurements. The Link
Quality Indicator (LQI) calculation is performed using the formula:
LQI = (0.9 x ”Previous LQI”) + (0.1 x ”Last Successful Modulation Level”).
Each successful transmit will be included in this average, by using the

modulation level in which the frame was successfully transmitted as the “Last
Successful Modulation Level”.
In order to receive quick and reliable LQI measurements, there should be

sufficient traffic between the SU and the AU. It is recommended to have traffic of
at least 100 packets per second. The traffic can be generated either by an
external utility (FTP session, ping generator, etc.) or by the Ping Test option in the
Site Survey menu with the appropriate settings (see section 4.2.5.2).
NOTE
If Limited Test is indicated next to the LQI results, it means that the results may not indicate the true
quality, as not all modulation levels from 1 to 8 are available. The limitation may be due to the HW
of the unit (HW Revision A), or the applicable parameters in the country code, or the configurable
Maximum Modulation Level parameter.
Click the Esc key to abort the test.
4.2.5.4 MAC Address Database

4.2.5.4.1 MAC Address Database in AU
The MAC Address Database option in the AU displays information regarding the
Subscriber Units associated with the AU, as well as bridging (forwarding)
information. When DRAP is supported, it enables viewing details on the active
Gateways in the sector. The following options are available:

111
Display Bridging and Association Info: The Display Bridging and

Association Info option displays a list of all the Subscriber Units and stations
in the AU's Forwarding Database. For stations behind an SU, the SU's MAC
address is also displayed (SU Address).
Each MAC address entry is followed by a description, which may include the
following:
Et (Ethernet): An address learned from the Ethernet port.
Vp (Virtual port): An address of a node behind an associated SU. For

these addresses, learned from the wireless port, the address of the
applicable SU is also displayed (in parenthesis).
St (Static): An associated SU. For these entries, the following details are
also displayed: SU Unit Name, SU SW version, SU Unit Type and SU’s
Distance from the AU.
X: An SU that is included in the Deny List.
Sp (Special): 7 addresses that are always present, including:
The MAC address of the AU, which appears twice as it is learned from
both the Ethernet and wireless ports.
The MAC address of the internal Operating System stack, which also
appears twice.
Alvarion's Multicast address (01-20-D6-00-00-01, which also appears

twice. The system treats this address as a Broadcast address.
The Ethernet Broadcast address (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF).
In addition, a summary table displays information about the Forwarding

Database (Bridging Info) and the Associated Subscriber Units Database
(Association Info). Each database includes the following information:
The current number of entries. For Bridging Info this includes the Et
(Ethernet) and the Vp (Virtual ports) entries. For Association Info this is
the number of the currently associated SUs.

112
NOTE
There is no aging algorithm for associated SUs. An SU is only removed from the list of associated
SUs under the following conditions:
other AU.
The SU failed to respond to 50 consecutive frames transmitted by the AU and is considered to

have "aged out".
The aging time specified for entries in these tables. The aging time for
Bridging Info is as specified by the Bridge Aging Time parameter. The
default is 300 seconds. There is no aging time for Association Info entries.
The maximum number of entries permitted for these tables, which are
1017 (1024 minus the number of special Sp addresses as defined above)
for Bridging Info and as specified by the Maximum Number of
Associations parameter for Association Info. The default value of the
Maximum Number of Associations parameter is 512.
NOTE
When Data Encryption is enabled, the actual maximum number of associations is limited to 124.
The displayed number is the value configured for the Maximum Number of Associations parameter,
which might be higher than the actual limit.
Display Association Info: Displays information regarding the Subscriber

Units associated with the AU. Each list entry includes the following
information:
The MAC Address of the associated Subscriber Unit
Age in seconds, indicating the elapsed time since receiving the last packet
from the Subscriber Unit.
The value configured for the Maximum Modulation Level parameter of the
Subscriber Unit
The Status of the Subscriber Unit. There are three options:
1 Associated
2 Authenticated
3 Not Authenticated (a temporary status)

113
The various status states are described below (this is a simplified

description of the association process without the effects of the Best AU
algorithm).
Table 4-4: Authentication and Association Process
Message Direction Status in AU

SU Status: Scanning
A Beacon with correct ESSID AU → SU -
SU Status: Synchronized
Authentication Request SU → AU Not authenticated
Authentication Successful AU → SU Authenticated
SU Status: Authenticated
Association Request SU → AU Authenticated
Association Successful AU → SU Associated
SU Status: Associated
ACK SU → AU Associated
Data Traffic SU ↔ AU Associated
The SNR measured at the SU
The Unit Name of the SU.
The SW version of the SU.
The Unit Type of the SU.
Distance.

Database (Bridging Info). The database includes the following information:
The current number of entries. This is the number of currently associated

SUs.

114
NOTE
There is no aging algorithm for associated SUs. An SU is only removed from the list of associated
SUs under the following conditions:
other AU.
The SU failed to respond to 50 consecutive frames transmitted by the AU and is considered to

have "aged out".
The aging time specified for entries in these table. There is no aging time
for Association Info entries.
The maximum number of entries permitted for this table, which is

specified by the Maximum Number of Associations parameter. The
default value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter is 512.
Show MIR/CIR Database: Displays information on the MIR/CIR support for

associated Subscriber Units.
Each entry includes the following information:
The MAC address of the associated Subscriber Unit
The values of the MIR and CIR parameters configured in the applicable SU
for the downlink (AU to SU) and for the uplink (SU to AU).
The value configured in the applicable SU for the Maximum Delay

parameter.
The maximum data rate of the Subscriber Unit
Display MAC Pinpoint Table: The MAC Pinpoint table provides for each of
the Ethernet stations (identified by the MAC Address) connected to either the
AU or to any of the SUs served by it, the identity (MAC Address) of the
wireless device to which they are connected.
Gateways Table: When the DRAP option is supported, the Gateways Table
provides details on the active Gateways connected to any of the SUs served by
the AU. For each Gateway, the displayed information includes:
Gateway Type (VG-1D1V, VG-1D2V, NG-4D1W)
IP Address
Number of Voice Calls (applicable only to Voice Gateways)

115
4.2.5.4.2 MAC Address Database in SU

The MAC Address Database option in the SU displays information regarding the
Subscriber Units bridging (forwarding) information. The following option is
available:
Display Bridging Info: The Display Bridging Info option displays a list of all
the stations in the SU's Forwarding Database.
Each MAC address entry is followed by a description, which may include the
following:
Et (Ethernet): An address learned from the Ethernet port.
Wl (Wireless): An address of a node behind the associated AU, learned via

the wireless port.
Sp (Special): 8 addresses that are always present, including:
The MAC address of the SU, which appears twice as it is learned from
both the Ethernet and wireless ports.
The MAC address if the internal Operating System’s stack, which also
appears twice.
Alvarion's Multicast address (01-20-D6-00-00-01), which also appears

twice. The system treats this address as a Broadcast address.
Alvarion's special Multicast address (01-20-D6-00-00-05), reserved for

future use.
The Ethernet Broadcast address (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF).

Database (Bridging Info). The summary table includes the current number of
entries, the aging time specified by the Bridge Aging Time parameter and the
maximum number of entries permitted for this table, which is 1016.
4.2.5.5 Per Modulation Level Counters

The Per Modulation Level Counters display statistics relating to wireless link
performance at different radio modulation levels. The Per Modulation Level
Counters menu includes the following options:
Display Counters: Select this option to display the current values of the Per
Modulation Level Counters.

116
Reset Counters: Select this option to reset the Per Modulation Level
Counters.
The statistics show the number of frames accumulated in different categories

since the last reset.
For SUs, the Per Modulation Level Counters display the following information for
each modulation level supported by the unit:
SUCCESS: The total number of successfully transmitted unicasts at the

applicable modulation level.
FAILED: The total number of failures to successfully transmit unicast frame

during a HW Retry cycle at the applicable modulation level.
In addition, the Average Modulation Level (AML) is also displayed. This is the
average modulation level (rounded to the nearest integer) since the last time the
Per Modulation Level counters were reset. The average is calculated using the
SUCCESS count at each modulation level as weights.
For AUs, the SUCCESS and FAILED counts are provided for each of the
associated SUs, which are identified by their MAC address.
4.2.5.6 Link Capability

The Link Capability option provides information on HW and SW capabilities of
relevant units. In an AU, the information provided in the Link Capability reports
is for all associated SUs. In an SU, the Link Capability reports include
information on all AUs in the neighboring AUs table (all AUs with whom the SU
can communicate).
The Link Capability feature enables to adapt the configuration of the unit
according to the capabilities of other relevant unit(s) to ensure optimal operation.
The Link Capability submenu includes the following options:
4.2.5.6.1 Show Link Capability-General

Select this option to view information on general parameters of relevant units. For
each relevant unit, identified by its MAC address, the following details are
displayed:

117
HwVer: the hardware version of the unit.
CpldVer: The version of the Complex Programmable Logic Device (CPLD) used
in the unit. This parameter is available only in AUs, displaying the CPLD
version in the relevant SU.
Country: The 3 or 4 digits country code supported by the unit.
SwVer: The SW version used by the unit. This parameter is available only in
SUs, displaying the SW version in the relevant AU.
BootVer: The Boot Version of the unit. This parameter is available only in
AUs, displaying the Boot version in the relevant SU.
4.2.5.6.2 Show Link Capability-Wireless Link Configuration

Select this option to view information on current wireless link parameters of
relevant units. For each relevant unit, identified by its MAC address, the following
details are displayed:
ATPC Option: Enable or Disable.
Adaptive Modulation Option: Enable or Disable.
Burst Mode Option: Enable or Disable.
DFS Option: Enable or Disable. This parameter is available only in SUs,

displaying the current option in the relevant AU.
Concatenation Option: Enable or Disable.
Country Code Learning by SU: Enable or Disable. This parameter is

available only in SUs, displaying the current option in the relevant AU.
Per SU Distance Learning: Enable or Disable. This parameter is available

only in SUs, displaying the current option in the relevant AU.
4.2.5.6.3 Show Link Capability-Security Configuration

Select this option to view information on current security related parameters of
relevant units. For each relevant unit, identified by its MAC address, the following
details are displayed:
Security Mode: WEP, AES OCB or FIPS 197.

118
Authentication Algorithm: Shared Key or Open System.
Data Encryption Option: Enable or Disable.
4.2.5.6.4 Show Link Capability by AU (SU only)

Select this option to view all capabilities information (General, wireless Link
Configuration, Security Configuration) of a selected AU (by its MAC address).
4.2.5.6.5 Show Link Capability by SU (AU only)

Select this option to view all capabilities information (General, Wireless Link
Configuration, Security Configuration) of a selected SU (by its MAC address).

119
4.2.6 Advanced Configuration Menu

The Advanced Configuration menu provides access to all parameters, including
the parameters available through the Basic Configuration menu.
The Advanced Configuration menu enables accessing the following menus:
IP Parameters
Air Interface Parameters
Network Management Parameters
Bridge Parameters
Performance Parameters
Service Parameters
Security Parameters
4.2.6.1 IP Parameters
The IP Parameters menu enables defining IP parameters for the selected unit and
determining its method of IP parameter acquisition.
The IP Parameters menu includes the following options:
IP Address
Subnet Mask
DHCP Client
4.2.6.1.1 IP Address
The IP Address parameter defines the IP address of the unit.
The default IP address is 10.0.0.1.
4.2.6.1.2 Subnet Mask

The Subnet Mask parameter defines the subnet mask for the IP address of the
unit.
The default mask is 255.0.0.0.

120
4.2.6.1.3 Default Gateway Address

The Default Gateway Address parameter defines the IP address of the unit's
default gateway.
The default value for the default gateway address is 0.0.0.0.
4.2.6.1.4 DHCP Client

The DHCP Client submenu includes parameters that define the method of IP
parameters acquisition.
The DHCP Client submenu includes the following options:
DHCP Option
Access to DHCP
4.2.6.1.4.1 DHCP Option

The DHCP Option displays the current status of the DHCP support, and allows
selecting a new operation mode. Select from the following options:
Select Disable to configure the IP parameters manually. If this option is

selected, configure the static IP parameters as described above.
Select DHCP Only to cause the unit to search for and acquire its IP
parameters, including the IP address, subnet mask and default gateway, from
a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server only. If this option is
selected, you must select the port(s) through which the unit searches for and
communicates with the DHCP server, as described in section 4.2.6.1.4.2. You do
not have to configure static IP parameters for the unit. DHCP messages are
handled by the units as management frames.
Select Automatic to cause the unit to search for a DHCP server and acquire
its IP parameters from the server. If a DCHP server is not located within
approximately 40 seconds, the currently configured parameters are used. If
this option is selected, you must configure the static IP parameters as
described above. In addition, you must select the port(s) through which the
unit searches for and communicates with the DHCP server, as described in
section 4.2.6.1.4.2.
The default is Disable.

121
4.2.6.1.4.2 Access to DHCP

The Access to DHCP option enables defining the port through which the unit
searches for and communicates with a DHCP server. Select from the following
options:
From Wireless Link Only
From Ethernet Only
From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link
The default for Access Units is From Ethernet Only. The default for Subscriber
Units is From Wireless Link Only.
4.2.6.1.5 Show IP Parameters

The Show IP Parameters option displays the current values of the IP parameters,
including the Run Time IP Address, Run Time Subnet Mask and Run Time
Default Gateway Address.
4.2.6.2 Air Interface Parameters

The Air Interface Parameters menu enables viewing the current Air Interface
parameters defined for the unit and configuring new values for each of the
relevant parameters.
4.2.6.2.1 Country Code and Sub-Bands

Each country has its own regulations regarding operation modes and parameters
such as allowable frequencies and bandwidth, the need to employ an automatic
mechanism for detection and avoidance of frequencies used by radar systems,
maximum transmit power at each of the supported modulation levels and the
ability to use burst transmissions. To efficiently manage these country dependent
parameters, each unit has a ‘Country Code’ parameter and a set of accompanying
parameters, which depend on this country code. Where more than one set of
parameters can be used, the available sets are defined as Sub-Bands, selectable
through the Frequency configuration menu.
4.2.6.2.2 ESSID Parameters

The ESSID (Extended Service Set ID) is a string used to identify a wireless
network and to prevent the unintentional merging of two wireless networks or two
sectors in the same network. Typically, a different ESSID is defined for each AU.
To facilitate easy addition of SUs to an existing network without a prior
knowledge of which specific AU will serve it, and to support the Best AU feature,
a secondary "global" ESSID, namely "Operator ESSID", can be configured in the
AU. If the Operator ESSID Option is enabled at the AU, the Beacon frames
transmitted by it will include both the ESSID and Operator ESSID. The SU shall

122
regard such frames if either the ESSID or the Operator ESSID matches it own
ESSID. The ESSID of the AU with which the SU is eventually associated is
defined as the Run-Time ESSID of the SU. Typically, the initial ESSID of the SU
is configured to the value of the Operator ESSID. When the SU has become
associated with a specific AU, its ESSID can be reconfigured to the value of the
ESSID of the AU.
4.2.6.2.2.1 ESSID
The ESSID parameter defines the ESSID of the unit.
The default value is ESSID1.
NOTE
The ESSID string is case sensitive.
4.2.6.2.2.2 Operator ESSID Parameters (AU only)

The Operator ESSID Parameters submenu includes the following parameters:
4.2.6.2.2.2.1 Operator ESSID Option

The Operator ESSID Option enables or disables the use of Operator ESSID for
establishing association with SUs.
The default is Enable.
4.2.6.2.2.2.2 Operator ESSID

The Operator ESSID parameter defines the Operator ESSID.
The default value is ESSID1.
NOTE
The Operator ESSID string is case sensitive.
4.2.6.2.3 Frequency Definition Parameters

4.2.6.2.3.1 Sub-Bands and Frequency Selection
Each unit is delivered with one or more pre-configured Sub-Bands, according to
the country code. These sets of parameters include also the frequencies that can
be used and the bandwidth.
The parameters that determine the frequency to be used are set in the AU. If
more than one Sub-Band is available, the sub-band to be used can be selected. If
only one Sub-Band is supported, then the sub-band selection option is not

123
available. The SU should be configured with a minimal set of parameters to

ensure that it will be able to automatically detect and use the
frequency/bandwidth used by the AU, including possible changes in this
frequency (Automatic Sub Band Select feature).
To simplify the installation process the SU scans a definable frequencies subset

after power-up. The defined frequencies subsets may include frequencies from
more than one Sub-Band, enabling automatic detection of both frequency and
bandwidth. If the Best AU feature is enabled, the SU will scan the defined subset
and the operating frequency/bandwidth will be determined by the Best AU
mechanism (including the optional use of the Preferred AU feature). Otherwise
the SU will try to associate with the first AU it finds. If no AU is found, the SU will
start another scanning cycle.
4.2.6.2.3.2 Avoiding Frequencies with Radar Activity

In some regions, it is important to ensure that wireless access equipment does
not interfere with certain radar systems in the 5 GHz band. If radar is being
detected, the wireless access network should move automatically to a frequency
that does not interfere with the radar system.
The country dependent set of parameters includes also an indication whether

DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection) should be used. The DFS algorithm is
designed to detect and avoid operation in channels with radar activity. If the
current sub-band does not support DFS, then the DFS parameters configuration
submenu is not available.
When the DFS Option is enabled, the AU monitors the spectrum continuously,
searching for signals with a specific pattern indication radar activity. Upon
detecting radar activity, the AU immediately stops transmitting on this frequency
and starts looking for another radar-free frequency. The subset of viable
frequencies is configurable.
The AU maintains a continuously updated database of all applicable frequencies,

where each frequency is marked as Radar Free, Radar Detected or Adjacent to
Radar. The AU attempts to check a new frequency only if it is marked as Radar
Free. If a radar activity was detected on a certain frequency, it will be marked in
the database as a Radar Detected frequency. The AU will not attempt to check for
radar activity in frequencies marked as Radar Detected. A certain time after
detecting radar activity on a frequency, it will be removed from the list of Radar
Detected frequencies and will be marked as Radar Free. If radar activity was
detected on a certain frequency, adjacent channels should not be used as well,
according to the bandwidth. For instance, if the bandwidth is 20 MHz, then if
radar activity was detected in 5800 MHz, frequencies 5790 MHz and 5810 MHz
should not be used as well. These frequencies are marked in the database as
Adjacent to Radar, and will be treated the same as Radar Detected frequencies.

124
Before ceasing transmission on the frequency where radar signals had been
detected, the AU sends a special disassociation message to its associated SUs.
This message includes an indication whether the SUs should wait for this AU. If
the SUs should wait, the message includes also the waiting time. During this
time each SU searches for the AU in the defined frequencies subset. If the AU was
not found within the waiting time, or if a waiting request was not included in the
message, the SU starts searching for any AU, using the Best AU mechanism if
applicable.
Typically, operators prefer to preserve the original frequency planning and to

avoid moving to a new channel unless they are sure that there is a continuous
radar activity in the original channel. It should be noted that detection of radar
activity does not necessarily indicate a continuous radar activity in the channel.
A channel reuse algorithm enables returning to the original channel under
certain conditions that indicates low radar activity on the channel.
4.2.6.2.4 Frequency Definition Submenu in AU

The Frequency Definition submenu in AU includes the following parameters:
4.2.6.2.4.1 Sub-Band Select

This parameter is available only if the country code supports two or more Sub-
Bands. For information on how to view the Sub-Bands supported by the unit and
the supported parameters’ values and options, refer to section 4.2.2.4.
The range depends on the number of Sub-Bands supported by the country code.
The default selection is Sub-Band 1.
4.2.6.2.4.2 Frequency
The Frequency parameter defines the transmit/receive frequency when the DFS
Option is not enabled. If the DFS Option is enabled, it sets the initial operational
frequency upon starting the DFS mechanism for the first time.
The range depends on the selected Sub-Band.
The default is the lowest frequency in the Sub-Band.

125
CAUTION
a. In units using Country Code 1023 (FCC 5.3 GHz), for full compliance with FCC regulations the
Transmit Power parameter in the AU when operating at 5270 MHz with a 20 MHz bandwidth, and
the Maximum Tx Power parameter in the SUs connected to this AU, should not be set to a value
above “17-Antenna Gain” (The maximum allowed EIRP for 5270 MHz is 17 dBm).
b. In units using Country Code 392 (4.9 GHz Japan, regular - not B&B point-to-point) with a 10 MHz
bandwidth, the following rules must be met for full compliance with regulations:
When operating at 4945 MHz, the Transmit Power parameter in the AU should not be set to a
value above 11 dBm. The Maximum Transmit Power of the SU should not be set to a value
above 10 dBm.
When operating at 5055 MHz, the Transmit Power parameter in the AU should not be set to a
value above 13 dBm. The Maximum Transmit power of the SU should not be set to a value
above 10 dBm.
This requirement, although not indicated in the certification document, is needed following the tests
performed in the certification lab.
4.2.6.2.4.3 DFS Parameters

The DFS Parameters submenu is available only if DFS is supported by the
current Sub-Band. The DFS Parameters submenu includes the following
parameters:
4.2.6.2.4.3.1 DFS Option

The DFS Option enables or disables the radar detection and dynamic frequency
selection mechanism.
4.2.6.2.4.3.2 Frequency Subset Definition

The Frequency Subset Definition parameter defines the frequencies that will be
used in the DFS mechanism. The available frequencies according to the Sub-
Band are displayed, and each of the frequencies in the list is associated with an
index. The frequencies subset can be defined by entering the indexes of the
required frequencies, or “A” to select all available frequencies.
The default is the complete list of frequencies available in the Sub-Band.
4.2.6.2.4.3.3 Channel Check Time

The Channel Check Time defines the time allocated for checking whether there is
a radar activity on a new frequency after power up or after attempting to move to
a new frequency upon detecting radar activity on the previously used frequency.
During this time the AU does not transmit.
The range is 1 to 3600 seconds.
The default is 60 seconds.

126
4.2.6.2.4.3.4 Channel Avoidance Period

The Channel Avoidance Period defines the time that the frequency will remain
marked in the database as Radar Detected or Adjacent to Radar after detecting
radar activity. These frequencies will not be used when searching for a new
frequency. When this time has elapsed, the unit frequency’s marking will change
to Radar Free.
The range is 1 to 60 minutes.
The default is 30 minutes.
4.2.6.2.4.3.5 SU Waiting Option

The SU Waiting Option defines whether the disassociation message sent by the
AU, after detecting radar activity on the current frequency, will include a message
instructing the SU to search only for the AU before attempting to search for
another AU. The message includes also the time period during which the SU
should not search for any other AU. The waiting time is the Channel Check Time
plus 5 seconds.
4.2.6.2.4.3.6 Minimum Pulses to Detect

The Minimum Pulses to Detect parameter defines the minimum number of radar
pulses that should be detected before reaching a decision that radar is active on
the channel.
The range is from 1 to 100 pulses.
The default is 6 pulses.
4.2.6.2.4.3.7 Clear Radar Detected Channels After Reset

When the Clear Radar Detected Channels After Reset is enabled, after the next
reset all viable frequencies will be marked in the database as Radar Free,
including frequencies previously marked as either Radar Detected or Adjacent to
Radar. In addition, the AU will start operation using its default frequency.
4.2.6.2.4.4 Channel Reuse Parameters (DFS+)

The Channel Reuse algorithm enables returning to the original channel under
certain conditions that indicate low radar activity on the original channel. The
conditions are that radar was detected in this channel not more than N times
(Maximum Number of Detections in Assessment Period) during the last T hours
(Radar Activity Assessment Period). When the Channel Reuse Option is enabled,
then by the end of the Channel Avoidance Period the unit will attempt returning
to the original frequency, provided these conditions are met.

127
The Channel Reuse Parameters submenu includes the following options:
Channel Reuse Option: Enabling/disabling the Channel Reuse algorithm.
Radar Activity Assessment Period: The period in hours used for assessment
of radar activity in the original channel.
The range is 1 to 12 hours.
The default is 5 hours.
Maximum Number of Detections in Assessment Period: The maximum

number of radar detections in the original channel during the Radar Activity
Assessment Period that is required for reaching a decision to try again the
original channel.
The range is 1 to 10 radar detections.
The default is 5 radar detections.
4.2.6.2.4.4.1 Show DFS Settings And Data

Upon selecting the Show DFS Settings and Data, the values of all DFS
parameters and the current operating frequency will be displayed. The current
defined frequency subset as well as the defined subset (to be used after the next
reset) are also displayed. In addition, all the applicable frequencies will be
displayed together with their status in the database (Radar Free, Radar Detected
or Adjacent to Radar).
4.2.6.2.4.5 Country Code Learning by SU

This feature support simplified installation and updates processes by enabling
the SU to adapt the Country Code used by the AU.
The AU advertises its country code in every beacon and association response
message. Upon synchronization the SU will check if its country code and the
country code received from the AU are the same. If they are not the same and the
Country Code Learning by SU is enabled, the SU will use the AU’s country code:
the country code derived limitations will be forced and the following parameters
will be set according to new country definitions:
Maximum TX Power will be set to the maximum defined by the country code.
TX Power will be set to the maximum defined by the country code.

128
The Modulation Level will be set to the maximum modulation level defined by
the country code.
The Multicast Modulation Level will be set to the minimum modulation level
defined by the country code.
The Burst Mode will be set to enable if the country code supports burst mode,
and the burst duration will be set to default.
After country code learning (adaptation) the unit is automatically reset. Before
this automatic reset, if the unit is running from the shadow version, the versions
must be swapped and the running version must be set as main. This is done to
avoid returning to the previous version, which occurs automatically after the
reset.
NOTE
The Country Code Learning by SU feature does not function with the default ESSID (ESSID1).
4.2.6.2.4.6 Show Frequency definitions

Upon selecting Show Frequency Definitions, the selected Sub-Band and
Frequency are displayed. In addition, all the parameters displayed upon selecting
Show DFS Settings and Data are also displayed.
4.2.6.2.5 Frequency Definition Submenu in SU

4.2.6.2.5.1 User Defined Frequency Subsets
The User Defined Frequency Subsets menu enables defining for each of the
available Sub-Bands the frequencies that will be used by the SU when scanning
for an AU. For each available Sub-Band, the available frequencies are displayed,
and an index is associated with each frequency. Enter either the desired
frequency indexes, ‘A’ (All) for using all frequencies in the subset or ‘N’ (None) for
not scanning that sub-band.
The default is all frequencies in all available sub-bands.
4.2.6.2.5.2 Show Frequency Definitions

Upon selecting the Show Frequency Definitions, the selected frequencies in the
available Sub-Bands and the current operating frequency are displayed.
4.2.6.2.6 Best AU Parameters (SU)

An SU that can communicate with more than one AU using the same ESSID may
become associated with the first AU it "finds", not necessarily the best choice in
terms of quality of communication. The same limitation also exists if only one AU

129
in the neighborhood has an ESSID identical to the one used by the SU, as it is
not always necessarily the best choice.
The topology of a fixed access network is constantly changing. Changes in base

station deployment and subscriber density can accumulate to create substantial
changes in SU performance. The quest for load sharing together with the desire to
create best throughput conditions for the SU created the need for the Best AU
feature, to enable an SU to connect to the best AU in its neighborhood.
When the Best AU feature is used, each of the AUs is given a quality mark based
on the level at which it is received by the SU. The SU scans for a configured
number of cycles, gathering information from all the AUs with which it can
communicate. At the end of the scanning period, the SU reaches a Best AU
decision according to the information gathered. The AU with the highest quality
mark is selected as the Best AU, and the SU will immediately try to associate with
it. The quality mark given to each AU depends on the level at which it is received
by the SU.
The Best AU selection mechanism can be overridden by defining a specific AU as

the preferred AU.
NOTE
Although the SU selects the Best AU based on long-term conditions prior to the decision time, it
may not always be connected to the instantaneous Best AU at any given time. Note also that the
decision is made only once during the scanning interval. The decision may not remain the optimal
one for ever. If there are significant changes in deployment of neighboring AUs and the SUs served
by them, overall performance may be improved if the applicable SUs are reset intentionally so as to
re-initiate the Best AU decision process.
The Best AU Parameters menu includes the following options:
4.2.6.2.6.1 Best AU Support

The Best AU Support option enables or disables the Best AU selection feature.
NOTE
If the Best AU feature is not used, the SU associates with the first AU it finds whose ESSID or
Operator ESSID is identical to its own ESSID.

130
4.2.6.2.6.2 Number Of Scanning Attempts

When the Best AU option is enabled, the SU gathers information on neighboring
AUs for approximately 2 seconds on each of the scanned frequencies. The
Number of Scanning Attempts parameter defines the number of times that the
process will be repeated for all relevant frequencies. A higher number may result
in a better decision at the cost of an increased scanning time during which the
SU is not operational.
Valid values: 1 - 255.
Default value: 4.
4.2.6.2.6.3 Preferred AU MAC Address

The Preferred AU MAC Address parameter defines a specific AU with which the
SU should associate. Gaining control of the SUs association is a powerful tool in
network management. The Preferred AU MAC Address parameter is intended for
applications where there is a need to dictate the preferred AU with which the SU
should associate. To prevent the SU from associating with the first viable AU it
finds, the Best AU Support mechanism should be enabled. Once the SU has
identified the preferred AU based on its MAC address, it will associate with it and
terminate the scanning process. If the preferred AU is not found, the SU will
associate with an AU according to the decision reached using the best AU
algorithm.
Valid values: A MAC address string.
The default value for the Preferred AU MAC Address is 00-00-00-00-00-00 (12
zeros), meaning that there is no preferred AU.
4.2.6.2.6.4 Show Best AU Parameters and Data

The Show Best AU Parameters and Data option displays the applicable
information:
The Neighboring AU Data table displays the following details for each AU with
which the unit can communicate:
MAC Address
SNR of the received signal
Mark - The computed quality mark for the AU.
Full - The association load status of the AU. It is defined as full if the number
of SUs associated with the AU has reached the maximum allowed according to
the value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter. An AU whose
associations load status is full cannot be selected as the Best AU, even if its
computed mark is the highest.

131
ESSID - The ESSID of the AU.
In addition to the neighboring AU data table, the following information is

displayed:
Best AU Support
Preferred AU MAC Address
Number of Scanning Attempts
Associated AU MAC Address (the MAC address of the selected AU)
4.2.6.2.7 Scanning Mode (SU only)

The Scanning Mode parameter defines whether the SU will use Passive or Active
scanning when searching for an AU.
In passive scanning, the SU “listens” to the wireless medium for approximately

two seconds at each frequency, searching for beacons. The disassociation period,
which is the time from the moment the link was lost until the SU decides that it
should start searching for another AU, is approximately seven seconds.
In some situations when there is a high probability that SUs might need to roam
among different AUs, the use of active scanning enables to significantly reduce
the link establishment time. This is achieved by using shorter dwell periods,
transmitting a Probe Request at each frequency. This reduces the time spent at
each frequency as well as the disassociation period.
When DFS Option is enabled, Scanning Mode is forced to Passive.
The default selection is Passive.
4.2.6.2.8 Power Control Parameters

The Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) algorithm simplifies the
installation process and ensures optimal performance while minimizing
interference to other units. This is achieved by automatically adjusting the power
level transmitted by each SU according to the actual level at which it is received
by the AU. To support proper operation of the system with optimal performance
and minimum interference between neighboring sectors, the ATPC algorithm
should be enabled in all units.
The algorithm is controlled by the AU that calculates for each received frame the
average SNR at which it receives transmissions from the specific SU. The average
calculation takes into account the previous calculated average, thus reducing the
effect of short temporary changes in link conditions. The weight of history (the
previous value) in the formula used for calculating the average SNR is determined

132
by a configurable parameter. In addition, the higher the time that has passed
since the last calculation, the lower the impact of history on the calculated
average. If the average SNR is not in the configured target range, the AU
transmits to the SU a power-up or a power-down message. The target is that each
SU will be received at an optimal level, or as high (or low) as possible if the
optimal range cannot be reached because of specific link conditions.
Each time that the SU tries to associate with the AU (following either a reset or
loss of synchronization), it will initiate transmissions using its Transmit Power
parameters. If after a certain time the SU does not succeed to synchronize with
the AU, it will start increasing the transmit power level.
In an AU the maximum supported transmit power is typically used to provide

maximum coverage. However, there may be a need to decrease the transmitted
power level in order to support relatively small cells and to minimize the
interference with the operation of neighboring cells, or for compliance with local
regulatory requirements.
In some cases the maximum transmit power of the SU should be limited to

ensure compliance with applicable regulations or for other reasons.
Different power levels may be used for different modulation levels by taking into
account possible HW limitations or regulatory restrictions.
4.2.6.2.8.1 Transmit Power

The Transmit Power submenu includes the following options:
Transmit Power
Show Transmit Power Parameters
4.2.6.2.8.1.1 Transmit Power

In the AU, the Transmit Power parameter defines the fixed transmit power level
and is not part of the ATPC algorithm.
In the SU, the Transmit Power parameter defines the fixed transmit power level
when the ATPC algorithm is disabled. If the ATPC Option is enabled, the value
configured for this parameter serves for setting the initial value to be used by the
ATPC algorithm after either power up or losing synchronization with the AU.
The minimum value for the Transmit Power Parameter is -10 dBm (the ATPC may
reduce the actual transmit power of the SU to lower values). The maximum value
of the Transmit Power Parameter depends on several unit properties and
parameters:
The HW revision of the unit

133
The Maximum Allowed Tx Power as defined for the applicable Sub-Band.
The Maximum EIRP as defined for the applicable Sub-Band, together with the
value of the Antenna Gain. In certain countries the Maximum EIRP of some
equipment types cannot exceed a certain value. In these cases the Transmit
Power cannot exceed the value of (Maximum EIRP – Antenna Gain).
Maximum Tx Power parameter (in SU only)
For information on how to view the Sub-Bands supported by the unit and the
supported parameters’ values and options, refer to section 4.2.2.4.
The unit calculates the maximum allowed Transmit Power according to the unit
properties and parameters listed above, and displays the allowed range when a
Transmit Power parameter is selected.
For each modulation level, the unit will use as transmit power the minimum
between this parameter and the maximum Tx power allowed by the HW and the
Country Code for the specific modulation level.
The default Transmit Power is the highest allowed value.
4.2.6.2.8.1.2 Show Transmit Power Parameters

This option displays the Transmit Power parameter and the current transmit
power for the different modulation levels.
4.2.6.2.8.2 Maximum Transmit Power (SU only)

The Maximum Transmit Power submenu includes the following options:
Maximum Tx Power
Show Maximum Tx Power Parameters
4.2.6.2.8.2.1 Maximum Tx Power

The Maximum Tx Power parameter limits the maximum transmit power that can
be reached by the ATPC algorithm. It also sets the upper limits for the Transmit
Power parameters.
The minimum value for the Maximum Tx Power is -10 dBm. The maximum value
depends on several unit properties and parameters:
The HW revision of the unit
The Maximum Allowed Tx Power as defined for the applicable Sub-Band.

134
The Maximum EIRP as defined for the applicable Sub-Band, together with the
value of the Antenna Gain. In certain countries the Maximum EIRP of some
equipment types cannot exceed a certain value. In these cases the Transmit
Power cannot exceed the value of (Maximum EIRP – Antenna Gain).
The unit calculates the maximum allowed Maximum Tx Power according to the
unit properties and parameters listed above, and displays the allowed range when
the Maximum Tx Power parameter is selected.
For each modulation level, the unit will use as maximum transmit power the
minimum between this parameter and the maximum Tx power allowed by the HW
and the Country Code for the specific modulation level.
The default Maximum Tx Power is the highest allowed value.
4.2.6.2.8.2.2 Show Maximum Tx Power Parameters

This option displays the Maximum Tx Power parameter and the current
maximum Tx power for the different modulation levels.
4.2.6.2.8.3 ATPC Parameters in AU

4.2.6.2.8.3.1 ATPC Option
The ATPC Option enables or disables the Automatic Transmit Power Control
(ATPC) algorithm.
4.2.6.2.8.3.2 ATPC Minimum SNR Level

The Minimum SNR Level defines the lowest SNR at which you want each SU to be
received at the AU (the lower limit of the optimal reception level range).
Available values: 4 to 60 (dB).
Default value: 28 (dB).
4.2.6.2.8.3.3 ATPC Delta from Minimum SNR Level

The Delta from Minimum SNR Level is used to define the highest SNR at which
you want each SU to be received at the AU (the higher limit of the optimal
reception level range):
Max. Level=Minimum SNR Level + Delta from Minimum SNR Level.
Available values: 4 to 20 (dB).
Default value: 5 (dB) for units operating in the 5.4 and 5.8 GHz bands. 8 (dB) for
units operating in the 4.9, 5.2 and 5.3 GHz bands.

135
4.2.6.2.8.3.4 Minimum Interval Between ATPC Messages

The Minimum Interval Between ATPC Messages parameter sets the minimal time
between consecutive power-up/power-down messages to a specific SU. Setting a
low value for this parameter may lead to higher overhead and to an excessive rate
of power level changes at the SUs. High values for this parameter increase the
time it will take the SUs to reach optimal transmit power level.
Available values: 1 to 3600 seconds.
Default value: 30 seconds.
4.2.6.2.8.3.5 ATPC Power Level Step

The ATPC Power Level Step parameter defines the step size to be used by the SUs
for incrementing/decrementing the Current Transmit Power after receiving a
power-up/power-down message. If the distance between the value of the Current
Transmit Power and the desired range is smaller than the step size, the power-
up/power-down message will include the specific step value required for this
condition.
Valid range: 1-20 (dB)
Default value: 5 (dB)
4.2.6.2.8.4 ATPC Parameters in SU

4.2.6.2.8.4.1 ATPC Option
The ATPC Option enables or disables the Automatic Transmit Power Control
(ATPC) algorithm. The parameter takes effect immediately. However, when
changed from Enable to Disable, the transmit power level will remain at the last
Current Transmit Power determined by the ATPC algorithm before it was
disabled. It will change to the value configured for the Initial Transmit Power
parameter only after the next reset or following loss of synchronization.
NOTE
The accuracy of the Transmit Power level is typically +/- 1 dB. However, at levels that are 15 dB or
more below the maximum supported by the hardware, the accuracy is +/- 3 dB (for information on
hardware limitations refer to the Country Codes document). At these levels the use of ATPC may
cause significant fluctuations in the power level of the transmitted signal. When operating at such
low levels, it is recommended to disable the ATPC Option and to set the Transmit Power parameter
to the average Tx Power level before the ATPC was disabled.
4.2.6.2.8.5 Tx Control (AU only)

The Tx Control option enables turning Off/On the AU’s transmitter, or having the
AU Tx status controlled by the status of the Ethernet port/link.
If the selected option is Ethernet Status Control, then:

136
If the Ethernet link is down, the AU transmitter will be switched to Off
If the Ethernet link is up, the AU transmitter will be switched to On.
This feature can be used during maintenance or testing to avoid transmissions

using undesired parameters.
The parameter is available only when managing the unit from its Ethernet port.
The default is On.
4.2.6.2.9 Antenna Gain

The Antenna Gain parameter enables to define the net gain of a detached
antenna. The configured gain should take into account the attenuation of the
cable connecting the antenna to the unit. The Antenna Gain is important
especially in countries where there is a limit on the EIRP allowed for the unit; the
maximum allowed value for the Transmit Power parameters cannot exceed the
value of (EIRP - Antenna Gain), where the EIRP is defined in the selected Sub-
Band.
In certain units with an integral antenna the Antenna Gain is not available as a
configurable parameter. However, it is available as a read-only parameter in the
applicable “Show” menus.
The range is 0 – 50 (dB). A value of “Don’t Care” means that the actual value is
not important. A value of “Not Set Yet” means that the unit will not transmit until
the actual value (in the range 0 to 50) is configured. The unit can be configured to
“Don’t Care” or “Not Set Yet” only in factory (when upgraded to SW version 2.0
from a lower version it will be set automatically to one of these options). Once a
value is configured, it is not possible to reconfigure the unit to either “Don’t Care”
or “Not Set Yet”.
The default value depends on unit type. In SUs with integral antenna it is set to
21 (read only). The default value for AUs that are supplied with a detached
antenna is in accordance with the antenna’s gain. In units supplied without an
antenna the default is typically “Not Set Yet”.
4.2.6.2.10 Cell Distance Parameters (AU only)

The higher the distance of an SU from the AU that is serving it, the higher the
time it takes for messages sent by one of them to reach the other. To ensure
appropriate services to all SUs regardless of their distance from the AU while
maintaining a high overall performance level, two parameters should be adapted
to the distances of SUs from the serving AU:
The time that a unit waits for a response message before retransmission (ACK
timeout) should take into account the round trip propagation delay between
the AU and the SU (The one-way propagation delay at 5 GHz is 3.3

137
microseconds per km/5 microseconds per mile.). The higher the distance from
the AU of the SU served by it, the higher the ACK timeout should be.
The ACK timeout in microseconds is: 20+Distance (km)*2*3.3 or
20+Distance (miles)*2*5.
To ensure fairness in the contention back-off algorithm between SUs located

at different distances from the AU, the size of the time slot should also take
into account the one-way propagation delay. The size of the time slot of all
units in the cell should be proportional to the distance from the AU of the
farthest SU served by it.
The Cell Distance Mode parameter in the AU defines the method of computing
distances. When set to Manual, the Maximum Cell Distance parameter should be
configured with the estimated distance of the farthest SU served by the AU. When
set to Automatic, the AU uses a special algorithm to estimate its distance from
each of the SUs it serves, determine which SU is located the farthest and use the
estimated distance of the farthest SU as the maximum cell distance. The value of
the maximum cell distance parameter (either computed or configured manually)
is transmitted in the beacon messages to all SUs served by the AU, and is used
by all units to calculate the size of the time slot, that must be the same for all
units in the same sector. When the Per SU Distance Learning option is enabled,
the AU uses the re-association message to send to each SU its estimated distance
from the AU. The per-SU distance is used to calculate the ACK timeout to be used
by the SU. When the Per SU Distance Learning option is disabled (or if it cannot
be used because the SU uses a previous SW version that does not support this
feature), the SU will use the maximum cell distance to calculate the ACK timeout.
The AU always uses the maximum cell distance to calculate the ACK timeout.
It should be noted that if the size of the time slot used by all units is adapted to
the distance of the farthest unit, then no unit will have an advantage when
competing for services. However, this reduces the overall achievable throughput
of the cell. In certain situations, the operator may decide to improve the overall
throughput by reducing the slot size below the value required for full fairness.
This means that when there is competition for bandwidth, the back-off algorithm
will give an advantage to SUs that are located closer to the AU.
The Cell Distance Parameters menu includes the following parameters:
4.2.6.2.10.1 Cell Distance Mode

The Cell Distance Mode option defines whether the maximum distance of the AU
from any of the SUs it serves will be determined manually (using the Maximum
Cell Distance parameter) or automatically. In addition, the Per SU Distance
Learning feature is supported only when the Cell Distance Mode is set to
Automatic.
The Options are Automatic or Manual.

138
The default is Automatic.
4.2.6.2.10.2 Maximum Cell Distance

The Maximum Cell Distance parameter allows configuring the maximum distance
when the Cell Distance Mode option is Manual.
The range is 0 to 54 (Km). The value of 0 has a special meaning for No

Compensation: Acknowledge Time Out is set to a value representing the
maximum distance of 54 km. The time slot size is set to its minimal value of 9
microseconds.
The default is 0 (No Compensation).
4.2.6.2.10.3 Fairness Factor

The Fairness Factor enables to define the level of fairness in providing services to
different SUs. When set to 100%, all SUs have the same probability of getting
services when competing for bandwidth. If set to X%, then SUs located up to X%
of the maximum distance from the AU will have an advantage in getting services
over SUs located farther than this distance.
The range is 0 to 100 (%)
The default is 100 (%).
4.2.6.2.10.4 Per SU Distance Learning

The Per SU Distance Learning option defines the mode in which SUs calculate the
ACK timeout: based on the maximum cell distance or on the actual distance from
the AU.
When this feature is disabled, all SUs in the cell use for the calculation of the
ACK timeout the maximum cell distance; when enabled, each SU uses instead its
actual distance from the AU.
The options are Disable or Enable.
4.2.6.2.10.5 Show Cell Distance Parameters

Select Show Cell Distance Parameters to view the Cell Distance parameters. In
addition, the Measured Maximum Cell Distance and the MAC address of the unit
that the mechanism found to be the farthest from the AU are displayed. A
distance of 1 km means any distance below 2 km.
4.2.6.2.11 Arbitration Inter-Frame Spacing (AIFS)

The time interval between two consecutive transmissions of frames is called Inter-
Frame Spacing (IFS). This is the time during which the unit determines whether
the medium is idle using the carrier sense mechanism. The IFS depends on the
type of the next frame to be transmitted, as follows:

139
SIFS (Short Inter-Frame Spacing) is used for certain frames that should be
transmitted immediately, such as ACK and CTS frames. The value of SIFS is
16 microseconds.
DIFS (Distributed coordination function Inter-Frame Spacing) is typically

used for other frame types when the medium is free. If the unit decides that
the medium is not free, it will defer transmission by DIFS plus a number of
time slots as determined by the Contention Window back-off algorithm (see
section 4.2.6.5.2) after reaching a decision that the medium has become free.
DIFS equal SIFS plus AIFS, where AIFS can be configured to one or two time
slots. Typically, AIFS should be configured to two time slots. A value of 1 should
only be used in one of the two units in a point-to-point link, where in the other
unit the AIFS remains configured to two time slots. This ensures that the unit
with AIFS configured to one has an advantage over the other unit, provided that
the Minimum Contention Window (section 4.2.6.5.2) parameter in both units is
configured to 0 to disable the contention window back-off algorithm.
NOTE
The AIFS parameter is not applicable when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled.
The available options are 1 or 2 (time slots).
The default is 2 time slots.
CAUTION
An AIFS value of 1 should only be used in point-to-point applications (when the Wireless Link
Prioritization Option is enabled). Otherwise the default value of 2 must always be used. In a point-
to-point link, only one unit should be configured to an AIFS value of 1. When both units need to
transmit, the unit with an AIFS value of 1 will have an advantage over the unit with AIFS of 2. In this
case, the Minimum Contention Window parameter in both units must be configured to 0 to disable
the contention window back-off algorithm.

140
4.2.6.2.12 Maximum Number of Associations (AU only)

The Maximum Number of Associations parameter defines the maximum number
of Subscriber Units that can be associated with the selected AU, while still
guaranteeing the required quality of service to customers.
Available values for AU-BS and AU-SA range from 0 to 512. For AUS-BS and
AUS-SA the range is from 0 to 8.
Default value for AU-BS and AU-SA is 512. For AUS-BS and AUS-SA the default
is 8.
NOTE
When the Data Encryption Option is enabled, the actual maximum number of SUs that can
associate with the AU-BS or AU-SA is limited to 124. The number displayed for the Maximum
Number of Associations is the value configured for this parameter, which might be higher than the
actual limit. The Maximum Number of Associations Limit (512 when Data Encryption is disabled,
124 when Data Encryption is enabled) is indicated in the Show Air Interface Parameters display.
NOTE
There is no aging time for SUs. An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the
following conditions:
other AU.
The SU failed to respond to a certain number of consecutive frames transmitted by the AU and
is considered to have "aged out".
Therefore, the database of associated SUs may include units no longer associated with the AU. If
the number of associated SUs has reached the value of the Maximum Number of Associations
parameter, the selected AU cannot serve additional SUs. To view the current number of associated
SUs, use the Display Association Info option in the MAC Address Database menu. To delete
inactive SUs from the database you must reset the AU.
4.2.6.2.13 Wireless Link Trap Threshold (AU only)

The Wireless Link Trap Threshold parameter defines the threshold for the
wireless quality trap, indicating that the quality of the wireless link has dropped
below (on trap) or has increased above (off trap) the specified threshold.
The Wireless Link Trap Threshold is in percentage of retransmissions, and the

allowed range is from 1 to 100 (%).
The default is 30 (%).
4.2.6.2.14 Country Code Learning by SU (AU only)

This feature supports simplified installation and updates processes by enabling
the SU to adapt the Country Code used by the AU.
The AU advertises its country code in every beacon and association response
message. Upon synchronization the SU shall check if its country code and the
country code received from the AU are the same. If they are not the same and the

141
Country Code Learning by the SU is enabled, the SU will use the AU’s country
code: the country code derived limitations will be forced and the following
parameters will be set according to the new country definitions:
Maximum TX Power (per modulation level) will be set to the maximum defined
by the country code.
TX Power (per modulation level) will be set to the maximum defined by the
country code.
The Modulation Level will be set to the maximum modulation level defined by
the country code.
The Multicast Modulation Level will be set to the minimum modulation level
defined by the country code.
The Burst Mode will be set to enable if the country code supports burst mode,
and the burst duration will be set to default.
After country code learning (adaptation) the unit is automatically reset. Before
this automatic reset, if the unit is running from the shadow version, the versions
must be swapped and the running version must be set as main. This is done to
avoid returning to the previous version, which occurs automatically after the
reset.
4.2.6.2.15 Spectrum Analysis

Gaining knowledge of the noise characteristics per channel enables construction
of a relatively noise free working environment. In order to gain information
regarding noise characteristics in the location of the unit, the unit will enter
passive scanning mode for a definite period, during which information will be
gathered. The scanned channels will be the channels comprising the selected sub
set.
Upon activating the spectrum analysis the unit will automatically reset. During
the information-gathering period the unit will not receive nor transmit data. It
also will not be able to synchronize/associate, meaning that it cannot be
managed via the wireless link. During the spectrum analysis period the unit
security mode is changed to promiscuous to enable gathering information
regarding all legal frames received by the unit. At the end of the period the unit
will reset automatically regaining normal operability upon start up.
The Spectrum Analysis submenu includes the following options:

142
4.2.6.2.15.1 Spectrum Analysis Channel Scan Period

The Spectrum Analysis Channel Scan Period is the period of staying on each
channel during each cycle for information gathering when performing spectrum
analysis.
Range: 2-30 seconds.
Default value: 5 seconds.
4.2.6.2.15.2 Spectrum Analysis Scan Cycles

The Spectrum Analysis Scan Cycle is the number of scanning cycles when
performing Spectrum Analysis.
Range: 1-100 cycles.
Default value: 2 cycles.
4.2.6.2.15.3 Automatic Channel Selection (AU only)

The Automatic Channel selection option defines weather the AU will choose the
best noise free channel upon startup after completion of the spectrum analysis
process. The selection is per analysis: when the analysis is completed it will be
disabled automatically.
4.2.6.2.15.4 Spectrum Analysis Activation

The Spectrum analysis Activation option enables activation of the spectrum
analysis process. Upon activation, the unit will reset automatically and start-up
in spectrum analysis mode.
4.2.6.2.15.5 Reset Spectrum Analysis Information

The Reset Spectrum Analysis Information option enables resetting the spectrum
analysis counters.
4.2.6.2.15.6 Spectrum Analysis Information Display

The Spectrum Analysis Information Display option enables viewing the results of
the last analysis process. The displayed information includes the following details
for each channel:
Frequency in MHz
Signal Count: The number of signals (excluding OFDM frames with the
correct bandwidth) in the channel.
Signal SNR: The approximate SNR of signals (excluding OFDM frames with
the correct bandwidth) in the channel.

143
Signal Width: The average width in microseconds of signals (excluding OFDM

frames with the correct bandwidth) in the channel.
OFDM Frames: The number of OFDM frames with the correct bandwidth
detected in the channel.
4.2.6.2.15.7 Spectrum Analysis Information Display - Continuous

The Spectrum Analysis Information Display - Continuous option is available only
when the analysis process is active. It enables viewing the continuously updated
results of the current analysis process. The displayed information includes the
same details available for a regular Spectrum Analysis Information Display
option.
4.2.6.2.16 Lost Beacons Transmission Watchdog Threshold

When it is unable to send beacon frames for a predetermined period of time, such
as in the case of interferences, the AU resets itself. The Lost Beacons
Transmission Threshold parameter represents the number of consecutive lost
beacons after which the unit will reset itself.
The range for this parameter is 100 – 1000 or 0. When the parameter is set to 0,
this feature is disabled, i.e. internal refresh will never be performed.
The default value is 218.
4.2.6.2.17 Disassociate (AU only)

The Disassociate feature enables disassociating all SUs associated with the AU or
a selected SU. This feature is useful during configuration changes, enabling to
force the SU(s) to re-initiate the association process, including the search for the
best AU (or a preferred AU) using the Best AU process, without performing a full
reset.
The Disassociate submenu includes two options:
Disassociate All SUs
Disassociate SU By MAC Address: to disassociate a selected SU
4.2.6.2.18 Noise Immunity Control

The Adaptive Noise Immunity (ANI) mechanism is designed to reduce the wireless
physical layer errors and by that enhance the AU processing power of the unit,
delivering higher packet processing efficiency.
This ANI mechanism is triggered by the rate of detected Physical Errors and it is
modifying different thresholds affecting the immunity to specific interference
types.

144
This feature, active by default, exists in all units with HW revision C and higher
running SW version 3.0 and higher. Starting in SW version 4.0, the processing
power of the system has been increased dramatically. When using version 4.0 the
units are capable to process more packets per seconds, including physical error
packets. As a result, the ANI mechanism (triggered by the number of received
error packets) may not function properly in certain scenarios, resulting in link
performances that are far below the expectations. The option of manually
controlling the various parameters used by the ANI mechanism enables to
achieve optimal performance in certain deployments where the automatic ANI
mechanism may not function properly.
It is strongly recommended to consult with Alvarion experts before switching to

manual mode and modifying any of the parameters.
The general rules for using the Noise Immunity Control parameters are:
In the SU, if performance (Modulation Level) is lower than expected based on the
SNR, try switching to Manual mode without changing any of the parameters.
CAUTION
Do not change any of the SU’s Noise Immunity Control parameters (except the Noise Immunity
State Control) from remote, as it may result in loss of connectivity to the unit.
In the AU, try switching to Manual mode if overall throughput is too low or if SUs
are lost although communication conditions are sufficient for good connectivity.
In many deployments the transition to Manual mode is sufficient. If not, you may
try changing the Noise Immunity Level and/or Spur Immunity Level parameters.
The target is to reduce the amount of Phy Error rate reported by the unit (see
Total Rx events on page 109). To ensure that sensitivity is not reduced too much
and SUs are not lost, verify that the Age (see Display Association Info on page
113) of all SUs is below 20 seconds.
Do not activate the OFDM Weak Signal parameter if the SNR is below 36 dBm.
Under normal conditions, the OFDM Weak Signal should never be activated in
the AU, since the SNR of all SUs will be below 36 dBm when ATPC is enabled.
The Noise Immunity Control submenu includes the following options:
4.2.6.2.18.1 Noise Immunity State Control

The Noise Immunity State Control defines the activation mode of the Adaptive
Noise Immunity mechanism: Automatic or Manual. The following parameters of
the Noise Immunity Control mechanism are applicable only for Manual mode.
The default is Automatic.

145
4.2.6.2.18.2 Noise Immunity Level

The Noise Immunity Level parameter sets the threshold for immunity against
broadband interfering signals. A higher value may reduce the number of errors at
the expense of reduced sensitivity.
The range is from 0 to 4. In the current version only 0 and 4 should be used.
The default is 0.
4.2.6.2.18.3 Spur Immunity Level

The Spur Immunity Level parameter sets the threshold for immunity against
narrow band interfering signals such as spurious from signals at other
frequencies. A higher value may reduce the number of errors at the expense of
reduced sensitivity.
The range is from 0 to 7.
The default is 0.
4.2.6.2.18.4 OFDM Weak Signal

The OFDM Week Signal parameter sets the threshold for immunity against
interfering OFDM signals.
The available options are 0 or 1. A value of 1 means that the unit will immediately
reject OFDM packets with a relatively SNR.
The default is 0.
4.2.6.2.18.5 Pulse Detection Sensitivity

The Pulse Detection Sensitivity parameter affects the Phy error count: If it is set
to Low, than all Phy errors will be reported as regular Phy errors, regardless of
the signal level. If it is set to High, all Phy errors with levels bellow a certain
threshold (not accessible to the user) will be reported as regular Phy errors, while
those with levels higher than the threshold will be reported as detected radar
pulses.
When DFS (radar detection) is used, the Pulse Detection Sensitivity cannot be set
to Low (forced to high). When Spectrum Analyzer is running, the Pulse Detection
Sensitivity is automatically forced to high for the duration of the test.
The default is High.
4.2.6.2.18.6 Show Noise Immunity

Select this option to view the current values of the Noise Immunity Control
parameters, and some additional parameters of the ANI mechanism.

146
4.2.6.3 Network Management Parameters

The Network Management Parameters menu enables protecting the Unit from
unauthorized access by defining a set of discrete IP addresses as well as IP
address ranges from which the unit can be managed using protocols such as
Telnet, FTP, TFTP, SNMP, DHCP and ICMP. This excludes management messages
generated in the unit, such as Traps or Ping Test frames, which are not filtered.
The direction from which management access is permitted can also be
configured, which means that management access may be permitted from the
wireless medium only, from the wired Ethernet only, or from both.
The Network Management Menu also enables managing transmission of traps,

including definition of up to 10 traps destination IP addresses and the associated
community strings. In addition, the menu enables specifying the IP address of a
connected AP client device to facilitate remote management of a BreezeACCESS
WI2 system.
The Network Management Parameters menu includes the following options:
Access to Network Management
Network Management Filtering
Set Network Management IP address
Delete a Network Management IP Address
Delete All Network Management IP Addresses
Set/Change Network Management IP Address Ranges
SNMP Traps
AP Client IP Address (SU only)
4.2.6.3.1 Access to Network Management

The Access to Network Management option defines the port through which the
unit can be managed. The following options are available:
From Wireless Link Only
From Ethernet Only
From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link

147
The default selection is From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link.
CAUTION
Be careful not to block your access to the unit. For example, if you manage an SU via the wireless
link, setting the Access to Network Management parameter to From Ethernet Only completely
blocks your management access to the unit. In this case, a technician may be required to change
the settings at the user's site.
4.2.6.3.2 Network Management Filtering

The Network Management Filtering option enables or disables the IP address
based management filtering. If management filtering is enabled, the unit can only
be managed by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in either
the Network Management IP Addresses list or in the Network Management IP
Address Ranges list, described below, and that are connected to the unit via the
defined port(s). The following options are available:
Disable: No IP address based filtering is configured.
Activate IP Filter on Ethernet Port: Applicable only if the Access to Network

Management parameter is configured to either From Ethernet Only or From
Both Ethernet and Wireless Link. The unit can be managed from the Ethernet
port only by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in the Set
Network Management IP Addresses parameter. If the Access to Network
Management parameter is configured to From Both Ethernet and Wireless
Link then no IP address based filtering is configured for the wireless port.
Activate IP Filter on Wireless Link Port: Applicable only if the Access to

Network Management parameter is configured to either From Wireless Link
Only or From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link. The unit can be managed
from the wireless port only by stations with IP addresses matching one of the
entries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses parameter. If the Access
to Network Management parameter is configured to From Both Ethernet and
Wireless Link then no IP address based filtering is configured for the Ethernet
port.
Activate IP filter on Both Ethernet and Wireless Link Ports: Applicable to

all options of the Access to Network Management parameter. The unit can be
managed from the port(s) defined by the Access to Network Management
parameter only by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in
the Set Network Management IP Addresses parameter.
The default selection is Disable.

148
4.2.6.3.3 Set Network Management IP Address

The Set Network Management IP Address option enables defining up to 10 IP
addresses of devices that can manage the unit if the Network Management
Filtering option is enabled.
The default Network Management IP Address is 0.0.0.0 (all 10 addresses).
4.2.6.3.4 Delete a Network Management IP Address

The Delete Network Management IP Address option enables deleting IP address
entries from the Network Management IP Addresses list.
4.2.6.3.5 Delete All Network Management IP Addresses

The Delete All Network Management IP Addresses option enables deleting all
entries from the Network Management IP Addresses list.
4.2.6.3.6 Set/Change Network Management IP Address Ranges

The Set/Change Network Management IP address Ranges menu enables defining,
updating or deleting IP address ranges from which the unit can be managed if the
Network Management Filtering option is enabled. This is in addition to the
previous options in the Network Management menu that enable defining,
updating and deleting discrete IP addresses.
The menu includes the following options:
4.2.6.3.6.1 Set/Change Network Management IP Address Ranges

The Set/Change Network Management IP Address Ranges option enables
defining/updating up to 10 IP address ranges from which the unit can be
managed if the Network Management Filtering option is enabled.
The default Network Management IP Address Range is 0.0.0.0 TO 0.0.0.0 (all 10

ranges).
A range can be defined using a string that includes either a start and end
address, in the format “<start address> to <end address>” (example: 192.168.1.1
to 192.168.1.255), or a base address and a mask, in the format “<base address>
mask <mask>” (example: 192.168.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0).
4.2.6.3.6.2 Delete Network Management IP Address Range

The Delete Network Management IP Address Range option enables deleting IP
address range entries from the Network Management IP Address Ranges list.
4.2.6.3.6.3 Delete All Network Management IP Address Ranges

The Delete All Network Management IP Address Ranges option enables deleting
all entries from the Network Management IP Address Ranges list.

149
4.2.6.3.7 SNMP Traps

The SNMP submenu enables or disables the transmission of SNMP Traps. If this
option is enabled, up to 10 IP addresses of stations to which SNMP traps are sent
can be defined.
4.2.6.3.7.1 Send SNMP Traps

The Send SNMP Traps option enables or disables the sending of SNMP traps.
4.2.6.3.7.2 SNMP Traps Destination IP Addresses

The SNMP Traps Destination IP Addresses submenu enables defining up to 10 IP
addresses of devices to which the SNMP Traps are to be sent.
The default of all 10 SNMP Traps IP destinations is 0.0.0.0.
4.2.6.3.7.3 SNMP Traps Community

The SNMP Traps Community option enables defining the Community name for
each IP address to which SNMP Trap messages are to be sent.
Valid strings: Up to 8 ASCII characters.
The default for all 10 addresses is “public”, which is the default Read community.
4.2.6.3.7.4 Delete One Trap Address

The Delete One Trap Address option enables deleting Trap address entries from
the SNMP Traps Addresses list.
4.2.6.3.7.5 Delete All Trap Addresses

The Delete All Trap Addresses option enables deleting all entries from the SNMP
Traps Addresses list.
4.2.6.3.8 AP Client IP Address (SU Only)

The BreezeACCESS WI2 system comprises a self-contained combination of an
advanced WiFi Access Point and a BreezeACCESS SU-ODU that provides
backhaul connectivity. The AP Client IP Address parameter enables the installer
to configure in the SU the IP address of the WiFi AP connected to it, providing
availability of the IP address information for remote management of the AP.
The default AP Client IP Address is 0.0.0.0 (meaning none).

150
4.2.6.4 Bridge Parameters

The Bridge Parameters menu provides a series of parameter sets that enables
configuring parameters such as control and filtering options for broadcast
transmissions, VLAN support, and Type of Service prioritization.
The Bridge Parameters menu includes the following options:
VLAN Support
Ethernet Broadcast Filtering (SU only)
Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter
Bridge Aging Time
Roaming Option (SU only)
Broadcast Relaying (AU only)
Unicast Relaying (AU only)
MAC Address List (AU only)
4.2.6.4.1 VLAN Support

The VLAN Support menu enables defining the parameters related to the IEEE
802.1Q compliant VLAN aware (Virtual LAN aware) feature of the units. Each
VLAN includes stations that can communicate with each other, but cannot
communicate with stations belonging to different VLANs. The VLAN feature also
provides the ability to set traffic priorities for transmission of certain frames. The
information related to the VLAN is included in the VLAN Tag Header, which is
inserted in each frame between the MAC header and the data. VLAN
implementation in BreezeACCESS VL units supports frame routing by port
information, whereby each port is connected to only one VLAN.
The system also supports the 802.1 QinQ standard, which defines the way to
have 2 VLAN tags (double-tagged frames). This procedure allows an additional
VLAN tag, called Service Provider VLAN tag, to be inserted into an existing
IEEE 802.1Q tagged Ethernet frame. This is a solution to transport multiple
customers’ VLANs across the service provider’s network without interfering with
each other.
The VLAN Support menu includes the following parameters:
VLAN Link Type

151
VLAN ID – Data (SU only)
VLAN ID – Management
Service Provider VLAN ID (SU only)
VLAN Forwarding
VLAN Relaying (AU only)
VLAN Traffic Priority
VLAN QinQ Protocol Ethertype
4.2.6.4.1.1 VLAN ID-Data (SU only)

The VLAN ID-Data is applicable only when the VLAN Link Type parameter is set
to Access Link. It enables defining the VLAN ID for data frames, which identifies
the VLAN to which the unit belongs.
Valid values range from 1 to 4094.
Default value: 1.
The VLAN ID-Data affects frames received from the wireless link port, as follows:
Only tagged frames with a VLAN ID (VID) equal to the VLAN ID-Data defined
in the unit are forwarded to the Ethernet port.
The tag headers are removed from the data frames received from the wireless
link before they are transmitted on the Ethernet port.
The VLAN ID-Data affects frames received from the Ethernet port, as follows:
A VLAN Data Tag is inserted in all untagged frames received from the
Ethernet port before transmission on the wireless link. The tag includes the
values of the VLAN ID-Data and the VLAN Priority-Data parameters.
Tagged frames received on Ethernet port, which are meant to be forwarded to

the wireless link port, are discarded. This includes frames with tagging for
prioritization purposes only.
4.2.6.4.1.2 VLAN ID-Management

The VLAN ID-Management is applicable for all link types. It enables defining the
VLAN ID for management frames, which identifies remote stations for
management purposes. This applies to all management applications using

152
protocols such as SNMP, TFTP, ICMP (ping), DHCP and Telnet. All
servers/stations using these protocols must tag the management frames sent to
the unit with the value of the VLAN ID-Management parameter.
Valid values: 1 to 4094 or 65535 (No VLAN).
If the VLAN ID-Management is other than 65535:
Only single-tagged management frames with a matching VLAN ID, or double-

tagged management frames with a matching Service Provider VLAN ID
received on either the Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the
unit.
A VLAN Management Tag is inserted in all management frames generated by

the unit before transmission on either the Ethernet or wireless link port. The
tag includes the values of the VLAN ID-Management and the VLAN Priority-
Management parameters.
If the VLAN ID-Management is 65535 (No VLAN):
For Access, Trunk and Hybrid links: Only untagged management frames
received on either the Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the
unit.
An AU operating in Service Provider link mode with VLAN ID – Management =

65535 cannot be managed from either the Ethernet or wireless ports.
An SU operating in Service Provider link mode with VLAN ID – Management =

65535 will accept untagged management frames from the Ethernet port. From
the wireless port it will accept only tagged frames with a VLAN ID tag that
matches the defined Service Provider VLAN ID.
Management frames generated by the unit are not tagged.
The following table summarizes the functionality of the internal management port
in accordance with the value of the VLAN ID-Management parameter. The table is
valid for all link types. Refer to the VLAN Link Type - Access Link, Trunk Link
and Service Provider Link options for some restrictions when configuring this
parameter.

153
Table 4-5: VLAN Management Port Functionality
Action Management Port - Internal

Receive from Ethernet when Link Type is Tagged frames, matching VID-M
Access, Trunk or Hybrid Untagged frames when VID-M=65535
Receive from Ethernet when Link Type is Tagged frames, matching VID-M
Service Provider
Receive from Wireless when Link Type is Tagged frames, matching VID-M
Access, Trunk or Hybrid Untagged frames when VID-M=65535
Receive from wireless when Link Type is Tagged frames, matching VID-M
Service Provider
Transmit Insert VID-M, PID-M
Table Legend:
VID-M: VLAN ID-Management
PID-M: VLAN Priority-Management
4.2.6.4.1.3 VLAN Link Type

The VLAN Link Type parameter enables defining the functionality of the VLAN
aware capability of the unit.
The available options are Hybrid Link, Trunk Link, Access Link and Service
Provider Link (Access Link option is available only in SUs).
The default selection is Hybrid Link.
4.2.6.4.1.3.1 Access Link (SU only)

Access Link transfers frames while tagging/untagging them since all devices
connected to the unit are VLAN unaware. Thus, the unit cannot transfer tagged
frames.
Table 4-6 summarizes the functionality of the data port for an Access link.

154
Table 4-6: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Access Link
Action Data Port - SU

Receive from Ethernet Untagged frames
Accept from Wireless Tagged frames, matching VID-D
Tag Insert VID-D, PID-D (to wireless)
Tag Remove Yes (to Ethernet)
Table Legend:
VID-D: VLAN ID-Data
PID-D: VLAN Priority-Data
4.2.6.4.1.3.2 Trunk Link

Trunk Link transfers only tagged frames, as all devices connected to the unit are
VLAN aware. Only tagged data frames received on the Ethernet or wireless link
ports are forwarded.
CAUTION
It is not recommended that you configure a unit as a Trunk Link with the VLAN ID-Management
parameter set at 65535, as it does not forward any 'NO VLAN' management frames to its other
port, making it impossible to manage devices connected behind the unit that are also configured
with 'NO VLAN'.
If the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled, a data frame received with a VLAN ID
that is not a member of the unit's VLAN Forwarding List is discarded.
NOTE
If the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled, be sure to include the VLAN ID-Management value of
all units that should be managed via the wireless port of the unit, in the Forwarding List.
If the VLAN Relaying option is enabled in an AU, a data frame relayed with a
VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit's VLAN Relaying List is discarded.
NOTE
If the VLAN Relaying option is enabled and you manage your devices from behind an SU unit, be
sure to include the VLAN ID-Management value of all units to be managed when relaying via the
wireless port of the AU unit, in the Relaying List. If the VLAN Forwarding option is also enabled in
the AU, these VLAN IDs should also be included in the Forwarding List.
Table 4-7 summarizes the functionality of the data port for a Trunk link.

155
Table 4-7: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Trunk Link
Action Data Port – AU and SU

Accept from Ethernet Tagged frames.
If Forwarding is enabled, only frames with VLAN ID values
which are included in the Forwarding list
Accept from Wireless Tagged frames

which are included in the Forwarding list
Tag Insert No
Tag Remove No
4.2.6.4.1.3.3 Hybrid Link

Hybrid Link transfers both tagged and untagged frames, as the devices connected
to the unit can be either VLAN aware or VLAN unaware. This is equivalent to
defining no VLAN support, as the unit is transparent to VLAN.
Table 4-8 summarizes the functionality of the data port for a Hybrid link.
Table 4-8: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Hybrid Link
Action Data Port – AU and SU

Accept from Ethernet All
Accept from Wireless All
Tag Insert No
Tag Remove No

156
4.2.6.4.1.3.4 Service Provider Link

A Service Provider Link transfers both single tagged frames (Service Provider tag)
and double-tagged frames (Service Provider tag + Customer tag). The Service
Provider tag includes the Service Provider VLAN ID and the VLAN QinQ
Ethertype.
The following tables summarize the functionality of the SU/AU data port for a
Service Provider Link.
Table 4-9: VLAN Data Port Functionality for SU - Service Provider Link
Action Data Port –SU

Accept from Ethernet Untagged frames
Single tagged frames:
If Forwarding is disabled
which are included in the Forwarding List
Accept from Wireless Single tagged frames: only frames with a Service Provider tag
whose parameters match the Service Provider parameters
defined in the unit (Service Provider VLAN ID and VLAN QinQ
Ethertype)
Double tagged frames: only frames with a Service Provider tag
whose parameters match the Service Provider parameters
defined in the unit (Service Provider VLAN ID and VLAN QinQ
Ethertype). If Forwarding is enabled, only frames with Customer
VLAN ID values that are included in the Forwarding List
Tag Insert Service Provider (SP) tag (to wireless)
Tag Remove Yes (to Ethernet)

157
Table 4-10: VLAN Data Port Functionality for AU - Service Provider Link
Action Data Port –AU

Accept from Ethernet Single tagged frames:
Double tagged frames:
If Forwarding is enabled, only frames with Service Provider
VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding List
Accept from Wireless Single tagged frames:
Double tagged frames:
If Forwarding is enabled, only frames with Service Provider
VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding List
Tag Insert No
Tag Remove No
NOTE
The following units management limitations apply when using a Service Provider Link:
The unit can be managed only with tagged frames: VLAN ID – Management must be other than
65535.
To enable proper management, all units in a cell (the AU and all SUs served by it) must use the
VLAN ID - Management.
The VLAN ID – Management must differ from the Customer’s VLAN ID - Data.
4.2.6.4.1.4 VLAN Forwarding (AU and SU)

The VLAN Forwarding feature is applicable only for Trunk Links and Service
Provider Links. It enables defining the VLAN ID values to be included in the VLAN
Forwarding List. If the Link Type is defined as either a Trunk Link or a Service
Provider Link and the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled, a data frame received
with a VLAN ID (or a Service Provider VLAN ID) that is not a member of the unit's
VLAN Forwarding List is discarded.
The VLAN Forwarding submenu provides the following options:

158
4.2.6.4.1.4.1 VLAN Forwarding Support

The VLAN Forwarding Support option enables or disables the VLAN Forwarding
feature.
Available selections are Disable and Enable.
4.2.6.4.1.4.2 Add Forwarding VLAN ID

The Add Forwarding VLAN ID option enables adding a VLAN ID to the VLAN
Forwarding List. One VLAN ID can be entered at a time. The maximum number of
VLAN IDs in the VLAN Forwarding List is 20.
Valid values are 1 to 4094.
4.2.6.4.1.4.3 Remove Forwarding VLAN ID

The Remove Forwarding VLAN ID option enables removing a VLAN ID from the
VLAN ID Forwarding List.
Valid values are VID values (from 1 to 4094) that are included in the VLAN
Forwarding List.
4.2.6.4.1.4.4 Show VLAN ID Forwarding List

The Show VLAN Forwarding List option displays the values of the VLAN IDs
included in the VLAN Forwarding List.
NOTE
If the VLAN ID Forwarding List is empty and the VLAN Forwarding Support is set to Enable, then all
data frames are discarded.
If VLAN Relaying Support and VLAN Forwarding Support are both enabled, then all VLAN IDs
configured in the Relaying List must also be configured in the Forwarding List.
4.2.6.4.1.5 VLAN Relaying (AU only)

The VLAN Relaying feature is applicable only for Trunk Links and Service
Provider Links. It enables defining the VLAN ID values to be included in the VLAN
Relaying List.
If the Link Type is defined as either a Trunk Link or a Service Provider Link and
the VLAN Relaying Support option is enabled, a frame relayed from the wireless
link, which is a frame received from the wireless link that should be transmitted
back through the wireless link, with a VLAN ID (or a Service Provider VLAN ID)
that is not a member of the unit's VLAN Relaying List, is discarded. If VLAN
Forwarding Support is also enabled, it is necessary to configure all the VLAN IDs
in the Relaying List also in the Forwarding List to enable the relaying operation.
The VLAN Relaying menu provides the following options:

159
4.2.6.4.1.5.1 VLAN Relaying Support

The VLAN Relaying Support option enables or disables the VLAN Relaying
feature.
Available selections are Disable and Enable.
4.2.6.4.1.5.2 Add Relaying VLAN ID

The Add Relaying VLAN ID option enables adding a VLAN ID to the VLAN
Relaying List. One VLAN ID can be entered at a time. The maximum number of
VLAN IDs in the VLAN Relaying List is 20.
Valid values are 1 to 4094.
4.2.6.4.1.5.3 Remove Relaying VLAN ID

The Remove Relaying VLAN ID option enables removing a VLAN ID from the VLAN
ID Relaying List. Valid values are VID values (from 1 to 4094)) that are included
in the VLAN Relaying List.
4.2.6.4.1.5.4 Show VLAN ID Relaying List

The Show VLAN Relaying option displays the values of the VLAN IDs included in
the VLAN Relaying List.
NOTE
If the VLAN ID Relaying List is empty and the VLAN Relaying Support is Enabled, then all data
frames relayed from the wireless link are discarded.
If VLAN Relaying Support and VLAN Forwarding Support are both enabled, then all VLAN IDs
configured in the Relaying List must also be configured in the Forwarding List.
4.2.6.4.1.6 Service Provider VLAN ID (SU only)

The Service Provider VLAN ID is applicable only when the VLAN Link Type
parameter is set to Service Provider Link. It enables defining the Service Provider
VLAN ID for data frames, which identifies the Service Provider VLAN to which the
unit belongs.
The range is 1 to 4094.
The Service provider VLAN ID affects frames received from the wireless link port,
as follows:
Both single-tagged frames (having Service Provider VLAN ID tag) and double-
tagged frames (having Service Provider VLAN ID and customer VLAN ID tags)
with matching VLAN ID are forwarded to the Ethernet Port (provided the
Ethertype of the tag matches the configured VLAN QinQ Ethertype).

160
Before transmitting the frames to the Ethernet port, the Service Provider
VLAN ID tag is removed.
The Service Provider VLAN ID affects frames received from the Ethernet link port,
as follows: A Service Provider tag, that includes the configured Service Provider
VLAN ID (and the VLAN QinQ Ethertype) is inserted in all frames, both tagged
and untagged, before transmission to the wireless link.
4.2.6.4.1.7 VLAN Traffic Priority

The VLAN Traffic Priority menu enables configuring the VLAN Priority field in
applicable frames. These parameters only impact the way in which other VLAN
aware devices in the network will handle the packet. All parameters that affect
prioritization within the BreezeACCES VL system, including VLAN-based
prioritization, are located in the Traffic Prioritization menu.
The VLAN Traffic Priority menu includes the following parameters:
VLAN Priority – Data (SU only)
VLAN Priority – Management
4.2.6.4.1.7.1 VLAN Priority - Data (SU only)

The VLAN Priority - Data is applicable for Access Links only. It enables
configuring the value of the VLAN Priority field for data frames transmitted to the
wireless link. All data frames are routed to the Low queue. This parameter only
impacts the way other VLAN aware devices handle the packet.
4.2.6.4.1.7.2 VLAN Priority - Management

The VLAN Priority - Management enables defining the value of the VLAN Priority
field for management frames in units with VLAN ID-Management that is other
than 65535. All management frames are routed to the High queue. This
parameter only impacts the way other VLAN aware devices handle the packet.
The default value is 4 for SUs and 0 for AUs.
4.2.6.4.1.8 VLAN QinQ Protocol Ethertype

The VLAN QinQ Proptocol Ethertype parameter sets the Ethertype of the Service
Provider tag, and is applicable only for Service Provider Links.
The valid values are from 8100 to 9000, 9100 and 9200 (Hex).

161
The default value is 8100 (Hex).
4.2.6.4.1.9 Show VLAN Parameters

The Show VLAN Parameters option displays the current values of the VLAN
support parameters.
4.2.6.4.2 Ethernet Broadcast Filtering (SU only)

The Ethernet Broadcast Filtering menu enables defining the layer 2 (Ethernet)
broadcast and multicast filtering capabilities for the selected SU. Filtering the
Ethernet broadcasts enhances the security of the system and saves bandwidth on
the wireless medium by blocking protocols that are typically used in the
customer's LAN but are not relevant for other customers, such as NetBios, which
is used by the Microsoft Network Neighborhood. Enabling this feature blocks
Ethernet broadcasts and multicasts by setting the I/G bit at the destination
address to 1. This feature should not be enabled when there is a router behind
the SU.
The Ethernet Broadcast Filtering menu includes the following parameters:
Filter Options
DHCP Broadcast Override Filter
PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter
ARP Broadcast Override Filter
4.2.6.4.2.1 Filter Options

The Filter Options enables defining the Ethernet Broadcast filtering functionality
of the unit. Select from the following options:
Disable - no Ethernet Broadcast Filtering.
On Ethernet Port Only - filters broadcast messages received from the

Ethernet port.
On Wireless Port Only - filters broadcast messages received from the

wireless link port.
On Both Ethernet and Wireless Ports - filters broadcast messages received

from both the Ethernet and wireless link ports.

162
4.2.6.4.2.2 DHCP Broadcast Override Filter

The DHCP Broadcast Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting
of DHCP messages. Even if according to the selected option in the Filter Options
parameter, broadcast messages should be filtered, DHCP broadcasts are
transmitted if this parameter is set to Enable. Select from the following options:
Disable - DHCP Broadcast messages are filtered or transmitted according to

the general filtering criteria in the Filter Options parameter.
Enable - DHCP Broadcast messages are transmitted regardless of the selected

value of the Filter Options parameter.
4.2.6.4.2.3 PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter

The PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting
of PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) messages. Even if according to
the selected option in the Filter Options parameter, broadcast messages should
be filtered, PPPoE broadcasts are transmitted if this parameter is set to Enable.
Select from the following options:
Disable - PPPoE Broadcast messages are filtered or transmitted according to

the general filtering criteria in the Filter Options parameter.
Enable - PPPoE Broadcast messages are transmitted regardless of the

selected value of the Filter Options parameter.
4.2.6.4.2.4 ARP Broadcast Override Filter

The ARP Broadcast Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting of
ARP messages. Even if according to the selected option in the Filter Options
parameter, broadcast messages should be filtered, ARP broadcasts are
transmitted if this parameter is set to Enable. Select from the following options:
Disable - ARP messages are filtered or transmitted according to the general

filtering criteria in the Filter Options parameter.
Enable - ARP messages are transmitted regardless of the selected value of the
Filter Options parameter.
The default selection is Enable.

163
4.2.6.4.3 Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter

The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter parameters, available in both AU and
SU, enable to limit the number of broadcast and/or multicast packets that can be
transmitted per second, in order to prevent the potential flooding of the wireless
medium by certain ARP attacks.
In SUs, the limiter is placed after the Ethernet Broadcast Filters. For this reason,
the limiter will receive only the packets that pass through these filters. If the
Ethernet filters of the SU are disabled, the limiter will be applied to all relevant
packets received.
When the Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter is enabled and the specified limit
is reached, the unit will send a trap. The trap will be sent periodically till the
number of broadcast/multicast packets will be less than the maximum. The trap
will inform the user how many packets were discarded in the last period.
The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter menu allows viewing and setting the
following parameters:
4.2.6.4.3.1 Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Option

The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Option defines the limiter’s
functionality. The available options are:
Disable: No limiter
Limit only Broadcast Packets
Limit Multicast Packets that are not Broadcasts
Limit All Multicast Packets (including broadcast)
4.2.6.4.3.2 Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Threshold

The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Threshold defines the maximum
number of packets per second that will pass the limiter when it is enabled.
The range is from 0 to 204800 (packets/second).
The default is 50 packets.
4.2.6.4.3.3 Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Send Trap Interval

The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Send Trap Interval defines the
minimum time in minutes between two consecutive transmissions of the trap
indicating the number of packets that were dropped by the limiter since the
previous trap (or since the time that the limit has been exceeded).

164
The range is from 1 to 60 minutes.
The default is 5 minutes.
4.2.6.4.4 Bridge Aging Time

The Bridge Aging Time parameter enables selecting the bridge aging time for
learned addresses of devices on both the wired and wireless sides, not including
BreezeACCESS VL units.
The available range is 20 to 2000 seconds.
The default value is 300 seconds.
4.2.6.4.5 Broadcast Relaying (AU only)

The Broadcast Relaying option enables selecting whether the unit performs
broadcast relaying. When the Broadcast Relaying parameter is enabled,
broadcast packets originating from devices on the wireless link are transmitted by
the AU back to the wireless link devices, as well as to the wired LAN. If disabled,
these packets are sent only to the local wired LAN and are not sent back to the
wireless link. Disable the broadcast relaying only if all broadcast messages from
the wireless link are certain to be directed to the wired LAN.
4.2.6.4.6 Unicast Relaying (AU only)

The Unicast Relaying option enables selecting whether the unit performs unicast
relaying. When the Unicast Relaying parameter is enabled, unicast packets
originating from devices on the wireless link can be transmitted back to the
wireless link devices. If disabled, these packets are not sent to the wireless link
even if they are intended for devices on the wireless link. Disable the Unicast
Relaying parameter only if all unicast messages from the wireless link are certain
to be directed to the local wired LAN.
4.2.6.4.7 MAC Address List (AU only)

The MAC Address List submenu enables to define a list of up to 100 MAC
addresses as belonging to devices that are either granted or denied service. When
the list is defined as a Deny List, the AU will not provide services to a unit whose
MAC address is included in the list, enabling to disconnect units in cases such as
when the user had fraudulently succeeded to configure the unit to values
different from the subscription plan. When the list is defined as an Allow List, the
AU will provide services only to units with a MAC address that is included in the
list.
The MAC Address List submenu includes the following:

165
4.2.6.4.7.1 Add MAC Address to List

Select Add MAC Address to List to add a MAC Address to the List.
4.2.6.4.7.2 Remove MAC Address from List

Select Remove MAC Address from List to remove a MAC Address from the List.
4.2.6.4.7.3 MAC Address List Action

This parameter defines the working mode of the MAC list:
In the case of an Allowed list, if the MAC address is included in the list, the
SU will be able to associate itself with the AU and receive permission for
generating traffic; if it is not found in the list, it will still be associated but
without the permission to generate traffic.
In the case of a Deny list, if the MAC address is included in the list, the SU
will be able to associate itself with the AU but will not be able to generate
traffic; otherwise (if the address is not found in the list) the SU will be
associated and will be able to generate traffic.
Possible options for this parameter are Deny and Allow.
The default is Deny.
4.2.6.4.7.4 Show MAC Address List

Select Show MAC Address List to display the current list of MAC Addresses
included in the List and the selected List Action.
4.2.6.4.8 Roaming Option (SU only)

The Roaming Option defines the roaming support of the unit. When roaming is
not expected, it is preferable to set this parameter to Disable. This will cause the
unit to start scanning for another AU after losing connectivity with the current
AU only after 7 seconds during which no beacons were received from the current
AU. This will prevent scanning for another AU in cases where no beacons were
received due to a short temporary problem.
When set to Enable, the SU will wait only one second before it starts scanning for
another AU. In addition, when the Roaming Option is enabled, the SU will send
Roaming SNAP messages upon associating with a new AU. This enables fast
distribution of the new location for all clients that are behind the SU. In this case,
the SU will send multicast SNAP messages via the wireless link each time it
associates with a new AU, except for the first association after reset. The SU will
send one SNAP message for each client learned on its Ethernet port, based on its
bridging table. In the SNAP message the clients’ MAC address is used as the
source address. The AU that receives this SNAP message learns from it the new
location of the clients. It forwards the SNAP to other AUs and Layer-2 networking
equipment via its Ethernet port, to facilitate uninterrupted connectivity and

166
correct routing of transmissions to these clients. The new AU as well as the

previous AU with which the SU was associated, will forward the SNAP messages
to all other SUs associated with them.
4.2.6.4.9 Ports Control (SU only)

The Ports Control sub-menu includes the Ethernet Port Control option:
4.2.6.4.9.1 Ethernet Port Control

The Ethernet Port Control option allows enabling or disabling non-management
traffic to/from the Ethernet port. When changed to Disable, all current data
sessions will be terminated. The unit is still manageable via the Ethernet port
even if it is disabled for data traffic.
4.2.6.4.10 Show Bridge Parameters

The Show Bridge Parameters option displays the current values of the Bridge
parameters.

167
4.2.6.5 Performance Parameters

The Performance Parameters menu enables defining a series of parameters that
control the method by which traffic is transmitted through the wireless access
network.
The Performance Parameters menu includes the following parameters:
RTS Threshold
Minimum Contention Window
Maximum Contention Window
Multicast Modulation Level (AU only)
Maximum Modulation Level
Average SNR Memory Factor
Number of HW Retries
Burst Mode
Adaptive Modulation Algorithm
Concatenation Parameters
4.2.6.5.1 RTS Threshold

The RTS Threshold parameter defines the minimum frame size that requires an
RTS/CTS (Request To Send/Clear To Send) handshake. Frames whose size is
smaller than the RTS Threshold value are transmitted directly to the wireless link
without being preceded with RTS frames. Setting this parameter to a value larger
than the maximum frame size eliminates the RTS/CTS handshake for frames
transmitted by this unit.
The available values range from 20 to 4032 bytes for units with HW revision C,
and 20 to 2200 for units with HW revision A or B.
The default value is 60 bytes for SUs. For AUs with HW revision C the default is
4032, and for AUs with HW revision A or B the default is 2200. It is
recommended that these values be used to ensure that RTS/CTS is never used in
the AU.

168
4.2.6.5.2 Minimum Contention Window

The Minimum Contention Window parameter determines the time that a unit
waits from the time it has concluded that there are no detectable transmissions
by other units until it attempts to transmit. The BreezeACCESS VL system uses a
special mechanism based on detecting the presence of a carrier signal and
analyzing the information contained in the transmissions of the AU to estimate
the activity of other SUs served by the AU. The target is to minimize collisions in
the wireless medium resulting from attempts of more than one unit to transmit at
the same time.
The system uses an exponential Back-off algorithm to resolve contention between

several units that want to access the wireless medium. The method requires each
station to choose a random number N between 0 and a given number C each time
it wants to access the medium. The unit will attempt to access the medium only
after a time equal to DIFS (for more details refer to section 4.2.6.2.11) plus N time
slots, always checking if a different unit has accessed the medium before. Each
time the unit tries to transmit and a collision occurs; the maximum number C
used for the random number selection will be increased to the next available
value. The available values are 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511 and 1023.
The Minimum Contention Window parameter is the first maximum number C

used in the back-off algorithm. The higher the number of SUs served by the same
AU, the higher the Minimum Contention Window for each SU should be. In
addition, when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled, the Minimum
and Maximum Contention Window parameters can be configured to provide
certain units with an advantage over other units.
The available values are 0, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511 and 1023. A value of 0
means that the contention window algorithm is not used and that the unit will
attempt to access the medium immediately after a time equal to DIFS.
CAUTION
A value of 0 disables the contention window back-off algorithm. It should only be used in point-to-
point applications. For more details on configuring units in a point-to-point link refer to section
4.2.6.2.11.
4.2.6.5.3 Maximum Contention Window

The Maximum Contention Window parameter defines the upper limit for the
maximum number C used in the back-off algorithm as described in Minimum
Contention Window above.
The available values are 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511 and 1023.

169
4.2.6.5.4 Multicast Modulation Level (AU only)

The Multicast Modulation Level parameter defines the modulation level used for
transmitting multicast and broadcast data frames. Multicast and broadcast
transmissions are not acknowledged; therefore if a multicast or broadcast
transmission is not properly received there is no possibility of retransmitting. It is
recommended that you set a lower modulation level for broadcast and multicast
frame transmissions to increase the probability that they are received without
errors.
The Multicast Modulation Level parameter is applicable only to data frames.

Beacons and other wireless management and control frames are always
transmitted at the lowest modulation level according to the Sub-Band.
The minimum value for the Multicast Modulation Level is defined by the Sub-
Band in use.
The maximum value for the Multicast Modulation Level is defined by the Sub-
Band in use and the HW revision of the unit. Units with HW revision A support a
maximum value of 7, while units with HW revision B and higher support a
maximum value of 8.
The default value is the lowest supported modulation level.
4.2.6.5.5 Maximum Modulation Level

When the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm (see section 4.2.6.5.9) is enabled, it
changes the modulation level dynamically according to link conditions. The
purpose is to increase the probability of using the maximum possible modulation
level at any given moment. Although the algorithm will avoid using modulation
levels that are too high for the prevailing link conditions, it might be better under
certain conditions to limit the use of higher modulation levels. If the link quality
is not sufficient, it is recommended that the maximum modulation level be
decreased, as higher modulation levels increase the error rate. In such
conditions, a higher Maximum Modulation Level increases the number or
retransmissions before the modulation level is being reduced by the Adaptive
Modulation Algorithm. A high number of retransmissions reduces the overall
throughput of the applicable SU as well as all other SUs associated with the same
AU.
The link quality can be estimated based on the SNR measurement of the SU at
the AU, which can be viewed in the MAC Address Database option in the Site
Survey menu. If the measured SNR is less than a certain threshold, it is
recommended that the maximum modulation level of the SU be decreased in
accordance with Table 4-11, using the values of typical sensitivity. It is

170
recommended to add a 2 dB safety margin to compensate for possible

measurement inaccuracy or variance in the link quality.
NOTE
The SNR measurement at the AU is accurate only when receiving transmissions from the
applicable SU. If necessary, use the Ping Test utility in the Site Survey menu to verify data
transmission.
When the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm is disabled, this parameter will serve to
determine Fixed Modulation Level used for transmissions.
The minimum value for the Maximum Modulation Level is defined by the Sub-
Band in use.
The maximum value for the Maximum Modulation Level is defined by the Sub-
Band in use and the HW revision of the unit. Units with HW revision A support a
maximum value of 7, while units with HW revision B and higher support a
maximum value of 8.

171
The default is the highest supported Modulation Level.
Table 4-11: Recommended Maximum Modulation Level*

SNR > 23 dB 8
21 dB < SNR < 23 dB 7
16 dB < SNR < 21 dB 6
13 dB < SNR < 16 dB 5
10 dB < SNR < 13 dB 4
8 dB < SNR < 10 dB 3
7 dB < SNR < 8 dB 2
6 dB < SNR < 7 dB 1

* The maximum supported value depends on the unit’s HW revision and on the Max Modulation
Level according to the Sub-Band.
4.2.6.5.6 Average SNR Memory Factor

The Average SNR Memory Factor defines the weight of history (value of last
calculated average SNR) in the formula used for calculating the current average
SNR for received data frames. This average SNR is used by the ATPC algorithm in
the AU and is also included in the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm information
messages transmitted by the AU and the SU. The higher the value of this
parameter, the higher is the weight of history in the formula.
Available values: -1 to 32. -1 is for no weight for history, meaning that average
SNR equals the last measured SNR.
Default value: 5

172
4.2.6.5.7 Number of HW Retries

The Number of HW Retries parameter defines the maximum number of times that
an unacknowledged packet is retransmitted. When the Adaptive Modulation
Algorithm is disabled, a frame will be dropped when the number of unsuccessful
retransmissions reaches this value. For details on the effect of this parameter
when the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm is enabled, refer to section 4.2.6.5.9.
NOTE
The Number of HW Retries parameter is not applicable when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option
is enabled.
The available values range is from 1 to 14.
4.2.6.5.8 Burst Mode

Burst mode provides an increased throughput by reducing the overhead
associated with transmissions in the wireless medium. In a burst transmission
the inter-frame spacing is reduced and unicast data frames are transmitted
without any contention period (burst mode is not activated on
broadcasts/multicasts).
The Burst Mode is available only if Burst Mode is supported by the Sub-Band in
use. For information on how to view the Sub-Bands supported by the unit and
the supported parameters’ values and options, refer to section 4.2.2.4.
In AUs with HW Revision B or lower, Burst Mode cannot be activated when the
DFS option is used. In AUs with HW Revision B or lower, the Burst Mode option
will be “blocked” upon trying to enable Burst Mode when the DFS Option is
enabled. This limitation does not apply to AUs with HW Revision C.
In SUs and AUs with HW Revision B or lower, Burst Mode cannot be activated
when using WEP for data encryption. In units with HW Revision B or lower, the
Burst Mode option will be “blocked” upon trying to enable it when using WEP for
data encryption. This limitation does not apply to units with HW Revision C.
NOTE
The Burst Mode parameters are not applicable when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is
enabled.
4.2.6.5.8.1 Burst Mode Option

The Burst Mode Option enables or disables the Burst Mode operation.

173
4.2.6.5.8.2 Burst Mode Time Interval

The Burst Mode Time Interval defines the burst size, which is the time in which
data frames are sent immediately without contending for the wireless medium.
The range is 1 to the value of the Maximum Burst Duration defined for the Sub-
Band.
The default is 5 milliseconds or the value of Maximum Burst Duration defined for
the Sub-Band (the lower of the two values).
4.2.6.5.9 Adaptive Modulation Algorithm (Multi Rate)

The Adaptive Modulation Algorithm enables adapting the modulation level of
transmitted data to the prevailing conditions of the applicable radio link. The
algorithm provides Access Units with simultaneous, adaptive support for multiple
Subscriber Units at different modulation levels, as transmission’s modulation
level decisions are made separately for each associated SU.
Link quality fluctuates due to various environmental conditions. Dynamically

switching between the possible modulation levels increases the probability of
using the maximum modulation level suitable for the current radio link quality at
any given moment.
The decisions made by the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm for the modulation
level to be used are based on multiple parameters, including information on
received signal quality (SNR) that is received periodically from the destination
unit, the time that has passed since last transmission to the relevant unit, and
the recent history of successful and unsuccessful
transmissions/retransmissions. In the AU the decision algorithm is performed
separately for each SU.
The transmission/retransmission mechanism operates as follows:
1 Each new frame (first transmission attempt) will be transmitted at a

modulation level selected by the Adaptive Modulation algorithm.
2 If first transmission trial has failed, the frame will be retransmitted at the
same modulation level up to the maximum number of retransmission
attempts defined by the Number of HW Retries parameter.
The Adaptive Modulation Parameters menu includes the following parameters:
4.2.6.5.9.1 Adaptive Modulation Option

The Adaptive Modulation Option enables or disables the Adaptive Modulation
decision algorithm. When enabled, the algorithm supports decrease/increase of
transmission’s modulation levels between the lowest possible level to the value
configured for the Maximum Modulation Level parameter. If the Maximum
Modulation Level is set at the lowest possible level, the Adaptive Modulation
algorithm has no effect.

174
4.2.6.5.9.2 Minimum Interval Between Adaptive Modulation Messages

The Minimum Interval Between Adaptive Modulation Messages sets the minimum
interval between two consecutive adaptive modulation messages, carrying
information on the SNR of received signals. The messages in the AU include SNR
information on all the SUs associated with it.
The available range is from 1 to 3600 seconds.
The default is 4 seconds.
4.2.6.5.9.3 Adaptive Modulation Decision Thresholds

Enables selection between Normal and High decision thresholds for the Adaptive
Modulation algorithm. In links with a low SNR (below 13), the Adaptive
Modulation algorithm may not stabilize on the correct modulation level when
using the standard decision thresholds. In this case the algorithm may try to use
a modulation level that is too high, resulting in a relatively large number of
dropped frames. The “High” option solves this limitation and ensures good
performance also in links with a low SNR.
The default is Normal.
4.2.6.5.10 Concatenation Parameters

The Concatenation mechanism enables bundling several data frames into a single
frame for transmission to the wireless link. This feature improves throughput and
reduces the overhead in the wireless medium, by requiring only one CRC for each
concatenated frame, one RTS/CTS cycle if applicable, and a single waiting period
according to the contention window mechanism before transmission. When
concatenation is enabled, data packets in the queue of the internal bridge can be
accumulated before the concatenated frame is transmitted to the wireless
medium. Data frames can be accumulated up to a maximum frame size of 2200
bytes for units with HW revision A or B, or 4032 bytes for units with HW revision
C or higher. In the AU, the concatenation process is performed separately for
each destination SU.
NOTE
Using the Link Capability exchange mechanism, each unit learns the HW Revision and the SW
Version of the unit(s) associated with it. A concatenated frame with a length exceeding 2200 bytes
may be generated and transmitted only if both the source and destination units have HW Revision
C or higher. If either the source or destination unit uses SW Version 3.0 or 3.1, then the maximum
size of the concatenated frame is 3400 bytes, and the maximum number of data frames that can be
bundled into a concatenated frame is 2 for units with SW version 3.0 and 8 for units with SW
version 3.1.
A frame is a candidate for bundling into a concatenated frame if all the following
conditions are met:

175
The frame is a data frame
The destination is an entity behind the destination AU/SU.
The destination AU/SU can support the feature (uses SW version 3.0 or
higher).
When a frame is identified as an eligible candidate for concatenation, it is marked

accordingly and will be processed according to the following:
If there is no concatenated frame designated to the same destination unit in

the queue:
If the hardware queue is empty – the frame is transmitted immediately.
Otherwise (the queue is not empty) – the frame is inserted to the queue as
a concatenated frame.
If a concatenated frame designated to the same destination unit exists in the

queue:
If the combined size of both frames is above the maximum allowed

concatenated frame size – both frames are transmitted as two separate
frames.
Otherwise (the combined frames size is below the maximum size) – the
new frame is added to the concatenated frame. If the number of data
frames in the concatenated frame has reached the maximum allowed
(applicable only if the destination unit uses SW version 3.0 or 3.1) – the
concatenated frame will be transmitted to the wireless medium. Otherwise
– the concatenated frame remains in the queue (until the hardware queue
becomes free).
NOTE
When a frame is marked as a candidate for concatenation, it will be transmitted as a concatenated
frame. If it is not bundled with another data frame before transmission, it will be a concatenated
frame with a single data frame (Concatenated Frame Single). If it is bundled with two or more data
frames, it will be a concatenated frame with either double data frames (Concatenated Frame
Double) or more data frames (Concatenated Frame More).
The Concatenation Parameters submenu includes:
4.2.6.5.10.1 Concatenation Option

The Concatenation Option enables or disables the concatenation mechanism.

176
4.2.6.5.10.2 Maximum Concatenated Frame Size

The Maximum Concatenated Frame Size parameter defines the maximum size (in
bytes) for a concatenated frame.
The range is:
1256 to 2200 bytes for units with HW revision A or B
256 to 4032 bytes for units with HW revision C or higher
The Default values are:
2200 for units with HW revision A or B
4032 for units with HW revision C or higher
4.2.6.6 Service Parameters

The Service Parameters menu enables defining user filtering, MIR/CIR
parameters, traffic prioritization parameters and DRAP parameters.
The Service Parameters menu includes the following options:
User Filtering Parameters (SU only)
MIR and CIR Parameters
Traffic Prioritization
DRAP Parameters (AU only)
Wireless Link Prioritization (only AU with a license for the feature)
4.2.6.6.1 User Filtering Parameters (SU only)

The User Filtering Parameters submenu enables defining the IP addresses of user
devices authorized to access the wireless medium for security and/or control
purposes. In addition, it can be used to enable the transmission and reception of
specific protocol frames. These filtering options do not affect management frames
sent to or generated by the unit.
The User Filtering Parameters menu provides the following options:

177
4.2.6.6.1.1 User Filtering Option

The User Filtering Option disables or enables the User Filtering feature. The
following options are available:
Disable - no filtering.
IP Protocol Only - only IP Protocol packets pass.
User Defined Addresses Only - only IP frames from/to IP addresses included

in the User Filter Addresses list pass.
PPPoE Protocol Only - only PPPoE messages pass (Ethernet type 0x8863
and 0x8864).
4.2.6.6.1.2 Set/Change Filter IP Address Range

The Set/Change Filter IP Address Ranges option enables defining/updating up to
8 IP address ranges to/from which IP frames are to pass if the User Defined
Addresses Only option is selected in the User Filtering Option parameter.
The default Filter IP Address Range is 0.0.0.0 TO 0.0.0.0 (all 8 ranges).
A range can be defined using a string that includes either a start and end
address, in the format “<start address> to <end address>” (example: 192.168.1.1
to 192.168.1.255), or a base address and a mask, in the format “<base address>
mask <mask>” (example: 192.168.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0).
4.2.6.6.1.3 Delete Filter IP Address Range

The Delete Filter IP Address Range option enables deleting IP address range
entries from the Filter IP Address Ranges list.
4.2.6.6.1.4 Delete All User Filtering Entries

The Delete All User Filtering Entries option enables deleting all entries from the
Filter IP Address Ranges list.
4.2.6.6.1.5 DHCP Unicast Override Filter

When user filtering is activated, unicast DHCP messages are filtered out;
therefore the unit cannot communicate with the DHCP server. The DHCP Unicast
Override Filter option enables to overcome this problem. When enabled, unicast
DHCP messages pass, overriding the user filtering mechanism.
The default is Disable DHCP Unicast.

178
4.2.6.6.1.6 Show User Filtering Parameters

The Show All User Filtering Parameters option displays the current value of the
User Filtering Option and the list of User Filtering addresses, subnet masks and
ranges.
4.2.6.6.2 MIR and CIR Parameters

The CIR (Committed Information Rate) specifies the minimum data rate
guaranteed to the relevant subscriber. The MIR (Maximum Information Rate)
value specifies the maximum data rate available for burst transmissions,
provided such bandwidth is available.
Under normal conditions, the actual Information Rate (IR) is between the
applicable CIR and MIR values, based on the following formula:
IR=CIR+K(MIR - CIR).
In this formula K is between 0 and 1 and is determined dynamically by the AU

according to overall demand in the cell and the prevailing conditions that
influence the performance of the wireless link. In some situations the minimum
rate (CIR) cannot be provided. This may result from high demand and poor
wireless link conditions and/or high demand in over-subscribed cells. When this
occurs, the actual information rate is lower than the CIR.
The simple solution for managing the information rate in such cases can result in
an unfair allocation of resources, as subscribers with a higher CIR actually
receive an IR lower than the CIR designated for subscribers in a lower CIR
bracket.
A special algorithm for graceful degradation is incorporated into the AU, ensuring
that the degradation of performance for each individual Subscriber Unit is
proportional to its CIR.
The MIR/CIR algorithm uses buffers to control the flow of data. To balance the
performance over time, a special Burst Duration algorithm is employed to enable
higher transmission rates after a period of inactivity. If no data is received from
the Ethernet port during the last N seconds, the unit is allowed to transmit N
times its CIR value without any delay. For example, after a period of inactivity of
0.5 seconds, a unit with CIR = 128 Kbps can transmit up to 128 Kbits x 0.5 =
64 Kbits without any delay.
4.2.6.6.2.1 MIR: Downlink (SU only)

Sets the Maximum Information Rate of the downlink from the AU to the SU. The
MIR value cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value.
Available values range and default value are shown in Table 4-12.
The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128
(N*128).

179
4.2.6.6.2.2 MIR: Uplink (SU only)

Sets the Maximum Information Rate of the up-link from the SU to the AU. The
MIR value cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value.
(N*128).
4.2.6.6.2.3 CIR: Downlink (SU only)

Sets the Committed Information Rate of the downlink from the AU to the SU. The
CIR value cannot be higher than the corresponding MIR value.
(N*128).
4.2.6.6.2.4 CIR: Uplink (SU only)

Sets the Committed Information Rate of the uplink from the SU to the AU. The
CIR value cannot be higher than the corresponding MIR value.
(N*128).
Table 4-12: MIR Ranges and Defaults
MIR Uplink MIR Downlink
Unit Range (Kbps) Default (Kbps) Range (Kbps) Default (Kbps)

Type
SU-3 128-2,048 2,048 128-3,072 3,072
SU-6 128-4,096 4,096 128-6,016 6,016
SU-54 128-53,888 32,896 128-53,888 32,896
SU-I 128-2,048 2,048 128-6,016 6,016

180
Table 4-13: CIR Ranges and Defaults
CIR Uplink CIR Downlink
Unit Range (Kbps) Default (Kbps) Range (Kbps) Default (Kbps)

Type
SU-3 0-2,048 0 0-2,048 0
SU-6 0-4,096 0 0-4,096 0
SU-54 0-45,056 0 0-45,056 0
SU-I 0-2,048 0 0-6,016 0
4.2.6.6.2.5 Maximum Burst Duration (SU and AU)

Sets the maximum time for accumulating burst transmission rights according to
the Burst Duration algorithm.
Available values range from 0 to 2000 (milliseconds).
The default value is 5 (milliseconds), enabling a maximum burst of (0.005 X CIR)

Kbps after a period of inactivity of 5 milliseconds or more.
4.2.6.6.2.6 Maximum Delay (SU only)

Sets the maximum permitted delay in the buffers system. As certain applications
are very sensitive to delay, if relatively high delays are permitted, these
applications may suffer from poor performance due to data accumulation in the
buffers from other applications, such as FTP. The Maximum Delay parameter
limits the number of available buffers. Data that is delayed more than the
permitted maximum delay is discarded. If the SU supports applications that are
very sensitive to delay, the value of the Maximum Delay should be decreased.
Valid values range from 300 to 10000 (milliseconds).
The default value is 5000 (milliseconds).
4.2.6.6.2.7 Graceful Degradation Limit (AU only)

Sets the limit on using the graceful degradation algorithm. In cases of over
demand, the performance of all SUs is degraded proportionally to their CIR
(IR=(100%-k%) x CIR). The graceful degradation algorithm is used as long as
k ≤ K, where K is the Graceful Degradation Limit. Beyond this point the simple
“brute force” algorithm is used. The Graceful Degradation Limit should be raised
in proportion to the demand in the cell. The higher the expected demand in a cell,
the higher the value of the Graceful Degradation Limit. Higher demand can be
expected in cases of significant over subscription and/or in deployments where a
high number of subscribers are in locations without proper communication with
the AU at the highest data rate.

181
The available values range from 0 to 70 (%).
The default value is 70 (%).
4.2.6.6.2.8 MIR Only Option (AU only)

When the MIR Only Option is enabled, it forces the MIR/CIR algorithm to use
MIR values only. The MIR/CIR algorithm determines the actual information rate
for each of the supported SUs under changing conditions of demand, based on
the configured CIR and MIR values. When the MIR Only Option is enabled, the
MIR/CIR algorithm is overridden and forced to operate with MIR values only. For
example, the AU attempts to enable all SUs to transmit/receive information at the
specified MIR value. When enabled, the graceful degradation algorithm, which is
a part of the CIR/MIR algorithm, is also disabled.
4.2.6.6.2.9 Show MIR/CIR Parameters

Displays the current values of the MIR and CIR parameters.
4.2.6.6.3 Traffic Prioritization

Each packet that is received from the Ethernet port is placed in either the High or
Low queue, according to the Traffic Prioritization parameters. When the MIR/CIR
mechanism decides that a packet must be sent, the High priority queue will be
checked first. If the High priority queue is not empty, the first element in the
queue is forwarded to the MIR/CIR mechanism. Packets from the Low priority
queue will be forwarded only if the High queue is empty.
The prioritization of the packets is done using different classifiers:
VLAN Priority
ToS Priority: IP Precedence or DSCP
UDP and/or TCP ports
Each one of these classifiers can be activated/deactivated. If more than one

classifier is activated, the priority of each packet will be determined by the
highest priority given to it by the active classifiers.
The Traffic Prioritization menu enables activating/deactivating each of these

classifiers, and configuring the applicable parameters for each classifier.
The Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent parameter can be used to prevent
starvation of low priority traffic by ensuring that a certain number of low priority
packets is transmitted even at the expense of high priority traffic.

182
In addition, the Wireless Link Prioritization, which is a licensable feature, enables

to configure parameters that affect the prioritization of traffic in the wireless link
for packets with high/low priority from different units.
4.2.6.6.3.1 VLAN Priority Threshold

The VLAN Priority Threshold is applicable for Trunk and Hybrid Links only. It
enables defining the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold. If the VLAN Priority
field in a tagged frame is higher than the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold
parameter, the packet will be routed to the High queue. If the VLAN Priority field
is lower than or equal to this value, the packet will be transferred to the Low
queue (unless it is assigned a High priority by another classifier).
The default value is 7, which means that all packets get a low priority (equivalent
to disabling the VLAN-based classifier).
4.2.6.6.3.2 ToS Prioritization

The ToS Prioritization parameters enable defining prioritization in accordance
with either the 3 IP Precedence bits in the IP header in accordance with RFC 791,
or the 6 DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) bits in accordance with RFC
2474. The ToS Prioritization menu includes the following parameters:
4.2.6.6.3.2.1 ToS Prioritization Option

The ToS Prioritization Option defines whether ToS-based prioritization is enabled
or disabled. The following options are available:
Disable
Enable IP Precedence (RFC791) Prioritization
Enable DSCP (RFC2474) Prioritization
4.2.6.6.3.2.2 IP Precedence Threshold

The IP Precedence Threshold parameter is applicable when the ToS Prioritization
Option is set to Enable IP Precedence (RFC791) Prioritization. If the value of the 3
IP Precedence bits in the IP header is higher than this threshold, the packet is
routed to the High queue. If the value is lower than or equal to this threshold, the
packet will be transferred to the Low queue (unless it is assigned a High priority
by another classifier).

183
4.2.6.6.3.2.3 DSCP Threshold

The DSCP Threshold parameter is applicable when the ToS Prioritization Option
is set to Enable DSCP (RFC2474) Prioritization. If the value of the 6 DSCP bits in
the IP header is higher than this threshold, the packet is routed to the High
queue. If the value is lower than or equal to this threshold, the packet will be
routed to the Low queue (unless it is assigned a High priority by another
classifier).
4.2.6.6.3.3 UDP/TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization

The UDP/TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization parameters enable defining
prioritization in accordance with the UDP and/or TCP destination port ranges.
The UDP/TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization menu includes the following
parameters:
4.2.6.6.3.3.1 UDP/TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option

The UDP/TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option defines whether port ranges
based prioritization is enabled or disabled. The following options are available:
Disable
Enable Only for UDP
Enable Only for TCP
Enable for both UDP and TCP
4.2.6.6.3.3.2 UDP Port Ranges

The UDP Port Ranges menu enables defining port ranges to be used as priority
classifiers when the UDP/TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option is set to either
Enable Only for UDP or Enable for both UDP and TCP. All packets whose
destination is included in the list will be routed to the High queue. All other
packets will be routed to the Low queue (unless they were assigned a High
priority by another classifier).
The UDP Port Ranges menu includes the following options:
UDP RTP/RTCP Prioritization: Voice over IP is transported using Real Time

Protocol (RTP). The Real Time Control Protocol (RTCP) is used to control the
RTP. When an application uses RTP/RTCP, it chooses for destination ports

184
consecutive numbers: RTP port is always an even number, and the port with
the odd number following it will be assigned to RTCP.
If the administrator selects to prioritize only the RTP packets, then all the
packets with an odd numbered destination port will always have Low priority.
The packets with an even number for destination port will receive High
priority, if the port number is included in the specified ranges.
If the administrator selects to prioritize both RTP and RTCP packets, then all
packets whose destination port number is included is in the specified ranges
will receive High priority.
RTP & RTCP
RTP Only
The default is RTP & RTCP
Add UDP Port Ranges: This option enables adding UDP port ranges to the list
of priority port numbers. The list can include up to 64 ranges. It is possible to
add discrete port numbers and/or ranges. In ranges, a hyphen is used to
separate between start and end port numbers. A comma is used to separate
between entries.
For example: 8900,9000-9005,9010,9016-9017.
Delete UDP Port Ranges: This option enables deleting UDP port ranges from
the list of priority port numbers. It is possible to delete discrete port numbers
and/or ranges. In ranges, a hyphen is used to separate between start and end
port numbers. A comma is used to separate between entries.
For example: 8900,9000-9005,9010,9016-9017.
Delete All UDP Port Ranges: This option enables deleting all UDP port
ranges from the list of priority port numbers.
Show UDP Port Ranges: Select this option to view the current UDP
RTP/RTCP Prioritization option and the list of UDP Port Ranges.
4.2.6.6.3.3.3 TCP Port Ranges

The TCP Port Ranges menu enables defining port ranges to be used as priority
classifiers when the UDP/TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option is set to either
Enable Only for TCP or Enable for both UDP and TCP. All packets whose

185
destination is included in the list will be routed to the High queue. All other
packets will be routed to the Low queue (unless they were assigned a High
priority by another classifier).
The TCP Port Ranges menu includes the following options:
TCP RTP/RTCP Prioritization: Voice over IP is transported using Real Time

Protocol (RTP). The Real Time Control Protocol (RTCP) is used to control the
RTP. When an application uses RTP/RTCP, it chooses for destination ports
consecutive numbers: RTP port is always an even number, and the port with
the odd number following it will be assigned to RTCP.
If the administrator selects to prioritize only the RTP packets, then all the
packets with an odd numbered destination port will always have Low priority.
The packets with an even number for destination port will receive High
priority, if the port number is included in the specified ranges.
If the administrator selects to prioritize both RTP and RTCP packets, then all
packets whose destination port number is included in the specified ranges will
receive High priority.
RTP & RTCP
RTP Only
The default is RTP & RTCP
Add TCP Port Ranges: This option enables adding TCP port ranges to the list
of priority port numbers. The list can include up to 64 ranges. It is possible to
add discrete port numbers and/or ranges. In ranges, a hyphen is used to
separate between start and end port numbers. A comma is used to separate
between entries. For example: 8900,9000-9005,9010,9016-9017.
Delete TCP Port Ranges: This option enables deleting TCP port ranges from
the list of priority port numbers. It is possible to delete discrete port numbers
and/or ranges. In ranges, a hyphen is used to separate between start and end
port numbers. A comma is used to separate between entries.
For example: 8900,9000-9005,9010,9016-9017.
Delete All TCP Port Ranges: This option enables deleting all TCP port ranges
from the list of priority port numbers.

186
Show TCP Port Ranges: Select this option to view the current TCP
RTP/RTCP Prioritization option and the list of TCP Port Ranges.
4.2.6.6.3.4 Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent

This feature ensures that a certain amount of low priority packets, specified by
the Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent (LPTMP) parameter, is transmitted even
at the expense of high priority traffic.
The mechanism guarantees a low priority traffic with a rate of LPTMP * RT /100,
where RT symbolizes the allowed traffic rate. The high priority traffic will thus not
be able to exceed (100-LPTMP) * RT/100. If the system receives high priority
traffic at a rate higher than this figure, some high priority packets will be
discarded.
The range is between 0 and 100 (%).
The default value is 0 (%).
4.2.6.6.3.5 Wireless Link Prioritization Parameters (AU)

To better support delay-sensitive and other high-priority traffic, a set of Wireless
Link Prioritization parameters enables configuring parameters that affect the
processes of gaining access to the wireless media and of transmitting high/low
priority packets.
The Wireless Link Prioritization feature is a licensed feature and is available only
in units with the suitable Feature License.
The time interval between two consecutive transmissions of frames is called Inter-
Frame Spacing (IFS). This is the time during which the unit determines whether
the medium is idle using the carrier sense mechanism. The IFS depends on the
type of the next frame to be transmitted, as follows:
SIFS (Short Inter-Frame Spacing) is used for certain frames that should be
transmitted immediately, such as ACK and CTS frames. The value of SIFS is
16 microseconds.
DIFS (Distributed coordination function Inter-Frame Spacing) is typically

used for other frame types when the medium is free. If the unit decides that
the medium is not free, it will defer transmission by DIFS plus a number of
time slots as determined by the Contention Window back-off algorithm after
reaching a decision that the medium has become free. DIFS equal SIFS plus
AIFS, where AIFS is a configurable number of time slots.
Under regular conditions, AIFS is configured to two time slots. To support

prioritization in the wireless link, we can configure a higher AIFS for low priority
traffic (AIFS of two time slots will always be used for high priority traffic as well as
AU’s transmissions of broadcasts/multicasts and beacons). This will give

187
advantage to units that need to transmit high priority traffic (depending also on
the configured values for the Contention Window parameters).
Other parameters related to transmission to the wireless media that can be

configured separately for high/low priority packets are the Number of HW Retries
and Burst Duration.
Typically, a lower value of Number of HW Retries should be configured for traffic

such as VoIP, which on the one hand is sensitive to delays and on the other hand
is less sensitive to missing packets than data traffic.
The Burst Duration, which defines the maximum duration of a burst, should be
set to a lower value for delay sensitive traffic. Typically the Burst Duration of the
AU should be set to higher value than that of the SUs, because of the higher
number of packets that should be transmitted by the AU.
When the Wireless Link Prioritization feature is enabled, the following parameters
are not applicable:
Arbitration Inter-Frame Spacing (AIFS)
Number of HW Retries
Burst Mode Option
Burst Mode Time Interval
When an SU with a SW version below 4.0 tries to associate with an AU that has
the Wireless Link Prioritization feature enable, the AU will generate a trap that
will include information about this SU. In this way the system administrator can
be alerted that the SU should be upgraded. This is necessary because otherwise
an SU that does not support the Wireless Link Prioritization feature will send all
the traffic as high priority.
CAUTION
Verify that all SUs served by an AU with the Wireless Link Prioritization Option enabled use a SW
version that supports this feature (SW version 4.0 and higher). Otherwise, overall performance and
quality of service in the cell may be reduced since all data from an SU with SW version below 4.0
will be sent with high priority.
The Wireless Link Prioritization Parameters menu includes the following:
4.2.6.6.3.5.1 Wireless Link Prioritization Option

The Wireless Link Prioritization Option enables or disables the Wireless Link
Prioritization feature.
The default option is Disable.

188
4.2.6.6.3.5.2 Low Priority AIFS

The Low Priority AIFS defines the AIFS number of time slots that will be used by
the AU and the SUs served by it for low priority traffic.
The range is from 3 to 254 (time slots).
The default is 3.
4.2.6.6.3.5.3 Number of HW Retries for High Priority Traffic

The Number of HW Retries for High Priority Traffic defines the maximum number
of times that an unacknowledged high priority unicast packet can be
retransmitted. This is the value that will be used by the AU and by the SUs
served with it.
The range is from 1 to 14 times.
The default is 10 times.
4.2.6.6.3.5.4 Number of HW Retries for Low Priority Traffic

The Number of HW Retries for Low Priority Traffic defines the maximum number
of times that an unacknowledged low priority unicast packet can be
retransmitted. This is the value that will be used by the AU and by the SUs
served with it.
The range is from 1 to 14 times.
The default is 10 times.
4.2.6.6.3.5.5 AU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic

The AU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic parameter defines the maximum
duration of a burst that can be made by the AU for high priority packets.
The measurement unit is 250 microseconds and the range is from 1 to 40 (0.25
to 10 milliseconds) or 0 to disable bursts for high priority packets.
The default is 16 (4 milliseconds).
4.2.6.6.3.5.6 AU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic

The AU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic parameter defines the maximum
duration of a burst that can be made by the AU for low priority packets.
to 10 milliseconds) or 0 to disable bursts for low priority packets.

189
4.2.6.6.3.5.7 SU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic

The SU Burst Duration for Ligh Priority Traffic parameter defines the maximum
duration of a burst that can be made by the SUs served by the AU for high
priority packets.
to 10 milliseconds) or 0 to disable bursts for high priority packets.
4.2.6.6.3.5.8 SU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic

The SU Burst Duration for Ligh Priority Traffic parameter defines the maximum
duration of a burst that can be made by the SUs served by the AU for low priority
packets.
to 10 milliseconds) or 0 to disable bursts for low priority packets.
4.2.6.6.4 DRAP Parameters (AU only)

DRAP (Dynamic Resources Allocation Protocol is a protocol that can be used by
the AU to communicate with Voice and Networking Gateways connected to SUs
served by it, enabling identification of these Gateways. It also enables managing
voice calls made by Voice Gateways (VG).
The AU keeps track of all current voice calls and, upon receiving from a VG a
request for a new call, compares the current number of calls to the maximum
allowed number. If the maximum allowed number has been reached, the AU will
not confirm the request.
The DRAP feature is applicable only for gateways that support DRAP.
The following is a description of DRAP-related parameters:
4.2.6.6.4.1 DRAP Support

The DRAP Support option enables or disables the DRAP feature that offers the
possibility of identifying the connected Gateways and limiting the maximum
number of voice calls made by Voice Gateways in a cell.
The default option is Enable.
4.2.6.6.4.2 UDP Port

The UDP Port parameter defines the UDP port used by the DRAP protocol.
The range is from 8000 to 8200.

190
4.2.6.6.4.3 Maximum Number of Voice Calls

The Maximum Number of Voice Calls parameter sets the maximum number of
active calls in the cell.
The range is between 0 and 255.
4.2.6.6.4.4 DRAP TTL

The DRAP TTL parameter sets the time between two consecutive Allocation
Requests from the Gateways. The Allocation requests are used to identify the
existence of an active Gateway. In Voice Gateways they also include information
about the current number of voice calls and requests for new calls.
The range is between 1 and 255 (seconds).
The default value is 10 (seconds).
4.2.6.6.4.5 Number of Active Voice Calls

This option shows the current number of active voice calls in the cell.
4.2.6.6.5 Show Service Parameters

Displays the current values of the Service Parameters.
4.2.6.7 Security Parameters

BreezeACCESS VL systems can support encryption of authentication messages
and/or data frames using one of the following encryption standards:
WEP Wireless Equivalent Privacy algorithm. WEP is defined in the IEEE

802.11 Wireless LAN standard and is based on the RSA’s RC4 encryption
algorithm.
AES OCB Advanced Encryption Standard. AES is defined by the National

Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) and is based on Rijndael block
cipher. AES OCB (Offset Code Book) is a mode that operates by augmenting
the normal encryption process by incorporating an offset value.
FIPS 197 is certified for compliance with Federal Information Processing

Standards. It provides encryption and message integrity in one solution and
implements the Advanced Encryption Standard using Rijndael block cipher.
NOTE
The FIPS 197 encryption algorithm is a licensed feature, and is available only in units with the
required license. FIPS 197 can be supported only in Access Units with HW revision C or higher.
FIPS 197 feature license is not available for AUS unit.

191
The following parameters are available through the Security Parameters menu (in
certain units some or all of the security options may not be available):
Authentication Algorithm
Data Encryption Option
Security Mode
Default Key (SU only)
Default Multicast Key (AU only)
Key # 1 to Key # 4
Promiscuous Authentication (AU only)
4.2.6.7.1 Authentication Algorithm

The Authentication Algorithm option determines the operation mode of the
selected unit. The following two options are available:
Open System: An SU configured to Open System can only associate with an

AU also configured to Open System. In this case, the authentication
encryption algorithm is not used.
Shared Key: The authentication messages are encrypted. An SU configured to

use a Shared Key can only be authenticated by an AU configured to use a
Shared Key, provided the applicable Key (which means both the key number
and its content) in the AU is identical to the key selected as the Default Key in
the SU.
The default is Open System.
NOTE
The Shared Key option cannot be selected before at least one Key is defined. In the SU, a Default
Key that refers to a valid Key must be selected.
The AU and all the SUs it serves should be configured to the same Authentication Algorithm option.
Mixed operation is not supported.
4.2.6.7.2 Data Encryption Option

The Data Encryption Option allows enabling or disabling data encryption. When
enabled, all data frames, including frames using management protocols such as
Telnet, FTP, TFTP, SNMP, DHCP and ICMP, are encrypted.

192
NOTE
The AU and all the SUs it serves should be configured to the same Data Encryption Option.
Mixed operation is not supported.
An SU with Data Encryption Option enabled can accept non-encrypted data frames.
When the Data Encryption Option is enabled, the maximum number of SUs that can associate
with the AU is limited to 124. The Maximum Number of Associations Limit is indicated in the
Show Air Interface Parameters display.
4.2.6.7.3 Security Mode

The Security Mode option enables selecting the algorithm to be used for
encrypting the authentication messages and/or data frames.
The available options are WEP, AES OCB and FIPS 197 (if available).
The default is WEP.
4.2.6.7.4 Default Key (SU only)

The Default Key defines the Key to be used for encrypting/decrypting the
authentication messages (Shared Key mode) and/or data frames (Data
Encryption enabled). The AU learns the Default Key from the SU provided it is
one of the Keys defined in the AU. The AU may use different keys when
authenticating and/or communicating with different SUs.
Available values range from 1 to 4.
The default is KEY # 1.
4.2.6.7.5 Default Multicast Key (AU only)

The Multicast Default Key defines the Key to be used for encrypting/decrypting
multicasts and broadcasts when Data Encryption is enabled.
Available values range from 1 to 4.
The default is KEY # 1.
4.2.6.7.6 Key # 1 to Key # 4

The Key # options enables defining the encryption key to be used for initializing
the pseudo-random number generator that forms part of the
encryption/decryption process. The Keys must be set before the Shared Key
authentication algorithm or Data Encryption can be used. To support proper
operation, both the Key # and the content must be identical at both sides of a
wireless link.
Each Key is a string of 32 hexadecimal numbers. For security reasons, it is a

“write only” parameter, displayed as a string of asterisks (“*”).
The default for all 4 Keys is 000…0 (a string of 32 zeros), which means no key.

193
4.2.6.7.7 Promiscuous Authentication (AU only)

The Promiscuous Authentication mode enables new SUs to join an active cell
where Shared Key operation and/or Data Encryption are used, even if this SU
does not have the correct security parameters. In promiscuous mode, all
downlink transmissions (from AU to SUs) are not encrypted, allowing remote
configuration of security parameters, regardless of the current settings in the SUs
of the parameters related to data encryption. After a new SU joins the cell it
should be remotely configured with the proper parameters (or upgraded). When
the SU is configured properly, the Promiscuous Mode should be disabled.
NOTE
Do not leave the AU in the enabled Promiscuous Authentication mode for prolonged periods. Use it
only when absolutely necessary, perform the required actions as quickly as possible and disable it.
The unit will return automatically to Promiscuous Authentication disabled mode after reset.

194
A
Appendix A - Software Version Loading
Using TFTP
Appendix A - Software Version Loading Using TFTP
Firmware upgrades to the unit's FLASH memory can be performed by a simple

loading procedure using a TFTP application. Before performing an upgrade
procedure, be sure you have the correct files and most recent instructions.
Upgrade packages can be obtained from the Technical Support section of

Alvarion's web site, http://www.alvarion.com/.
CAUTION
Shutting down power to the unit before completion of the loading procedure may cause the unit to
be inoperable.
To load software versions:
1 Verify that IP connectivity to the required unit is established.
2 Ensure that the IP address of the PC from which the upgrade is to be

performed belongs to the same subnet as the unit to be upgraded, unless the
unit is behind a router. If the unit is behind a router, verify that the unit is
configured with the correct Default Gateway Address.
3 To view the current IP parameters of the unit, use the Monitor program by
connecting the PC to the unit either directly or via Telnet. To access the IP
parameters via the Monitor program:
a From the Main Menu select 1 - Info Screens.
b From the Info Screen menu select 2 - Show Basic Configuration. The
current basic configuration is displayed, including the run time values for
the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway Address parameters.
4 To modify any of the IP parameters:
a From the Main Menu, select 3 - Basic Configuration.
b To configure the IP address, select: 1 - IP Address.
c To configure the subnet mask, select 2 - Subnet Mask.
d To configure the default gateway address, select 3 - Default Gateway

Address.
5 To verify the connection, PING the unit's IP address and verify that PING
replies are being received.
6 Use the TFTP utility, with the following syntax, to perform the upgrade:
tftp -i hostaddress put sourcefile [destinationfile]
where -i is for binary mode and hostaddress is the IP address of the unit to be
upgraded. put causes the PC client to send a file to the hostaddress.

196
Software Version Loading Using TFTP
7 The original sourcefile name of SW files is in the structure uX_Y_Z.bz, where u

is the unit type (a for AU, s for SU) and X.Y.Z is the version number.
8 destinationfile is the name of the file to be loaded. Use the SNMP write
community <SnmpWriteCommunity>.bz to define the destination filename.
The default SNMP write community is private. For example, to load the
upgrade file a4_0_13.bz to an AU whose IP address is 206.25.63.65: tftp -i
206.25.63.65 put a4_0_13.bz private.bz
9 When the loading is complete, the following message is displayed, indicating

completion of the TFTP process:
Download operation has been completed successfully
10 The unit decompresses the loaded file and checks the integrity of the new
version. The new version replaces the previous shadow version only after
verification. If verification tests fail, the loaded version will be rejected. Among
other things that are tested, the unit will reject a file if either the file name or
the version number matches the current Main versions. The unit will also
reject a file designated for a different unit type, e.g. an AU upgrade file with
the prefix a in the original file name will not be accepted by SUs.
11 The FLASH memory can store two software versions. One version is called
Current and the second version is called Shadow. The new version is loaded
into the Shadow (backup) FLASH memory. To check that the new firmware
was properly downloaded and verified, view the firmware versions stored in
the FLASH, as follows:
a From the Main Menu, select 2 - Unit Control.
b From the Unit Control menu, select 5 - Flash Memory Control.
c From the Flash Memory Control menu, select S - Show Flash Versions.
The following information is displayed:
Flash Versions
============
Running from :Main Version
Main Version File Name :3.1.25
Main Version Number :3.1.25
Shadow Version File Name :4.0.27.bz
Shadow Version Number :4.0.27

197
B
Appendix B - File Download and Upload
Using TFTP
Appendix B - File Download and Upload Using TFTP
The File Download/Upload feature simplifies the task of remotely configuring a

large number of units using TFTP protocol. By downloading the configuration file
to a PC it is possible to view all the parameters configured for the unit, as a plain
ASCII text file. It is necessary to edit the file using a simple editor and remove
certain parameters or change their values prior to uploading the configuration to
another unit. The file loading procedure can also be used for uploading a feature
license file or an updated country code file to multiple units.
When multiple configurations are being done simultaneously, that is, the file is
being uploaded to several units, it is recommended that the file will include only
the required parameters.
In the configuration file, the following three fields represent each parameter:
1 A symbolic string similar to the name of the parameter in the Monitor

program, followed by "=".
2 The value of the parameters, which uses the same values as the Monitor
program.
3 An optional comment. If used, the comment should start with a ";" character.
An unknown parameter will be ignored. A known parameter with a value that is

invalid or out of range will be set by the unit to its default value.
Use the SNMP write community string (the default is “private”) to define both the
uploaded file (put) and the downloaded file (get). The file should be transferred in
ASCII mode.
Use the extension cfg for a configuration file.
Use the extension cmr for the Operator Defaults file.
Use the extension fln for a Feature License file.
Use the extension ccf for a Country Code file.
Feature license and country code files include multiple strings, where each string
is applicable only for a certain unit identified by its MAC address. When
uploading a feature license or a country code file to multiple units, each unit will
accept only the parts that are applicable for itself.

200
File Download and Upload Using TFTP
Examples:
1 To upload the configuration file using a DOS based TFTP Client to an SU

whose IP address is 206.25.63.65, enter:
tftp 206.25.63.65 put Suconf private.cfg
2 To download the Operator Defaults file from the same unit, enter:
tftp 206.25.63.65 get private.cmr Suconf
3 To upload the Feature Upgrade file to the same unit, enter:

tftp 206.25.63.65 put Suconf private.fln
4 To upload the Country Code file from to same unit, enter:

tftp 206.25.63.65 put Suconf private.ccf
NOTE
The Configuration File mechanism is common to BreezeACCESS VL and BreezeNET B product
lines. The Configuration File includes also parameters that are applicable only to BreezeNET B
products. Do not attempt to change the default values of these parameters.

201
C
Appendix C - Using the Set Factory
Defaults Utility
Appendix C - Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility
The Set Factory Defaults utility is intended to enable management access to a

unit in cases where such access is not possible due to wrong or unknown
configuration of certain parameters. This includes cases such as unknown
Management VLAN ID and wrong management access filtering.
The utility accesses the unit by sending a special packet. Access to the unit is
based on its MAC address, which must be entered in the Unit MAC address field.
The set unit defaults feature is only available via the Ethernet port.
To set factory defaults:
1 Connect the PC with the Set Factory Defaults utility to the Ethernet port of
the unit.
2 Enter the unit’s MAC address.
3 Click on the Set button.
This utility performs the same operation as Set Complete Factory Defaults,
restoring the default factory configuration of all parameters, except to Passwords,
general FTP parameters and AU’s Frequency.

204
D
Appendix D - Preparing the Indoor to
Outdoor SU Cable
Appendix D - Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable
The Indoor-to-Outdoor cable provides pin-to-pin connection on both ends.
Figure 4-2 shows the wire pair connections required for the Indoor-to-Outdoor
cable.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4+5
1+2 7+8
3+6
Figure 4-2: Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments
The color codes used in cables that are supplied with crimped connectors are as
listed in the following table:
Cable Color Codes
Wire color Pin

Blue 1
Blue/white 2
Orange 3
Orange/white 6
Brown 4
Brown/white 5
Green 7
Green/white 8

206
Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable
Use a crimp tool for RJ-45 connectors to prepare the wires, insert them into the
appropriate pins and use the crimp tool to crimp the connector. Make sure to do
the following:
1 Remove as small a length as possible of the external jacket. Verify that the
external jacket is well inside the service box to ensure good sealing.
2 Take back the shield drain wire before inserting the cable into the RJ-45
connector, to ensure a good connection with the connector's shield after
crimping.

207
E
Appendix E - BreezeACCES VL MIB
In This Appendix:
BreezeACCESS VL agents support the following MIBs:
MIB II (RFC1213)
BRIDGE MIB (RFC1286)
BreezeACCESS VL Private MIB (breezeAccessVLMib)
The following are described in this Appendix:
System Object Identifiers, page 210
breezeAccessVLMib, page 212
Supported Traps, page 260
NOTE
The BreezeAccessVLMib is used for both BreezeACCESS VL (AU, SU) and BreezeNET B (BU,
RB) product lines. Some of the parameters are only applicable to one of the product lines.
E.1 System Object Identifiers
Object Path
alvarion OID =1.3.6.1.4.1.12394 {(iso(1) org(3) dod(6) internet(1)
private(4) enterprises(1) alvarion (12394)}
products OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.1 {alvarion 1}
breezeAccessVLMib OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.1.1 {products 1}
alvarionbwaOID OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4 {alvarion 4}
brzAccessVLOID OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1 {alvarionOID 1}
brzAccessVLAU OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.1 {brzAccessVLOID 1}
brzAccessVLSU OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.2 {brzAccessVLOID 2}
brzAccessVLAU-BS OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.4 {brzAccessVLOID 4}
brzAccessVLAU-SA OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.5 {brzAccessVLOID 5}
brzAccessVLAUS-BS OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.6 {brzAccessVLOID 6}
brzAccessVLAUS-SA OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.7 {brzAccessVLOID 7}
brzAccessVLSU-6-1D OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.11 {brzAccessVLOID 11}
brzAccessVLSU-6-BD OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.12 {brzAccessVLOID 12}
brzAccessVLSU-BD OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.14 {brzAccessVLOID 14}
brzAccessVLSU-I OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.17 {brzAccessVLOID 18}
brzNetB-BU-B14 OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.21 {brzAccessVLOID 21}
brzNetB-RB-B14 OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.31 {brzAccessVLOID 31}
brzAccess4900-AU-BS OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.41 {brzAccessVLOID 41}

210
System Object Identifiers
Object Path
brzAccess4900-AU-SA OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.42 {brzAccessVLOID 42}
brzAccess4900-SU-BD OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.51 {brzAccessVLOID 51}
brzAccessVLProducts OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.3 {brzAccessVLOID 3}

211
E.2 breezeAccessVLMib
OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.1.1
NOTE
An * is used instead of the brzaccVL prefix.
E.2.1 System Information Parameters
MIB Parameter Description Value/Range

*SysInfo System Information
(breezeAccessVLMib 1) Parameters
*UnitHwVersion Applicable to all units. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
(*SysInfo 1) Read-only: Hardware
platform version.
*RunningSoftwareVersion Applicable to all units. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
(*SysInfo 2) Read-only: Running
software version.
*RunningFrom Applicable to all units. Integer
(*SysInfo 3) Read-only: The memory mainVersion (1)
(main or shadow) from shadowVersion (2)
which the current version
is running from.
*MainVersionNumber Applicable to all units. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
(*SysInfo 4) Read only: Main software
version number.
*MainVersionFileName Applicable to all units. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
(*SysInfo 5) Read-only: Main software
version file name.
*ShadowVersionNumber Applicable to all units. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
(*SysInfo 6) Read-only: Shadow
software version number.
*ShadowVersionFileName Applicable to all units. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
(*SysInfo 7) Read-only: Shadow
software version file name.
*UnitMacAddress Applicable to all units. MAC address
(*SysInfo 8) Read-only: Unit hardware
MAC address.

212
breezeAccessVLMib

*UnitType Applicable to all units. Integer
(*SysInfo 9) Read-only: Unit type. auBS (1)
auSA (2)
su-6-BD (3)
su-24-BD (4)
su-6-1D (5)
bu-B14 (6)
bu-B28 (7)
rb-B14 (8)
rb-B28 (9)
su-BD (10)
su-54-BD (11)
su-3-1D (12)
su-3-4D (13)
ausBS (14)
ausSA (15)
auBS4900 (16)
auSA4900 (17)
suBD4900 (18)
bu-B100 (19)
rb-B100 (20)
su-I (21)
*AssociatedAU Applicable to SU/RB. MAC address
(*SysInfo 10) Read-only: Associated
AU/BU MAC address.
*NumOfAssociationsSinceLastReset Applicable to all units. Integer
(*SysInfo 11) Read-only: The number of
associations since last
reset, including duplicate
associations (re-
associations).
*CurrentNumOfAssociations Applicable to AU only. Not Integer
(*SysInfo 13) applicable to BreezeNET B na (65535)
products. Read-only. The
number of subscriber units
currently associated with
the AU.
*UnitBootVersion Applicable to all units. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
(*SysInfo 14) Read-only: The Boot
software version.
*RadioBand Applicable to all units. Integer
(*SysInfo 15) Read-only: The radio band band-5-8GHz (1)
of the unit. band-5-4GHz (2)
band-4-9GHz (3)
band-5-2GHz (4)
band-2-4GHz (5)
band-5-3GHz (6)
band-4-9GHzJapan (7)
*CurrentEthernetPortState Applicable to all units. Integer
(*SysInfo 16) Read-only. The current HalfDuplexAnd10Mbps (1)
state of the Ethernet port. FullDuplexAnd10Mbps (2)
HalfDuplexAnd100Mbps 3)
FullDuplexAnd100Mbps (4)
linkDown (5)
*TimeSinceLastReset Applicable to all units. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
(*SysInfo 17) Read-only. The elapsed
time since last reset.
*CountryDependentParameters Country Dependent
(*SysInfo 18) Parameters

213

*CountryCode Applicable to all units. DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
(*CountryDependentParameters 1) Read only. The country
code and country or
country group name that is
supported by the unit
*CountryDependentParamsTable Applicable to all units. Not
(*CountryDependentParameters 2) accessible. A table of
country dependent
parameters.
*CountryDependentParameterEntry Applicable to all units. Not
(*CountryDependentParamsTable 1) accessible. An entry in the
country dependent
parameters table.
*CountryDependentParameterTableIdx Applicable to all units. Integer
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 1) Read only. The sub-band
ID of the entry in the
Country Dependent
Parameters table. Serves
also as index for the table
entry.
*CountryDependentParameterFrequencies Applicable to all units. DisplayString
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 2) Read only. The
frequencies included in the
applicable sub-band entry.
*AllowedBandwidth Applicable to all units. Integer
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 3) Read only. The bandwidth
when using the applicable
the sub-band.
*RegulationMaxTxPowerAtAntennaPort Applicable to all units. Integer
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 4) Read only. The maximum
allowed Tx power at the
antenna port when using
the applicable sub-band.
*RegulationMaxEIRP Applicable to all units. Integer
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 5) Read only. The maximum A Regulation Max EIRP of
allowed EIRP when using 100 means no limit.
the applicable sub-band.
*MinModulationLevel Applicable to all units. Integer
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 6) Read only. The minimum level1 (1)
supported modulation level2 (2)
level. level3 (3)
level4 (4)
level5 (5)
level6 (6)
level7 (7)
level8 (8)
*MaxModulationLevel Applicable to all units. Integer
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 7) Read only. The maximum level1 (1)
supported modulation level2 (2)
level. level3 (3)
level4 (4)
level5 (5)
level6 (6)
level7 (7)
level8 (8)
*BurstModeSupport Applicable to all units. Integer
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 8) Read only. The supported supported (1)
Burst Mode Option. notSupported (2)

214
breezeAccessVLMib

*MaximumBurstDuration Applicable to all units. Integer
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 9) Read only. Applicable only
if Burst Mode Option is
supported. The maximum
supported burst duration.
*DfsSupport Applicable to AU/BU only. Integer
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 10) Read only. The supported supported (1)
DFS Option. notSupported (2)
*MinimumHwRevision Applicable to all units. Integer
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 11) Read only. The Minimum hwRevisionA (1),
HW Revision needed to hwRevisionB (2),
support the Sub-Band. hwRevisionC (3),
hwRevisionD (4),
hwRevisionE (5),
na (255)
*AuthenticationEncryptionSupport Applicable to all units. Integer
(CountryDependentParameters 3) Read only. The supported supported (1)
Authentication Encryption notSupported (2)
Option.
*DataEncryptionSupport Applicable to all units. Integer
Data Encryption Option. notSupported (2)
*AESEncryptionSupport Applicable to all units. Integer
AES Encryption Option. notSupported (2)
*AntennaGainChange Applicable to all units. Integer
(*SysInfo 19) Indicates whether the supported (1)
Antenna Gain parameter is notSupported (2)
changeable of fixed.
E.2.2 Unit Control Parameters

*UnitControl
(breezeAccessVLMib 2)
*ResetUnit Applicable to all units. Resets the Integer
(*UnitControl 1) unit and applies new parameter cancel (1)
values. resetSystemNow (2)
*SetDefaults Applicable to all units. Sets unit Integer
(*UnitControl 2) configuration to Defaults values NoDefaultSettingRequested (0),
after the next reset. completeFactory (1)
completeFactory: All parameters partialFactory (2)
revert to Factory Defaults values completeOperator (3)
partialFactory: All parameters partialOperator (4)
revert to Factory Defaults values, cancelCurrentPendingRequest
except the parameters required (5)
for maintaining wireless
connectivity.
completeOperator: All parameters
revert to Operator Defaults values
partialOperator: All parameters
revert to Operator Defaults
values, except the parameters
required for maintaining wireless
connectivity.

215

*UnitName Applicable to all units. The unit DisplayString (SIZE(32))
(*UnitControl 3) name. A string of up to 32 printable
ASCII characters.
*FlashMemoryControl Applicable to all units. Integer
(*UnitControl 4) Reset And Boot From Shadow resetAndBootFrom
Version: Activates the shadow ShadowVersion (1)
version. useRunningVersion
Use Running Version After Reset: AfterReset (2)
The currently active version will cancel (3)
become the main version and will
be activated after next reset.
*TelnetLogoutTimer Applicable to all units. Time-out of Integer
(*UnitControl 5) management via Telnet. 1-999 (minutes)
Automatic exit if the program is
inactive for the defined time.
*SaveCurrentConfigurationAs Applicable to all units. Saves the Integer
OperatorDefaults current configuration as Operator saveAsDefaults (1)
(*UnitControl 6) Defaults. cancel (2)
*ExitTelnet Applicable to all units. Exit the Integer
(*UnitControl 7) Telnet Monitor session. cancelOperation (1)
exit (2)
*UnitPasswords Applicable to all units. Unit
(*UnitControl 8) passwords.
*ReadOnlyPassword Applicable to all units. The User DisplayString (SIZE(8)).
(*UnitPasswords 1) (read only) password. Up to 8 printable ASCII
characters.
*InstallerPassword Applicable to all units. The DisplayString (SIZE(8)).
(*UnitPasswords 2) Installer password. Up to 8 printable ASCII
characters.
*AdminPassword Applicable to all units. The DisplayString (SIZE(8)).
(*UnitPasswords 3) Administrator password. This is Up to 8 printable ASCII
also the SNMP Write Community characters.
String.
*EthernetNegotiationMode Applicable to all units. Ethernet Integer
(*UnitControl 9) port mode of operation. force10MbpsAnd
HalfDuplex (1)
force10MbpsAnd
FullDuplex (2)
force100MbpsAnd
HalfDuplex (3)
force100MbpsAnd
FullDuplex (4)
autoNegotiationMode (5)
*FTPParameters Applicable to all units. FTP
(*UnitControl 10) parameters
*FTPServerParams Applicable to all units. General
(*FTPParameters 1) FTP server parameters.
*FTPServerUserName Applicable to all units. The user DisplayString (SIZE(20)).
(*FTPServerParams 1) name to be used for access to the Up to 18 printable ASCII
FTP server characters.
*FTPServerPassword Applicable to all units. The DisplayString (SIZE(20)).
(*FTPServerParams 2) password to be used for access to Up to 18 printable ASCII
the FTP server characters.
*FTPClientIpAddress Applicable to all units. The IP IP address
(*FTPParameters 3) address of the FTP stack in the
unit. For SW version 4.0 and
higher this is read-only, set to the
IP Address of the unit.
*FTPServertIpaddress Applicable to all units. The IP IP address
(*FTPServerParams 4) address of the FTP server

216
breezeAccessVLMib

*FTPClientMask Applicable to all units. The IP IP address
(*FTPParameters 5) MASK of the FTP stack in the
unit.
*FTPGatewayIPAddress Applicable to all units. The FTP IP address
(*FTPParameters 6) Default Gateway IP address.
*FTPSwDownload Applicable to all units. SW
(*FTPParameters 2) download parameters.
*FTPSwFileName Applicable to all units. The name DisplayString (SIZE(80)).
(*FTPSwDownload 1) of the SW file to be downloaded. Up to 20 printable ASCII
characters. An empty string is
not allowed.
*FtpSwDownloadSourceDir Applicable to all units. The source DisplayString (SIZE(80)).
(*FTPSwDownload 2) directory of the required file in the Up to 80 printable ASCII
FTP server characters. Use “.” To clear field.
*DownloadSwFile Applicable to all units. Execution Integer
(*FTPSwDownload 3) of the SW download operation. downloadFile (1)
cancel (2)
*ConfigurationFileLoading Applicable to all units.
(*FTPParameters 3) Configuration file and Operator
Defaults file download/upload
parameters.
*ConfigurationFileName Applicable to all units. The name DisplayString (SIZE(80)).
(*ConfigurationFileLoading 1) of the configuration file to be Up to 20 printable ASCII
downloaded/uploaded. characters. An empty string is
not allowed.
*OperatorDefaultsFileName Applicable to all units. The name DisplayString (SIZE(80)).
(*ConfigurationFileLoading 2) of the Operator Defaults file to be Up to 20 printable ASCII
downloaded/uploaded. characters. An empty string is
not allowed.
*FTPConfigurationFileSourceDir Applicable to all units. The source DisplayString (SIZE(80)).
(*ConfigurationFileLoading 3) directory of the required file in the Up to 80 printable ASCII
FTP server characters. Use “.” To clear field.
*ExecuteFTPConfigurationFileLoading Applicable to all units. Execution Integer
(*ConfigurationFileLoading 4) of the file download/upload executeFTPGetConfiguration
operation. File (1)
executeFTPPutConfiguration
File (2)
executeFTPGetOperator
Defaults (3)
executeFTPPutOperator
Defaults (4)
cancel (5)
*EventLogFileUploading Applicable to all units. Event Log
(*FTPParameters 4) file upload parameters.
*EventLogFileName Applicable to all units. The name DisplayString (SIZE(80)).
(*EventLogFileUploading 1) of the event log file to be Up to 20 printable ASCII
uploaded. characters.
*EventLogDestinationDir Applicable to all units. The DisplayString (SIZE(80)).
(*EventLogFileUploading 2) destination directory for the event Up to 80 printable ASCII
logd file in the FTP server characters. Use “.” To clear field.
*UploadEventLogFile Applicable to all units. Integer
(*EventLogFileUploading 3) Execution of the event log upload uploadFile (1)
operation cancel (2)
*LoadingStatus Applicable to all units. The status Integer
(*UnitControl 11) of an FTP or TFTP loading inProcess (1)
process. successful (2)
failed (3)
*EventLogFileParams Event Log parameters
(*UnitControl 12)

217

*EventLogPolicy Applicable to all units. The lowest Integer
(*EventLogFileParams 1) severity of events to be logged. message (1)
warning (2)
error (3)
fatal(4)
logNone(5)
*EraseEventLog Applicable to all units. Erase the Integer
(*EventLogFileParams 2) log file. eraseEventLog (1)
cancel(2)
*SysLocation Applicable to all units. The unit DisplayString (SIZE(0..34))
(*UnitControl 13) location.
*FeatureUpgrade Feature Upgrade parameters
(*UnitControl 14)
*FeatureUpgradeManually Applicable to all units. DisplayString (SIZE(32..64))
(*FeatureUpgrade 1) Upgrade unit to support new License string: 32 to 64
feature. hexadecimal digits.
*ChangeUnitType Applicable RB/BU only. Change Integer
(*UnitControl 15) the unit type between BU and RB. bu (1),
rb (2),
cancel (3)
E.2.3 Network Management Parameters

*NwMngParameters Network management
(breezeAccessVLMib 3) parameters.
*AccessToNwMng Applicable to all units. The port Integer
(*NwMngParameters 1) to be used for remote fromwirelessOnly (1)
management. fromEthernetOnly (2)
fromBothWirelessnAndEthernet (3)
na (255)
*NwMngFilter Applicable to all units. Disables Integer
(*NwMngParameters 2) or enable IP address based disable (1)
filtering of management activateOnEthernetPort (2)
messages on one or both ports. activateOnWirelessPort (3)
activateOnBothWirelessAndEthernet
(4)
na (255)
mngIpFilterTable Applicable to all units. A table of
(*NwMngParameters 3) up to 10 IP addresses of stations
that are authorized to access the
unit for management purposes.
Not accessible.
mngIpFilterEntry Applicable to all units. A
(mngIpFilterTable 1) Management IP Addresses
Table entry. Not accessible.
*NwMngIpAddress Applicable to all units. An IP IP address
(mngIpFilterEntry 1) address in the Management IP
Addresses Table entry.
*NwMngIpTableIdx Applicable to all units. Integer
(mngIpFilterEntry 2) Read-only. A table index for an 1-10
entry in the Management IP
Addresses Table.

218
breezeAccessVLMib

*DeleteOneNwIpAddr Applicable to all units. Deletes a Integer
(*NwMngParameters 4) single selected entry from the cancelOperation (0)
Management IP Addresses deleteEntry (1…10)
Table. na (255)
*DeleteAllNwIpAddrs Applicable to all units. Deletes all Integer
(*NwMngParameters 5) entries from the Management IP deleteAll (1)
Addresses Table. cancelOperation (2)
na (255)
*AccessToNwTrap Applicable to all units. Enables or Integer
(*NwMngParameters 6) disables the sending of SNMP disable (1)
traps. enable (2)
mngTrapTable Applicable to all units. A table of
(*NwMngParameters 7) up to 10 IP addresses of stations
to which to send SNMP traps.
Not accessible.
mngTrapEntry Applicable to all units. A
(mngTrapTable 1) Management Trap Table entry.
Not accessible.
*NwMngTrapCommunity Applicable to all units. The trap DisplayString (SIZE(14))
(mngTrapEntry 1) community associated with the Up to 14 printable ASCII characters.
applicable entry in the
Management Trap Table.
*NwMngTrapAddress Applicable to all units. An IP IP address
(mngTrapEntry 2) address in the Management Trap
Table.
*NwMngTrapTableIdx Applicable to all units. Read only. Integer
(mngTrapEntry 3) Index for an entry in the 1-10
Management Trap Table.
*DeleteOneTrapAddr Applicable to all units. Deletes a Integer
Management Trap Table. deleteEntry (1…10)
na (255)
*DeleteAllTrapAddrs Applicable to all units. Deletes all Integer
(*NwMngParameters 9) entries from the Management deleteAll (1)
Trap Table. cancelOperation (2)
na (255)
*MngIpRangesTable Applicable to all units. A table of
(*NwMngParameters 10) Management IP Address
Ranges. Not accessible.
*MngIpRangesEntry Applicable to all units. An entry
(*MngIpRangesTable 1) in the table of Management IP
Address Ranges. Not accessible.
*MngIpRangeIdx Applicable to all units. Index of Integer
(*MngIpRangesEntry 1) an entry in the IP Address 1-10
Ranges Table.
*MngIPRangeFlag Applicable to all units. Defines Integer
(*MngIpRangesEntry 2) the method of defining the range: rangeDefinedByStartEndAddr(1),
Using Start & End Addresses rangeDefinedByStartAddrMask(2)
(rangeDefinedByStartEndAddr),
or using Start Address and Mask
(rangeDefinedByStartAddrMask
*MngIpRangeStart Applicable to all units. Start IP address
(*MngIpRangesEntry 3) Address of the range.
*MngIpRangeEnd Applicable to all units. End IP address
(*MngIpRangesEntry 4) Address of the range. Used only
if brzaccVLMngIPRangeFlag is
rangeDefinedByStartEndAddr

219

*MngIpRangeMask Applicable to all units. The IP address
(*MngIpRangesEntry 5) subnet mask of the range. Used
only if
brzaccVLMngIPRangeFlag is
rangeDefinedByStartAddrMask.
*DeleteOneNwIpRange Applicable to all units. Deletes a Integer
Management IP Ranges Table. deleteEntry (1…10)
na (255)
*DeleteAllNwIpRanges Applicable to all units. Deletes all Integer
(*NwMngParameters 12) entries from the Management IP deleteAll (1)
Ranges Table. cancelOperation (2)
na (255)
*ApClientIpAddress Applicable to SU/RB only. The IP IP address
(*NwMngParameters 13) address of a WiFi AP connected
to the unit.
E.2.4 IP Parameters

*IpParams
*UnitIpAddress Applicable to all units. IP address IP address
(*IpParams 1) of the unit.
*SubNetMask Applicable to all units. Subnet IP address
(*IpParams 2) mask of the unit.
*DefaultGWAddress Applicable to all units. Default IP address
(*IpParams 3) gateway IP address of the unit.
*UseDhcp Applicable to all units. DHCP Integer
(*IpParams 4) client mode of operation. disable (1)
disable: Use regular (manual) dHCPOnly (2)
methods to configure IP automatic (3)
parameters.
DHCP Only: Use DHCP server to
configure IP parameters.
automatic: Use DHCP server to
configure IP parameters. If a
DHCP server is not available, use
manually configured values for
*UnitIpAdress, *SubnetMask and
*DefaultGWAdress.
*AccessToDHCP Applicable to all units. The port to Integer
(*IpParams 5) be used for communicating with a fromWirelessOnly (1)
DHCP server. fromEthernetOnly (2)
fromBothWirelessAndEthernet (3)
*RunTimeIPaddr Applicable to all units. Read-only: IP address
(*IpParams 6) The run-time IP address. If DHCP
is used, the run-time IP address is
the address given to the unit by
the server. Alternatively the static
IP address is used.

220
breezeAccessVLMib

*RunTimeSubNetMask Applicable to all units. Read-only: IP address
(*IpParams 7) The run-time subnet mask. If
DHCP is used, the run-time
subnet mask is the mask given to
the unit by the server.
Alternatively the static subnet
mask value is used.
*RunTimeDefaultIPGateway Applicable to all units. Read-only: IP address
(*IpParams 8) The run-time Gateway IP address.
If DHCP is used, the Run Time
Gateway IP Address is the
address given to the unit by the
server. Alternatively, the static
default gateway is used.
E.2.5 Bridge Parameters

*BridgeParameters Bridge parameters.
*VLANSupport Applicable to all units. VLAN support
(*BridgeParameters 1) parameters. Applicable to Access Link
only.
*VlanID Applicable to SU/RB only. VLAN ID for Integer
(*VLANSupport 1) data frame tagging. 1-4094.
0 –na (no VLAN ID)
*EthernetLinkType Applicable to all units. VLAN support Integer
(*VLANSupport 2) mode (Link Type). accessLink (1)
The accessLink option is not available for trunkLink (2)
AU/BU. hybridLink (3)
serviceProviderLink is not applicable for serviceProviderLink (4)
BU/RB.
*ManagementVID Applicable to all units. VLAN ID for Integer
(*VLANSupport 3) management frame tagging. 1-4094
65535 - no VLAN
tagging.
*VLANForwarding VLAN forwarding feature parameters.
(*VLANSupport 4)
*VlanForwardingSupport Applicable to all units. Enables or disables Integer
(*VLANForwarding 1) the VLAN forwarding feature. Applicable disable (1)
to Trunk and Service Provider links only. enable (2)
na (255)
*VlanForwardingTable Applicable to all units. A table of up to 20
(*VLANForwarding 2) VLAN IDs of devices to which data frames
are forwarded when the VLAN Forwarding
feature is Enabled. Applicable to Trunk
and Service Provider links only. Not
accessible.
*VlanForwardingEntry Applicable to all units. A VLAN Forwarding
(*VlanForwardingTable 1) Table entry. Applicable to Trunk and
Service Provider links only. Not
accessible.
*VlanForwardingTableIdx Applicable to all units. A read only table Integer
(*VlanForwardingEntry 1) index for a VLAN entry in the VLAN 1-20
Forwarding Table.

221

*VlanIdForwarding Applicable to all units. The list of VLAN Integer
(*VlanForwardingEntry 2) ID's in the VLAN ID Forwarding Table. To 1-4094
remove a VLAN ID - SET the 0-remove entry.
corresponding entry to 0. To add a new
VLAN ID SET an entry which is now 0.
*VLANRelaying VLAN Relaying feature parameters. Not
(*VLANSupport 5) applicable to BreezeNET B products.
*VlanRelayingSupport Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to Integer
(*VLANRelaying 1) BreezeNET B products. Enables or disable (1)
disables the VLAN Relaying feature. enable (2)
Applicable to Trunk and Service Provider na (255)
links only.
*VlanRelayingTable Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
(*VLANRelaying 2) BreezeNET B products. A table of up to
20 VLAN IDs of devices to which data
frames are relayed when the VLAN
Relaying feature is Enabled. Applicable to
Trunk and Service Provider links only. Not
accessible.
*VlanRelayingEntry Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
(*VlanRelayingTable 1) BreezeNET B products. A VLAN Relaying
Table entry. Applicable to Trunk and
Service Provider links only. Not
accessible.
*VlanRelayingTableIdx Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to Integer
(*VlanRelayingEntry) 1 BreezeNET B products. A read only table 1-20
index for a VLAN entry in the VLAN
Relaying Table.
*VlanIdRelaying Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to Integer
(*VlanRelayingEntry 2) BreezeNET B products. The list of VLAN 1-4094
ID's in the VLAN ID Relaying Table. To 0-remove entry.
remove a VLAN ID - SET the
corresponding entry to 0. To add a new
VLAN ID SET an entry which is now 0.
*VLANTrafficPriority VLAN traffic priority parameters.
(*VLANSupport 6)
*VlanDataPriority Applicable to SU/RB only. Integer
(*VLANTrafficPriority 1) Priority tagging for data frames. 0–7
Applicable to Access Link only. 255-na
*VlanManagementPriority Applicable to all units. Priority tagging for Integer
(*VLANTrafficPriority 3) management frames. Applicable to 0–7
Access Link and Trunk Link only. 255-na
*VlanPriorityThreshold Applicable to all units. Not applicable to Integer
(*VLANTrafficPriority 4) units with SW version 3.1 and higher 0–7
where this parameter is replaced by 255-na
Priority threshold for tagged frames
received from Ethernet port. Applicable to
Hybrid Link and Trunk Link only.
*VLANQinQ QinQ (Service Provider Link) parameters.
*VLANSupport 7 Not applicable to BreezeNET-B units.
*QinQEthertype Applicable to AU and SU. The Ethernet Integer
(*VLANQinQ 1) type of the Service Provider tag 33024 (0x8100) –
36864 (0x9000),
37120 (0x9100),
37376 (0x9200)
*QinQProviderVlanID Applicable to SU only. VLAN ID of the Integer
(*VLANQinQ 2) Service Provider tag. 1-4094
*BridgeAgingTime Applicable to all units. Bridge aging time Integer
(*BridgeParameters 2) for devices learned from both the Ethernet 20 – 2000 (seconds)
and wireless link ports.

222
breezeAccessVLMib

*BroadcastRelaying Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to Integer
(*BridgeParameters 4) BreezeNET B products. Enables or disable (1)
disables the relaying of broadcast enable (2)
messages to the wireless link. na (255)
*UnicastRelaying Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to Integer
(*BridgeParameters 5) BreezeNET B products. Enables or disable (1)
disables the relaying of unicast messages enable (2)
to the wireless link. na (255)
*EthBroadcastFiltering Applicable to SU/RB only. Enables or Integer
(*BridgeParameters 6) disables the filtering of Ethernet (layer2) disable (1)
broadcasts. onEthernetOnly (2)
disable: No filtering. onwirelessOnly (3)
onEthrnetOnly: Filters broadcasts onBothWirelessAndEthe
received on the Ethernet port only. rnet (4)
onWirelessOnly: Filters broadcasts na (255)
received on the wireless port only.
onBothWirelessAndEthernet: Filters
broadcasts received on both ports.
*EthBroadcastingParameters
(*BridgeParameters 7)
*DHCPBroadcastOverrideFilter Applicable to SU/RB only. Enables or Integer
(*EthBroadcastingParameters 1) disables the broadcasting of DHCP disable (1)
messages, overriding the general enable (2)
*EthBroadcastFiltering Ethernet broadcast na (255)
filtering option.
*PPPoEBroadcastOverrideFilter Applicable to SU/RB only. Enables or Integer
(*EthBroadcastingParameters 2) disables the broadcasting of PPPoE disable (1)
filtering option.
*ARPBroadcastOverrideFilter Applicable to SU/RB only. Enables or Integer
(*EthBroadcastingParameters 3) disables the broadcasting of ARP disable (1)
filtering option.
*EthBroadcastMulticastLimiterOption Applicable to all units. Enable/disable the Integer
(*EthBroadcastingParameters 4) limiter for multicast and broadcast disable (1)
packets. limitOnlyBroadcasts(2)
limitMulticastsExceptBro
adcasts(3)
limitAllMulticasts(4)
*EthBroadcastMulticastLimiterThreshold Applicable to all units. The limit for the Integer
(*EthBroadcastingParameters 5) allowed number of multicast and 0 - 204800
broadcast packets when the
Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter
Option is enabled
*EthBroadcastMulticastLimiterSendTrapI Applicable to all units. The minimum time Integer
nterval in minutes between two successive traps 1-60
(*EthBroadcastingParameters 5) that are sent, indicating the number of
packets that were dropped by the
Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter since
the last trap was sent.
*ToSPriorityParameters
*ToSPrecedenceThreshold Applicable to all units. Not applicable to Integer
(*ToSPriorityParameters 1) units with SW version 3.1 and higher. 0-7
Priority threshold (based on the ToS) for
frames received from Ethernet port.

223

*RoamingOption Applicable to SU/RB only.Disable/enable Integer
(*BridgeParameters 9) the roaming feature. When enabled, the disable (1)
SU will start scanning for an AU/RB after enable (2)
one second of not receiving beacons from na (255)
current AU/BU. Once it found a new
AU/BU, it will also send through the
wireless network a roaming SNAP on
behalf of its clients informing other
devices in the network of their new
location. When disabled, it will wait for
seven seconds before starting scanning,
and it will not send roaming SNAPs.
*MacAddressDenyList MAC Address Deny List parameters
*MacAddressDenyListTable Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
(*MacAddressDenyList 1) BreezeNET B units. A list of up to 100
MAC Addresses. If
brzaccVLMacAddressDenyListAction is
set to denyList, these are SUs that are not
allowed to transfer data to the AU.
If brzaccVLMacAddressDenyListAction is
set to allowList, only these SUs are
allowed to transfer data to the AU. Not
accessible.
*MacAddressDenyListEntry Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
(*MacAddressDenyListTable 1) BreezeNET B units. An entry in the Mac
Address Deny List Table. Not accessible.
*MacAddressDenyListTableIdx Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to Integer
(*MacAddressDenyListEntry 1) BreezeNET B units. A read only table Range: 1 to 100
index for a MAC Address entry in the Mac
Address Deny List Table.
*MacAddressDenyListId Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to MAC Address
(*MacAddressDenyListEntry 2) BreezeNET B units. The list of MAC
Addresses in the MAC Address Deny List
Table. To Remove a MAC Address - SET
the corresponding entry to 0. To Add a
new MAC Address - SET an entry which
is currently 0.
*MacAddressDenyListAdd Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to MAC Address
(*MacAddressDenyList 2) BreezeNET B units. Add a MAC address
to the MAC Address Deny List Table
*MacAddressDenyListRemove Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to MAC Address
(*MacAddressDenyList 3) BreezeNET B units. Remove a MAC
address from the MAC Address Deny List
Table
*NumberOfMacAddressesInDenyList Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to Integer
(*MacAddressDenyList 4) BreezeNET B units. Read only. The Range: 0 to 100
number of MAC addresses in the MAC Na (255)
Address Deny List Table.
*MacAddressDenyListAction Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to Integer
(*MacAddressDenyList 5) BreezeNET B units. Defines the action to denyList (1),
be used by the Mac Address Deny List. allowedList (2),
na (255)
*PortsControl Ports Control parameters. Applicable to
(*BridgeParameters 11) SU/RB only.
*EthernetPortControl Applicable to SU/RB only. Integer
(*PortsControl 1) Enable/disable the Ethernet port. When disable (1),
disabled, only data frames are blocked. enable (2),
Management frames are accepted. na (255)

224
breezeAccessVLMib
E.2.6 Air Interface Parameters

*AirInterface Applicable to all units. Air Interface
(breezeAccessVLMib 6) parameters.
*ESSIDParameters Applicable to all units. ESSID
(*AirInterface 1) Parameters.
*ESSID Applicable to all units. The Extended DisplayString (SIZE(31))
(*ESSIDParameters 1) Service Set ID (ESSID) used to Up to 31 printable case
prevent the merging of collocated sensitive ASCII characters.
systems. The ESSID is accessible
only with the write community string
(administrator password).
*OperatorESSIDOption Applicable to AU/BU only. Integer
(*ESSIDParameters 2) Enabling/disabling the use of the disable (1)
Operator ESSID enable (2)
na (255)
*OperatorESSID Applicable to AU/BU only. A DisplayString (SIZE(31))
(*ESSIDParameters 3) secondary ESSID to support easy Up to 31 printable case
installation of SUs as well as the use sensitive ASCII characters.
of the Best AU/BU feature.
Accessible only with SNMP Write
Community string (administrator
password).
*RunTimeESSID Applicable to SU/RB only. The DisplayString (SIZE(31))
(*ESSIDParameters 1) ESSID of the associated AU/BU. Up to 31 printable case
Accessible only with SNMP Write sensitive ASCII characters.
Community string (administrator
password).
*MaximumCellDistance Applicable to all units. For AU/BU: Integer
(*AirInterface 2) read-write. For SU/RB: read-only. Range: For units with SW
The distance is learned from the version bellow version 2.0
AU/BU. In units with SW version 2.0 the range is 0 - 50000
and up - applicable only when the Meters.
Cell Distance Mode is set to Manual. For units with SW version
The highest distance from the 2.0 and up the range is 0 to
AU/BU of 54 Kilometers.
any SU/RB served by it. Affects the 0 means no compensation
maximum time the units wait for a (minimum slot size, maximal
response message and the slot size delay timeout).
by taking into account the round trip
propagation delay.
*AIFS Applicable to AU and SU. Not Integer
(*AirInterface 3) applicable to BreezeNET B oneSlot (1)
products. Arbitration Inter-Frame twoSlots (2)
Spacing (AIFS). This is the number na (255)
of time slots that define the DIFS.
(DIFS=SIFS+AIFS). A value of 1
should be used only in point-to-point
applications to allow one unit to have
advantage over the other unit.
*WirelessTrapThreshold Applicable to AU/BU only. A wireless Integer
(*AirInterface 4) link quality threshold, expressed in 1-100 (%)
% of retransmissions, for sending
the
brzaccVLAUWirelessQualityTRAP.
This trap indicate whether the quality
has gone below or above the
specified threshold

225

*TransmitPowerTable Applicable to all units. Not
(*AirInterface 5) accessible. Transmit Power
parameters table.
*TransmitPowerEntry Applicable to all units. Not

(*TransmitPowerTable 1) accessible. An entry in the Transmit
Power parameters table.
*TransmitPowerIdx Applicable to all units. Read-only. An Integer
(*TransmitPowerEntry 1) index of an entry in the Transmit 1-4
*ApplicableModulationLevel Applicable to all units. Read-only. Level1to5 (1)
(*TransmitPowerEntry 2) The applicable modulation level for Level6 (2)
an entry in the Transmit Power Level7 (3)
parameters table. Level 8 is not Level8 (4)
applicable to units with HW revision
A.
*MaximumTxPowerRange Applicable to all units. Read-only. DisplayString
(*TransmitPowerEntry 3) The allowed range for the *TxPower Range: -10 to the maximum
parameter at the applicable allowed for the applicable
modulation level. modulation level.
*TxPower Applicable to all units. Read-only for DisplayString
(*TransmitPowerEntry 4) units with SW version 4.0 and Range:
higher. In SU/RB: The range is -10
AU/BU: The transmit power defined dBm to the power value
for the applicable modulation level. defined by
SU/RB: If ATPC is disabled, this is *MaximumTxPower for the
The transmit power defined for the applicable modulation level.
applicable modulation level. If ATPC In AU/BU: The range is -10
is enabled, it serves as the initial dBm to the power value
transmit power for the ATPC defined by
algorithm. *MaximumTxPowerRange
for the applicable modulation
level
*CurrentTxPower Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. DisplayString
(*TransmitPowerEntry 5) The actual transmit power in dBm at Range: -17 to the maximum
the applicable modulation level. value defined by
*MaximumTxPowerRange
for the applicable modulation
level.
*MaximumTransmitPowerTable Applicable to SU /RB. Not
(*AirInterface 6) accessible. Maximum Transmit
*MaximumTransmitPowerEntry Applicable to SU/RB. Not

(*TransmitPowerTable 1) accessible. An entry in the Maximum
Transmit Power parameters table.
*MaximumTransmitPowerIdx Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. An Integer
(*MaximumTransmitPowerEntry 1) index of an entry in the Maximum 1-4
Transmit Power parameters table.
*MaxTxApplicableModulationLevel Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. Level1to5 (1)
(*MaximumTransmitPowerEntry 2) The applicable modulation level for Level6 (2)
an entry in the Maximum Transmit Level7 (3)
Power parameters table. Level 8 is Level8 (4)
not applicable to units with HW
revision A.
*DefinedMaximumTxPowerRange Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. DisplayString
(*MaximumTransmitPowerEntry 3) The allowed range for the Range: -10 to the maximum
*MaxTxPower parameter at the allowed for the applicable
applicable modulation level. modulation level.

226
breezeAccessVLMib

*MaxTxPower Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only for DisplayString
(*MaximumTransmitPowerEntry 4) units with SW version 4.0 and Range: -10 to the maximum
higher. defined by the
The maximum transmit power level *DefinedMaximumTxPowerR
that can be either configured for the ange for the applicable
*TxPower parameter or reached by modulation level.
the ATPC algorithm.
*MaxNumOfAssociations Applicable to AU. Not applicable to Integer
(*AirInterface 10) BreezeNET B products. The upper AU-BS, AU-SA: 0-512 (0-124
limit for the number of Subscriber if Data Encryption Option is
Units that can be associated with the enabled).
AU. AUS-BS, AUS-SA with SW
version 4.0 and higher: 0-8.
AUS-BS, AUS-SA with SW
version below 4.0: 0-5.
na (65535)
*BestAu Best AU/BU parameters. Applicable
(*AirInterface 11) to SU/RB.
*BestAuSupport Applicable to SU/RB. Disable/enable Integer
(*BestAu 1) the Best AU/BU selection disable (1)
mechanism enable (2)
na (255)
*BestAuNoOfScanningAttempts Applicable to SU/RB. The number of Integer
(*BestAu 2) scanning attempts to collect 1-255
information for the Best AU/BU
decision
*PreferredAuMacAddress Applicable to SU only. The MAC Mac Address
(*BestAu 3) address of the preferred AU/BU 000000000000 means no
(overriding the Best AU/BU selection preferred AU
process).
*NeighborAuTable Applicable to SU/RB. Not
(*BestAu 4) accessible. Neighboring AUs/BUs
table.
*NeighborAuEntry Applicable to SU only. Not
(*NeighborAuTable 1) accessible. An entry in the
Neighboring AUs table.
*NeighborAuIdx Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. An Integer
(*NeighborAuEntry 1) Index of an entry in the Neighboring Range: 1…20
AU/BU Table
*NeighborAuMacAdd Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. MAC Address
(*NeighborAuEntry 2) The MAC Address of the AU/BU
associated with the entry in the
Neighboring AU/BU Table
*NeighborAuESSID Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. DisplayString
(*NeighborAuEntry 3) The ESSID of the AU/BU associated
with the entry in the Neighboring
AU/BU Table. Accessible only with
the SNMP Write community string
(Administrator Password).
*NeighborAuSNR Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. Integer
(*NeighborAuEntry 4) The average SNR at which the Na (255)
SU/RB receives the AU/BU
Neighboring AU/BU Table.

227

*NeighborAuAssocLoadStatus Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. Integer
(*NeighborAuEntry 5) The load status of the AU/BU full (1)
associated with the entry in the notFull (2)
Neighboring AU/BU Table. Full na (255)
means that it has reached its
maximum permitted load, meaning
in AU that the number of associated
SUs is the Maximum Number Of
Associations (for AU) or in BU that it
is already associated with an RB.
*NeighborAuMark Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. Integer
(*NeighborAuEntry 6) The overall mark given by the Best
AU/BU algorithm to the AU/BU
*NeighborAuHwRevision Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. Integer
(*NeighborAuEntry 7) The HW revision of the AU/BU HwRevisionA (1),
associated with the entry in the HwRevisionB (2),
Neighboring AU/BU Table. HwRevisionC (3),
na (255)
*NeighborAuCountryCode Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. Integer
(*NeighborAuEntry 8) The Country Code of the AU/BU
*NeighborAuSwVer Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. DisplayString
(*NeighborAuEntry 9) The SW Version of the AU/BU
*NeighborAuAtpcOption Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. Integer
(*NeighborAuEntry 10) The current ATPC Option of the disable (1),
AU/BU associated with the entry in enable (2),
the Neighboring AU/BU Table. na (255)
*NeighborAuAdapModOption Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. Integer
(*NeighborAuEntry 11) The current Adaptive Modulation disable (1),
Option of the AU/BU associated with enable (2),
the entry in the Neighboring AU/BU na (255)
Table.
*NeighborAuBurstModeOption Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. Integer
(*NeighborAuEntry 12) The current Burst Mode Option of disable (1),
the AU/BU associated with the entry enable (2),
in the Neighboring AU/BU Table. na (255)
*NeighborAuDfsOption Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. Integer
(*NeighborAuEntry 14) The current DFS Option of the disable (1),
AU/BU associated with the entry in enable (2),
the Neighboring AU/BU Table. na (255)
*NeighborAuConcatenationOption Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. Integer
(*NeighborAuEntry 15) The current Concatenation Option of disable (1),
the AU/BU associated with the entry enable (2),
in the Neighboring AU/BU Table. na (255)
*NeighborAuLearnCountryCodeBySU Applicable to SU. Not applicable for Integer
(*NeighborAuEntry 17) BreezeNET B and BreezeACCESS disable (1),
products. Read-only. The current enable (2),
Country Code Learning by SU option na (255)
of the AU associated with the entry
in the Neighboring AU Table.
*NeighborAuSecurityMode Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. Integer
(*NeighborAuEntry 18) The current Security Mode of the wep (1),
AU/BU associated with the entry in aesOCB (2),
the Neighboring AU/BU Table. fips197 (3),
na (255)

228
breezeAccessVLMib

*NeighborAuAuthOption Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. Integer
(*NeighborAuEntry 19) The current Authentication algorithm openSysteme (1),
of the AU/BU associated with the sharedKey (2),
entry in the Neighboring AU/BU na (255)
Table.
*NeighborAuDataEncyptOption Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. Integer
(*NeighborAuEntry 20) The current Data Encryption option disable (1),
of the AU/BU associated with the enable (2),
entry in the Neighboring AU/BU na (255)
Table.
*NeighborAuPerSuDistanceLearning Applicable to SU. Read-only. The Integer
(*NeighborAuEntry 21) current Per SU Distance Learning disable (1),
option of the AU associated with the enable (2),
entry in the Neighboring AU Table. na (255)
*FrequencyDefinition Frequency Definition parameters
(*AirInterface 12)
*SubBandLowerFrequency Applicable to SU/RB. Not applicable Integer
(*FrequencyDefinition 1) to units with SW version 2.0 or
higher. The lowest frequency in the
subset to be used for scanning.
For 5.8 GHz products the range is
5740 to 5830 MHz using a 10 MHz
resolution.
For 4.9GHz products the range is
resolution.
For HW Revision C and above this
leaf is not relevant - shall return 0.
*SubBandUpperFrequency Applicable to SU/RB. Not applicable Integer
(*FrequencyDefinition 2) to units with SW version 2.0 or
higher. The lowest frequency in the
subset to be used for scanning.
For 5.8 GHz products the range is
resolution.
For 4.9G Hz products the range is
resolution.
For HW Revision C and above this
leaf is not relevant - shall return 0.
*ScanningStep Applicable to all units - For flexible Integer
(*FrequencyDefinition 3) Sub-Bands only. For units mhz-5 (1),
with version 2.0 and above this is a mhz-10 (2),
read-only parameter. mhz-20 (3)
The scanning step to be used for na (255)
generating the frequency subset.
*FrequencySubsetTable Applicable to all units. Not applicable
(*FrequencyDefinition 4) to SU/RB with SW version 4.0 and
higher. Not accessible. The
Frequency Subset table that
includes all frequencies from the
selected Sub-band.
*FrequencySubsetEntry Applicable to all units. Not applicable
(FrequencySubsetTable 1) to SU/RB with SW version 4.0 and
higher. Not accessible. An entry in
the Frequency Subset table.
*FrequencySubsetTableIdx Applicable to all units. Not applicable Integer
(*FrequencySubsetEntry 1) to SU/RB with SW version 4.0 and
higher. Read-only. The index of an
entry in the Frequency Subset table.

229

*FrequencySubsetFrequency Applicable to all units with HW Integer
(*FrequencySubsetEntry 2) revision B and lower (for units with
HW revision C and higher replaced
by *FrequencySubsetFrequencyNew
to support a resolution of 0.5 MHz).
Not applicable to SU/RB with SW
version 4.0 and higher. Read-only.
The frequency in MHz of an entry in
the Frequency Subset table.
*FrequencySubsetActive Applicable to all units. Not applicable Integer
(*FrequencySubsetEntry 3) to SU/RB with SW version 4.0 and active (1)
higher. The status of an entry in the notActive (2)
Frequency subset Table. Only
frequencies of active entries will be
included in the final list of
frequencies to be used for scanning.
*FrequencySubsetFrequencyNew Applicable to all units. Not applicable DisplayString
(*FrequencySubsetEntry 4) to SU/RB with SW version 4.0 and
higher. Read-only. The frequency in
MHz of an entry in the Frequency
Subset table. (Replaces
*FrequencySubsetFrequency to
support a resolution of 0.5 MHz for
units with HW revision C and
higher).
*SetSelectedFreqsSubset Applicable to all units. Not applicable Integer
(*FrequencyDefinition 5) to SU/RB with SW version 4.0 and SetSelectedFreqsSubset (1)
higher. Apply the selected subset. cancel (2)
After the next reset the new subset
will be used for scanning.
*CurrentFrequencySubsetTable Applicable to all units. Not applicable
(*FrequencyDefinition 6) to SU/RB with SW version 4.0 and
higher. Not accessible. The Current
Frequency Subset table that for
SU/RB includes all frequencies that
are currently used for scanning. In
AU/BU it includes all frequencies
that can be used by the DFS
mechanism (if applicable).
*CurrentFrequencySubsetEntry Applicable to all units. Not applicable
(CurrentFrequencySubsetTable 1) to SU/RB with SW version 4.0 and
higher. Not accessible. An entry in
the Current Frequency Subset table.
*CurrentFrequencySubsetTableIdx Applicable to all units. Not applicable Integer
(*CurrentFrequencySubsetEntry 1) to SU/RB with SW version 4.0 and
higher. Read-only. The index of an
entry in the Current Frequency
Subset table.
*CurrentFrequencySubset Applicable to all units with HW Integer
Frequency revision B and lower (for units with
(*FrequencySubsetEntry 2) HW revision C and higher replaced
by
*CurrentFrequencySubsetFrequency
New to support a resolution of 0.5
MHz). Not applicable to SU/RB with
SW version 4.0 and higher. Read-
only. The frequency in MHz of an
entry in the Current Frequency
Subset table.

230
breezeAccessVLMib

*CurrentFrequencySubset Applicable to all units. Not applicable DisplayString
FrequencyNew to SU/RB with SW version 4.0 and
(*FrequencySubsetEntry 3) higher. Read-only. The frequency in
MHz of an entry in the Current
Frequency Subset table. (Replaces
*CurrentFrequencySubsetFrequency
to support a resolution of 0.5 MHz
for units with HW revision C and
higher).
*CurrentAUOperatingFrequency Applicable to AU/BU with HW Integer
(*FrequencyDefinition 7) revision B and lower (for units with For 5.8 GHz products with
HW revision C and higher replaced SW version below 2.0 the
by range is 5740 to 5830 MHz
*CurrentUOperatingFrequencyNew using a 10 MHz resolution.
to support a resolution of 0.5 MHz). For units with SW version
Read-only. The operating frequency 2.0 and up the range is as
in MHz. defined in the selected Sub-
Band.
*AUDefinedFrequency Applicable to AU/BU with HW Integer
(*FrequencyDefinition 8) revision B and lower (for units with For 5.8 GHz products with
HW revision C and higher replaced SW version below 2.0 the
by range is 5740 to 5830 MHz
*DefinedAUOperatingFrequencyNew using a 10M Hz resolution.
to support a resolution of 0.5 MHz). For units with SW version
Read-only. For 5.8 GHz products 2.0 and up the range is as
with SW version below 2.0 this is the defined in the selected Sub-
frequency in MHz of the AU/BU after Band.
the next reset.
For units with SW version 2.0 and up
this is the frequency in MHz to use
when the DFS Option is disabled.
*CurrentSUOperatingFrequency Applicable to SU/RB. Read only. DisplayString
(*FrequencyDefinition 9) The current operating frequency in For 5.8 GHz products with
MHz. SW version below 2.0 the
range is 5740 to 5830 MHz
using a 10 MHz resolution.
For units with SW version
2.0 and up the range is as
defined in the selected Sub-
Band.
*SubBandSelect Sub-Band Selection parameters
(*FrequencyDefinition 10)
*SelectSubBandIndex Applicable to all units. Read only for Integer
(*SubBandSelect 1) SU/RB with SW version 4.0 and
higher. The ID of the sub-band used
by the unit.
*DFSParameters DFS Parameters. Applicable to
(*FrequencyDefinition 11) AU/BU.
*DFSOption Applicable to AU/BU. Integer
(*DFSParameters 1) Enabling/disabling the DFS disable (1)
Algorithm. Not applicable if DFS enable (2)
Option is not supported by the na (255)
current Sub-Band.

231

*DFSChannelCheckTime Applicable to AU/BU. Integer
(*DFSParameters 3) Defines the time the unit checks the Range: 1 to 3600 (seconds).
channel for presence of radar
signals and does not transmit after
power up or association
or after moving to a new channel
due to detecting radar in the
previously used channel.
*DFSChannelAvoidancePeriod Applicable to AU/BU. Integer
(*DFSParameters 4) Defines the time after detecting Range: 1 to 60 (minutes).
radar signals in a channel of
avoiding using the channel or
adjacent channels in accordance
with the bandwidth.
*DFSSuWaitingOption Applicable to AU/BU. Integer
(*DFSParameters 5) Defines whether the associated SUs disable (1)
may should wait for this AU/BU after enable (2)
it stopped transmitting due to radar na (255)
detection, before they starts
scanning for other AUs/BUs.
*DFSClearRadarChannels Applicable to AU/BU. Integer
(*DFSParameters 6) Clear Radar Detected and Adjacent cancel (1)
to Radar channels after unit reset. clearRadarChannels (2)
Returns the unit to operate in default na (255)
frequency
*DFSRadarDetectionChannelsTable Applicable to AU/BU.
(*DFSParameters 7) Applicable only when DFS option is
on. Displays the current channels
defined in the sub-band and their
radar detection status.
*DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEntry Applicable to AU/BU.
(*DFSRadarDetectionChannelsTable 1) An entry in the DFS Radar Detection
Channels Table.
*DFSChannelIdx Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Integer
(*DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEntry 1) The index of the entry in the DFS
Radar Detection Channels Table.
*DFSChannelFrequency Applicable to AU/BU with HW Integer
(*DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEntry 2) revision B and lower (for units with
HW revision C and higher replaced
by * DFSChannelFrequency New to
support a resolution of 0.5 MHz).
Read-only. The frequency in MHz of
a channel in the DFS Radar
Detection Channels Table.
*DFSChannelRadarStatus Applicable to AU/BU. Integer
(*DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEntry 3) The radar detection status of a radarFree (1)
channel in the DFS Radar Detection adjacentToRadar (2)
Channels Table. radarDetected (3)
*DFSChannelFrequencyNew Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. DisplayString
(*DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEntry 4) The frequency of a channel in the
DFS Radar Detection Channels
Table. (Replaces
*DFSChannelFrequency to support
a resolution of 0.5 MHz for units with
HW revision C and higher).
*DFSMinimumPulsesToDetect Applicable to AU/BU. Defines the Integer
(*DFSParameters 8) minimum number of pulses to detect 1 - 100
radar.
*DFSChannelReuseParameters Channel Reuse Parameters
(*DFSParameters 9)

232
breezeAccessVLMib

*DFSChannelReuseOption Applicable to AU/BU. Integer
(*DFSChannelReuseParameters 1) Enabling/disabling the DFS Channel disable (1)
Reuse Algorithm. enable (2)
na (255)
*DFSRadarActivityAssessmentPeriod Applicable to AU/BU. Integer
(*DFSChannelReuseParameters 2) The period in hours for assessment 1 – 12 hours.
of radar activity when the Channel
reuse algorithm is enabled.
*DFSMaximumNumberOfDetectionsInAs Applicable to AU/BU. The maximum Integer
sessmentPeriod number of radar detection in the 1 – 10 detections.
(*DFSChannelReuseParameters 3) original channel during the Radar
Activity Assessment Period that is
required for reaching a decision to
try again the original channel.
*CountryCodeLearningBySU Applicable to AU only. Starting with Integer
(*FrequencyDefinition 12) 4.0 it is nor applicable for disable (1)
BreezeACCESS and BreezeNET B. enable (2)
Defines whether the SU should learn na (255)
the country code of the AU.
*CurrentAUOperatingFrequencyNew Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. DisplayString
(*FrequencyDefinition 13) The operating frequency in MHz. For 5.8 GHz products with
(Replaces SW version below 2.0 the
*CurrentAUOperatingFrequency to range is 5740 to 5830 MHz
support a resolution of 0.5 MHz for using a 10 MHz resolution.
units with HW revision C and For units with SW version
higher). 2.0 and up the range is as
defined in the selected Sub-
Band.
*AUDefinedFrequencyNew Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. For DisplayString
(*FrequencyDefinition 14) 5.8 GHz products with SW version For 5.8 GHz products with
below 2.0 this is the frequency in SW version below 2.0 the
MHz of the AU/BU after the next range is 5740 to 5830 MHz
reset. using a 10 MHz resolution.
For units with SW version 2.0 and up For units with SW version
this is the frequency in MHz to use 2.0 and up the range is as
when the DFS Option is disabled. defined in the selected Sub-
(Replaces *AUDefinedFrequency to Band.
support a resolution of 0.5 MHz for
units with HW revision C and
higher).
*AutoSubBandSelect Auto Sub Band Select parameters.
(*FrequencyDefinition 15) Applicable to SU/RB with SW
version 4.0 and higher.
*AutoSubBandSelectedFreqSubset Applicable to SU/RB with SW Integer
(*AutoSubBandSelect 1) version 4.0 and higher. Apply the setAllSelectedFreqsSubset
selected subset. After the next reset (1),
the new subset will be used for cancel (2)
scanning.
*AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetTable Applicable to SU/RB with SW
(*AutoSubBandSelect 2) version 4.0 and higher. Not
accessible. The Frequency Subset
Table that includes all available sub-
bands and all the frequencies in
these sub-bands.
*AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetEntry Applicable to SU/RB with SW
(*AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetTable 1) version 4.0 and higher. Not
accessible. An entry in the Auto
SubBand Frequency Subset Table.

233

*AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetBandIdx Applicable to SU/RB with SW Integer
(*AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetEntry 1) version 4.0 and higher. Read-only. 1-5
The index of the applicable Sub
Band. This is the Sub Band ID of the
relevant entry in the Country
Dependent Parameters table.
Serves also as an index of the entry
in the Auto Sub Babd Frequency
Subset Table.
*AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetFrequen Applicable to SU/RB with SW Integer
cyIdx version 4.0 and higher. Read-only. 1-40
(*AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetEntry 2) The index of the applicable
frequency in the applicable Sub
Band. Serves also as an index of the
entry in the Auto Sub Band
Frequency Subset Table.
*AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetActive Applicable to SU/RB with SW Integer
(*AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetEntry 3) version 4.0 and higher. The status active (1) ,
of an entry in the Auto Sub Band notActive (2)
Frequency Subset Table. The
frequency of an active entry will be
included in the final list of
frequencies to be used for scanning.
*AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetFrequen Applicable to SU/RB with SW DisplayString
cy version 4.0 and higher. Read-only.
(*AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetEntry 4) The frequency in MHz of the entry in
the Auto Sub Band Frequency
Subset table.
*ATPC ATPC parameters
(*AirInterface 13)
*AtpcOption Applicable to all units. Integer
(*ATPC 1) Enabling/disabling the ATPC disable (1)
Algorithm enable (2)
na (255)
*DeltaFromMinSNRLevel Applicable to AU/BU. The Minimum Integer
(*ATPC 2) SNR Level plus the value of this 4-20 (dB)
parameter define the maximum
desired level of the average SNR at
the AU/BU. If the ATPC Option is
enabled, than if the received SNR is
above the maximum desired level,
the AU/BU will transmit Power-Down
messages to the applicable SU/RB.
*MinimumSNRLevel Applicable to AU/BU. Defines the Integer
(*ATPC 3) minimum desired level in dB of the 4-60 (dB)
average SNR at the AU/BU. Below
this level, if ATPC Option is enabled,
the AU/BU will transmit ATPC
Power-Up messages to the
applicable SU/RB.
*MinimumIntervalBetweenATPC Applicable to AU/BU. The minimal Integer
Messages time between consecutive power- Range: 1 to 3600 (seconds)
(*ATPC 4) up/power-down messages.
*PowerLevelSteps Applicable to AU/BU. The step in dB Integer
(*ATPC 6) that the SU/RB will use when 1-20 (dB)
receiving an ATPC Power-
Up/Power-Down message
*CellDistanceParameters Cell distance Parameters
(*AirInterface 15)

234
breezeAccessVLMib

*CellDistanceMode Applicable AU/BU. The selected Integer
(*CellDistanceParameters 1) mode of deciding on Cell Distance. automatic (1)
manual (2)
na (255)
*FairnessFactor Applicable AU/BU. Not applicable to Integer
(*CellDistanceParameters 2) BreezeNET B products with SW Range: 0 to 100 (Percent). A
version below 4.0. The percentage value of 0 means the
of the maximum distance that is minimal slot size (9
taken into account in the time slot microseconds).
calculation. Na (255)
*MeasuredMaxCellDistance Applicable AU/BU. The Maximum Integer
(*CellDistanceParameters 3) Cell Distance as calculated by the Range: 0 to 54 (Kilometers).
AU/BU. 1 means “below 2 km”.
*UnitWithMaxDistance Applicable AU only. Not applicable MAC Address
(*CellDistanceParameters 4) to BreezeNET B units. The MAC
address of the unit with the
maximum distance from the AU.
*PerSuDistanceLearning Aplicable only to AU with SW Integer
(*CellDistanceParameters 5) version 4.0 and higher. Applicable disable (1)
only if Cell Distance Mode is set to enable (2)
Automatic. When disabled, all SUs
in the cell will use for the ACK
Timeout the computed distance of
the farthest SU. When enabled,
each SU will use its own computed
distance.
*ScanningMode Applicable to SU/RB. The scanning Integer
(*AirInterface 16) mode. In cells where the DFS Option passive (1)
is enabled Scanning Mode is forced active (2)
to Passive.
*Antenna Gain Applicable to all units. Read-write in Integer
(*AirInterface 17) units where *AntennaGainChange 0-50 (dB)
is supported. Read-only in units -1 (not configurable) means
where *AntennaGainChange is not “Not Set Yet”.
supported. The net gain (including -2 (not configurable) means
cable attenuation for detached “Don’t Care”.
antennas) of the antenna.
*SpectrumAnalysisParameters Spectrum Analysis Parameters.
(*AirInterface 18)
*SpectrumAnalysisChannelScanPeriod Applicable to all units. The period in Integer
(*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 1) seconds of staying on each channel Range: 2-30 seconds.
for information gathering during each
cycle when performing Spectrum
analysis.
*SpectrumAnalysisChannelScanCycles Applicable to all units. The number Integer

(*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 2) of scanning cycles when performing Range: 1-100 seconds.
Spectrum Analysis.
*AutomaticChannelSelection Applicable to AU/BU. Defines Integer
(*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 3) weather the AU/BU shall choose the disable (1),
most noise free channel upon enable (2),
startup after spectrum analysis. na (255)
*SpectrumAnalysisActivation Applicable to all units. Integer
(*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 4) Activates the spectrum analysis. The cancelOperation (1),
unit is automatically reset upon activateNow (2)
activation.
*SpectrumAnalysisStatus Applicable to all units. Read-only. Integer
(*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 5) Indicates whether the unit is inactive (1),
currently performing a spectrum currentlyActive (2)
analysis process.

235

*ResetSpectrumCounters Applicable to all units. Resets the Integer
(*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 6) spectrum analysis counters. cancelOperation (1),
resetCounters (2)
*SpectrumAnalysisInformationTable Applicable to all units. Not
(*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 7) accessible. The spectrum analysis
information table.
*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry Applicable to all units. Not
(*SpectrumAnalysisInformationTable 1) accessible. An entry in the spectrum
analysis information table.
*SpectrumAnalysisInformationTableIdx Applicable to all units. Read-only. A
(*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry 1) table index for a Spectrum Analysis
Information Entry in the
Spectrum Analysis Information
Table.
*SpectrumAnalysisInformationChannel Applicable to all units. Read-only. DisplayString
(*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry 2) The channel’s frequency of the
relevant entry in the Spectrum
Analysis Information Table.
*SpectrumAnalysisInformationSignalCou Applicable to all units. Read-only. Integer
nt The number of signals (excluding
(*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry 3) OFDM frames) detected in the
channel.
*SpectrumAnalysisInformationSignalSNR Applicable to all units. Read-only. Integer
(*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry 4) The approximate SNR of the signals
(excluding OFDM frames) detected
in the relevant channel.
*SpectrumAnalysisInformationSignalWidt Applicable to all units. Read-only. Integer
h The average width in microseconds
(*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry 5) of the signals (excluding OFDM
frames) detected in the relevant
channel.
*SpectrumAnalysisInformationOFDMFra Applicable to all units. Read-only. Integer
mes The number of OFDM frames
(*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry 6) received in the relevant channel.
* MaxNumOfAssociationsLimit Applicable to AU only. Not Integer
(*AirInterface 19) applicable to BreezeNET B AU-BS, AU-SA: If Data
products. Shows the limit for the Encryption is enabled, the
number of SUs that can be upper limit is 124. Otherwise
associated with the AU. it is 512.
version below 4.0: 5.
version 4.0 and higher: 8
BreezeNET B products
return 65535.
*Disassociate Disassociation parameters.
(*AirInterface 20)
*DisassociateAllSUs Applicable to AU. Disassociate ass Integer
(*Disassociate 1) SUs. cancelOperation (1),
disassociateAllSUs (2)
*DisassociateSuByMacAddress Applicable to AU. Disassociate MacAddress
(*Disassociate 2) specified SU.

236
breezeAccessVLMib

*TxControl Applicable to AU/BU. Enables to turn Integer
(*AirInterface 21) the transmitter Off and On. If set to on(1)
ethernetStatusControl, the unit will off (2)
not transmit if the Ethernet link is ethernetStatusControl 3)
down. This parameter can be
configured only via the ethernet port.
In units with SW version below 4.0,
the unit is reset automatically upon
configuration. For unit with SW
version 4.0 and higher this
parameter is applied in run-time.
*LostBeaconsWatchdogThreshold Applicable to AU/BU only. The Integer
(*AirInterface 22) number of unsuccessful consecutive 0, 100-1000
transmissions of beacons before
Internal refresh is performed. 0
means that the lost beacons
watchdog is not used and internal
refresh is not performed.
*TransmitPower Applicable to all units with SW Integer
(*AirInterface 23) version 4.0 and higher. The
uniform transmit power for all
modulation levels. For a specific
modulation level the effective
transmit power (brzaccVLTxPower)
is the minimum between the uniform
transmit power and the maximum
transmit power for that modulation
level.
*MaximumTxPower Applicable to only SU/RB with SW Integer
(*AirInterface 24) version 4.0 and higher. The
Maximum Transmit Power for all
modulation levels. The Maximum
Transmit Power for a specific
modulation level is the minimum
between this parameter and the
hardware limitation for that
modulation level.

237
E.2.7 Service Parameters

*ServiceParameters Applicable to all units.
(breezeAccessVLMib 7) Service parameters.
*MirDownlink Applicable to SU/RB. The Integer
(*ServiceParameters 2) Maximum Information Rate Range for Set:
(MIR) from AU/BU to SU-3 with SW version below
SU/RB. MIR must be above 4.0: 128 – 2,048 (Kbps)
brzaccVLCirDownlink value. SU-3 with SW version 4.0 or
higher: 128 – 3,072 (Kbps)
SU-6 with SW version below
4.0: 128 – 3,968 (Kbps)
SU-6 with SW version 4.0 or
higher: 128 – 6,016 (Kbps)
SU-54: 128 – 53,888 (Kbps)
SU-I: 128 – 6,016 (Kbps)
RB-14: 128 – 6,912 (Kbps)
RB-28: 128 – 22,016 (Kbps)
RB-100: 128-107,904 (Kbps)
The actual value (Get) will be
the entered value rounded to
the nearest multiple of 128
(N*128)
*MirUplink Applicable to SU/RB. The Integer
(*ServiceParameters 3) Maximum Information Rate Range for Set:
(MIR) from SU/RB to SU-3 with SW version below
AU/BU. MIR must be above 4.0: 128 – 2,048 (Kbps)
brzaccVLCirUplink value. SU-3 with SW version 4.0 or
higher: 128 – 3,072 (Kbps)
4.0: 128 – 3,968 (Kbps)
higher: 128 – 6,016 (Kbps)
SU-54: 128 – 53,888 (Kbps)
SU-I: 128 – 2,048 (Kbps)
RB-14: 128 – 6,912 (Kbps)
RB-28: 128 – 22,016 (Kbps)
RB-100: 128-107,904 (Kbps)
(N*128)

238
breezeAccessVLMib

*CirDownlink Applicable to SU only. Not Integer
(*ServiceParameters 4) applicable to BreezeNET B Range for Set:
products. The Committed SU-3 with SW version below
Information Rate (CIR) from 4.0: 0 – 2,048 (Kbps)
AU to SU. SU-3 with SW version 4.0 or
CIR must be below higher: 0 – 3,072 (Kbps)
brzaccVLMirDownlink value. SU-6 with SW version below
4.0: 0 – 3,968 (Kbps)
higher: 0 – 6,016 (Kbps)
SU-54: 0 – 45,056 (Kbps)
SU-I: 0 –6,016 (Kbps)
(N*128).
BreezeNET B products will
return 65535 for na.
*CirUplink Applicable to SU only. Not Integer
(*ServiceParameters 5) applicable to BreezeNET B Integer
products. The Committed Range for Set:
Information Rate (CIR) from SU-3 with SW version below
SU to AU. 4.0: 0 – 2,048 (Kbps)
CIR must be below SU-3 with SW version 4.0 or
brzaccVLMirUplink value. higher: 0 – 3,072 (Kbps)
4.0: 0 – 3,968 (Kbps)
higher: 0 – 6,016 (Kbps)
SU-54: 0 – 45,056 (Kbps)
SU-I: 0 – 2,048 (Kbps)
(N*128).
BreezeNET B products will
return 65535 for na.
*MaxDelay Applicable to SU only. Not Integer
(*ServiceParameters 6) applicable to BreezeNET B Range: 300 - 10000
products. The maximal time (milliseconds)
packets may be delayed by BreezeNET B products will
the CIR\MIR mechanism. return 65535 for na.
Above the configured
maximal period the packets
are discarded.
*MaxBurstDuration Applicable to AU and SU. Integer
(*ServiceParameters 7) Not applicable to Range: 0 – 2000
BreezeNET B products. The (milliseconds)
maximum time during which BreezeNET B products will
inactivity bonus time can be return 65535 for na.
accumulated for future burst
transmissions.
*GracefulDegradationLimit Applicable to AU only. Not Integer

(*ServiceParameters 8) applicable to BreezeNET B Range: 0 – 70 (%)
products. The maximum na (255)
limit for activating the
graceful degradation
algorithm.

239

*MirOnlyOption Applicable only to AU. Not Integer
(*ServiceParameters 9) applicable to BreezeNET B disable (1)
products. When enabled, it enable (2)
overrides the CIR/MIR na (255)
algorithm for determining
actual information rate and
forces the algorithm to
operate with MIR
parameters’ settings only.
When enabled, the Graceful
Degradation algorithm is
disabled.
*TrafficPrioritization Traffic Prioritization
(*ServiceParameters 10) parameters. Applicable to all
units.
*VLTrafficPriVLAN VLAN Prioritization
(*TrafficPrioritization 1) parameters. Applicable to all
units.
*LANPriorityThreshold Applicable to all units. If the Integer
(*VLTrafficPriVLAN 1) VLAN Priority's value of the 0-7
frame is less than or equal
to this threshold, the frame
will get Low priority,
otherwise the frame will get
High priority. Untagged
frames will get Low priority.
*TrafficPriIPToS ToS Prioritization
(*TrafficPrioritization 2) parameters. Applicable to all
units.
*ToSPrioritizationOption Applicable to all units. Integer
(*TrafficPriIPToS 1) Disable/Enable IP ToS disable(1),
prioritization and chooses ipPrecedence(2),
the interpretation of the IP dSCP(3)
ToS field from IP header:
ipPrecedence(2): The IP
ToS field is defined by
RFC791. In this case the
prioritization will be done
using the Precedence sub-
field of IP ToS. This sub-
field has 3 bits, so it can be
between 0 and 7.
dSCP(3): The IP ToS field is
defined by RFC2474. In this
case the prioritization will be
done using the DSCP sub-
field. The size of the sub-
field is 6 bits, so the range is
0 to 63.

240
breezeAccessVLMib

*IPPrecedenceThreshold Applicable to all units. The Integer
(*TrafficPriIPToS 2) threshold of Precedence 0-7
sub-field of IP ToS field from
IP Header (RFC791) to be
used when the ToS
Prioritization Option is set to
IP Precedence. If the
Precedence sub-field of a
frame is less than or equal
to this threshold the frame
will have Low priority,
otherwise it will get High
priority.
*IPDSCPThreshold Applicable to all units. The Integer
(*TrafficPriIPToS 3) threshold of DSCP sub-field 0-63
of IP ToS field from IP
Header (RFC2474) to be
used when ToS
Prioritization Option is set to
DSCP. If the DSCP sub-field
of a frame is less than or
equal to this threshold the
frame will have Low priority,
otherwise it will get High
priority.
*TrafficPriUdpTcpPortRange UDP/TCP Port Ranges
(*TrafficPrioritization 3) Prioritization parameters.
Applicable to all units.
*UdpTcpPortRangePrioritizationOption Applicable to all units. Integer
(*TrafficPriUdpTcpPortRange 1) Disable/Enable Prioritization disable(1),
using UDP and/or TCP Port udpOnly(2),
Ranges. tcpOnly(3),
udpOnly(2): prioritization will udpANDtcp(4)
be done only for UDP
packets
tcpOnly(3): prioritization will
be done only for TCP
packets
udpANDtcp(4): prioritization
will be done for UDP and
TCP packets
*UdpPortRangeConfig UDP Port Range
(*TrafficPriUdpTcpPortRange 2) parameters. Applicable to all
units.
*UdpPortPriRTPRTCP Applicable to all units. Integer
(*UdpPortRangeConfig 1) RTP/RTCP ports rtpANDrtcp(1),
prioritization option for UDP rtpOnly(2)
packet.
rtpANDrtcp(1): the possible
RTP and RTCP packet with
destination port in the
defined port ranges will get
High priority.
rtpOnly(2): only possible
RTP packet (packet with
even destination port) with
High priority.

241

*UdpPortRangeNum Applicable to all units. Read- Integer
(*UdpPortRangeConfig 2) only. The number of entries
in the UDP Port Range
Table.
*UdpPortRangeTable Applicable to all units. Not
(*UdpPortRangeConfig 3) accessible. A table of UDP
port ranges used for
prioritization. The user can
define up to 64 ranges. An
entry is empty if start is
65535 and end is 0.
*UdpPortRangeEntry Applicable to all units. Not
(*UdpPortRangeTable 1) accessible. A UDP Port
Ranges Table entry.
*UdpPortRangeStart Applicable to all units. Read- Integer
(*UdpPortRangeEntry 1) only. Start port of an UDP 0-65535
Port Range
*UdpPortRangeEnd Applicable to all units. Read- Integer
(*UdpPortRangeEntry 2) only. End port of an UDP 0-65535
Port Range
*UdpPortRangeIdx Applicable to all units. Read- Integer
(*UdpPortRangeEntry 3) only. Index of an UDP Port 1-64
Range entry
*UdpPortRangeAdd Applicable to all units. Add DisplayString
(*UdpPortRangeConfig 4) port range(s) to UDP Port A range is defined by
Ranges Table. <start>-<end> or <start>,
Get operation will return an where <start> is the Start
empty string. Port of the range and <end>
is the End Port. If only
<start> is specified the range
is <start>-<start>. The value
of <start> and <end> are
between 0 and 65535.
The user can add several
ranges using a comma to
separate between ranges.
Example: 10-26,99,987-900.
*UdpPortRangeDelete Applicable to all units. DisplayString
(*UdpPortRangeConfig 5) Delete port range(s) from A range is defined by
UDP Port Ranges Table. <start>-<end> or <start>,
The user can delete several
Example: 10-26,99,987-900.
*UdpPortRangeDeleteAll Applicable to all units. Integer
(*UdpPortRangeConfig 6) Delete all entries form UDP deleteAll(1),
Port Ranges Table. Get cancelOperation (2)
operation will return 1
*TcpPortRangeConfig UDP Port Range
(*TrafficPriUdpTcpPortRange 3) parameters. Applicable to all
units.

242
breezeAccessVLMib

*TcpPortPriRTPRTCP Applicable to all units. Integer
(*TcpPortRangeConfig 1) RTP/RTCP ports rtpANDrtcp(1),
prioritization option for TCP rtpOnly(2)
packets.
rtpANDrtcp(1): the possible
RTP and RTCP packet with
High priority.
rtpOnly(2): only possible
RTP packet (packet with
even destination port) with
High priority.
*TcpPortRangeNum Applicable to all units. Read- Integer
(*TcpPortRangeConfig 2) only. The number of entries
in the TCP Port Range
Table.
*TcpPortRangeTable Applicable to all units. Not
(*TcpPortRangeConfig 3) accessible. A table of TCP
port ranges used for
prioritization. The user can
define up to 64 ranges. An
entry is empty if start is
65535 and end is 0.
*TcpPortRangeEntry Applicable to all units. Not
(*TcpPortRangeTable 1) accessible. A TCP Port
Ranges Table entry.
*TcpPortRangeStart Applicable to all units. Read- Integer
(*TcpPortRangeEntry 1) only. Start port of an TCP 0-65535
Port Range
*TcpPortRangeEnd Applicable to all units. Read- Integer
(*TcpPortRangeEntry 2) only. End port of an TCP 0-65535
Port Range
*TcpPortRangeIdx Applicable to all units. Read- Integer
(*TcpPortRangeEntry 3) only. Index of an TCP Port 1-64
Range entry
*TcpPortRangeAdd Applicable to all units. Add DisplayString
(*TcpPortRangeConfig 4) port range(s) to TCP Port A range is defined by
Ranges Table. <start>-<end> or <start>,
The user can add several
Example: 10-26,99,987-900.

243

*TcpPortRangeDelete Applicable to all units. DisplayString
(*TcpPortRangeConfig 5) Delete port range(s) from A range is defined by
TCP Port Ranges Table. <start>-<end> or <start>,
The user can delete several
Example: 10-26,99,987-900.
*TcpPortRangeDeleteAll Applicable to all units. Integer
(*TcpPortRangeConfig 6) Delete all entries form TCP deleteAll(1),
Port Ranges Table. Get cancelOperation (2)
operation will return 1
*WirelessLinkPrioritization Wireless Link Prioritization
(*TrafficPrioritization 4) parameters.
*WirelessLinkPrioritizationOption Applicable only to AU with a Integer
(*WirelessLinkPrioritization 1) license for the Wireless Link disable (1)
Prioritization feature and to enable (2)
BU-100. Enable/disable the na (255)
traffic prioritization over the
Wireless Link.
*lowPriorityAIFS Applicable only to AU with a Integer
(*WirelessLinkPrioritization 2) license for the Wireless Link 3-254
Prioritization feature and to
BU-100. Applicable only if
the Wireless Link
Prioritization Option is
enabled. Define the AIFS
(Arbitration Inter-frame
Space) that will be used for
transmitting Low Priority
Traffic
*HWRetriesHighPriority Applicable only to AU with a Integer
the Wireless Link
enabled. Defines the
Maximum number of HW
Retries for a unicast data
packet that has High
Priority.
*HWRetriesLowPriority Applicable only to AU with a Integer
the Wireless Link
Maximum number of HW
Retries for a unicast data
packet that has Low Priority.

244
breezeAccessVLMib

*AUBurstDurationHighPriority Applicable only to AU with a Integer
the Wireless Link
Maximum duration of burst
that can be done by AU/BU
with High Priority packets.
The time is given in 250
microseconds units.
*AUBurstDurationLowPriority Applicable only to AU with a Integer
the Wireless Link
that can be done by AU/BU
with Low Priority packets.
microseconds units.
*SUBurstDurationHighPriority Applicable only to AU with a Integer
the Wireless Link
that can be done by SU/RB
with High Priority packets.
microseconds units.
*SUBurstDurationLowPriority Applicable only to AU with a Integer
the Wireless Link
that can be done by SU/RB
with Low Priority packets.
microseconds units.
*Drap DRAP Parameters.
(*ServiceParameters 11) Applicable only to AU with
SW version 4.0 and higher.
Not applicable to
BreezeNET B products.
*DrapSupport Disable/Enable the DRAP Integer
(*Drap 1) feature. disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
*DrapUdpPort The UDP port used for the Integer
(*Drap 2) DRAP server. 8000-8200

245

*DrapMaxNumberOfVoiceCalls The maximum number of Integer
(*Drap 3) voice calls that can be 0-255
supported by the AU when
DRAP is enabled.
*DrapTTL The maximum time in Integer
(*Drap 4) seconds between two 1-255
allocation requests.
*DrapNoOfActiveVoiceCalls Read-only. The current total Integer
(*Drap 5) number of active voice calls.
*LowPriorityTrafficMinimumPercent The minimum percent of the Integer
(*ServiceParameters 12) traffic rate that is allocated 0-100
to the low priority traffic.
E.2.8 User Filtering Parameters

*UserFilterParams Applicable to SU/RB. User
(breezeAccessVLMib 8) filtering parameters.
*UserFilterOption Applicable to SU/RB. Integer
(*UserFilterParams 1) Defines user-filtering disable (1)
options. ipOnly (2)
disable: No filtering. userDefinedAddrOnly (3)
iPOnly: Only IP protocol pPPoEOnly (4)
packets pass. na (255)
userDefinedAddrOnly: Only
IP frames from/to user
defined IP addresses pass.
pPPoE Only: Only PPPoE
frames pass.
*IpFilterTable Applicable to SU/RB. A
(*UserFilterParams 2) table of up to 8 user defined
addresses, or address
groups, to be used if the
User Filtering Option
(*UserFilterOption) is
userDefinedAddrOnly. Not
accessible.
*IpFilterEntry Applicable to SU/RB. An IP
(*IpFilterTable 1) Filter table entry. Not
accessible.
*IpID Applicable to SU/RB. An IP IP Address
(*IpFilterEntry 1) address in the IP Filter
table.
*MaskID Applicable to SU/RB. An IP IP Address
(*IpFilterEntry 2) mask for the IP Filter entry.
Either a mask or a range,
but not both can be used to
define an address group. If
the range is other than 0,
than the mask is ignored
and only the range value is
used to define the address
group.

246
breezeAccessVLMib

*IpFilterRange Applicable to SU/RB. An Integer
(*IpFilterEntry 3) address range for the IP 0 - 255
Filter entry. The first
address in the range is the
IP address (*iPID). O means
that the range is not used.
Either a mask or a range,
but not both can be used to
define an address group. If
the range is other than 0,
than the mask is ignored
and only the range value is
used to define the address
group.
*IpFilterIdx Applicable to SU/RB. Integer
(*IpFilterEntry 4) Read-only. A table index for 1-8
the IP Filter entry.
*DeleteOneUserFilter Applicable to SU/RB. Integer
(*UserFilterParams 3) Deletes a single selected deletefirstEntry (1)
entry from the IP Filter table. deletesecondEntry (2)
deletethirdEntry (3)
deletefourthEntry (4)
deletefifthEntry (5)
deletesixthEntry (6)
deleteseventhEntry (7)
deleteeighthEntry (8)
cancelOperation (9)
na (255)
*DeleteAllUserFilters Applicable to SU/RB. Integer
(*UserFilterParams 4) Deletes all entries from the deleteAll (1)
IP Filter table. cancelOperation (2)
na (255)
*DHCPUnicastOverrideFilter Applicable to SU/RB. Integer
(*UserFilterParams 5) Enables or disables the disable (1)
unicast DHCP messages, enable(2)
overriding the IP Filtering na (255)
option.
E.2.9 Security Parameters

*SecurityParams
*AuthenticationAlgorithm Applicable to all units. Integer
(*SecurityParameters 1) Enables/disables the openSystem (1)
authentication encryption sharedKey (2)
option.
openSystem: Authentication
messages are not encrypted.
sharedKey : Authentication
messages are encrypted.
*DefaultKey Applicable to SU/RB. The ID Integer
(*SecurityParameters 2) of the key to be used for Range: 1 to 4.
encrypting/decrypting the
authentication messages.

247

*DataEncryptionOption Applicable to all units. Integer
(*SecurityParameters 3) Enables/disables the data disable (1)
encryption option. enable (2)
*DefaultMulticastKey Applicable to AU/RB. The ID Integer
(*SecurityParameters 4) of the key to be used for Range: 1 to 4.
encrypting/decrypting
multicasts.
*SecurityMode Applicable to all units. The Integer
(*SecurityParameters 5) encryption algorithm to be wep (1)
used for authentication aesOCB (2)
messages and/or data fips197 (3)
encryption. The fips197 option
is applicable only to units with
HW revision C or higher,
provided they have a license
to use FIPS 197 algorithm.
*PromiscuousAuthenticationMode Applicable to AU/RB. Integer
(*SecurityParameters 6) Enabling/disabling the disable (1)
promiscuous mode, where enable (2)
any SU can be authenticated
by and communicate with the
AU.
*Key1 Applicable to all units. Key DisplayString
(*SecurityParameters 7) number 1. Accessible only 32 hexadecimal
with SNMP Write Community digits
String (administrator
password).
password).
password).
password).
*SecurityModeSupport Applicable to all units. Returns Integer (0..7)
(SecurityParameters 12) types of encryption that are No encryption (0)
supported. WEP (1)
AES/OCB (2)
WEP + AES/OCB
(3)
FIPS-197 (4)
WEP + FIPS-197 (5)
AES/OCB + FIPS-
197 (6)
WEP + AES/OCB +
FIPS-197 (7)

248
breezeAccessVLMib
E.2.10 Performance Parameters

*PerformanceParams
*RTSThreshold Applicable to SU and AU. Not Integer
(*PerformanceParams 1) applicable to BreezeNET B 20-4032 (bytes)
products. The minimum frame size (20-1600 for units running
that requires an RTS/CTS SW version below 3.0, 20-
handshake. 3400 for units with SW
version 3.0)
na (65535)
*MinContentionWindow Applicable to SU, AU, BU-100 and Integer
(*PerformanceParams 3) RB-100. The initial value to be 0, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255,
used by the contention window 511, 1023.
calculation algorithm. A value of 0 na (65535)
disables the back-off algorithm. BU/RB-14/28 will return
65535
*MaxContentionWindow Applicable to SU, AU, BU-100 and Integer
(*PerformanceParams 4) RB-100. The maximum value to be 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255,
used by the contention window 511, 1023
calculation algorithm. na (65535)
BU/RB-14/28 will return
65535
*MaximumModulationLevel Applicable to all units. If the Integer
(*PerformanceParams 5) Adaptive Modulation algorithm is Range: 1 to 8*
enabled, it sets the maximum
modulation level to be used. If The *Range depends on HW
Adaptive Modulation algorithm is version and Min/Max
disabled, it set the fixed modulation Modulation Levels as
level to be used. defined by Sub-Band.
*MulticastModulationLevel Applicable to AU/BU. The Integer
(*PerformanceParams 6) modulation level for multicast and Range: 1 to 8*
broadcast data frames.
*Range depends on HW
version and Min/Max
Modulation Levels as
defined by Sub-Band.
*AvgSNRMemoryFactor Applicable to all units. The weight DisplayString
(*PerformanceParams 7) of history in average RSSI -1 (Disregard History) to 32
calculation for the ATPC (AU only)
and Adaptive Modulation algorithm.
The higher is the value, the higher
is the weight of history
*HardwareRetries Applicable to all units. Not Integer
(*PerformanceParams 8) applicable if Wireless Link 1-14 for units with SW
Prioritization is enabled. The version 4.0 and higher.
maximum number of trials to 1-15 for units with SW
transmit an unacknowledged frame version below 4.0.
in each Hardware Retrials phase.
*AdaptiveModulationParams Adaptive Modulation Parameters
(*PerformanceParams 9)
*AdaptiveModulationAlgorithmOption Applicable to all units. Integer
(*AdaptiveModulationParams 1) Enabling/disabling the Adaptive disable (1)
Modulation algorithm. enable (2)

249

*SoftwareRetrySupport Applicable to all units. Read- Integer
(*AdaptiveModulationParams 2) only for units with version 2.0. Not disable (1)
applicable for units with SW version enable (2)
3.0 and higher. The status of the na (255)
Software Retry mechanism.
Enabled when the Adaptive
Modulation algorithm is enabled
and the Burst Mode Option is
disabled. Otherwise it is disabled.
*NumberOfSoftwareRetries Applicable to all units. Integer
(*AdaptiveModulationParams 3) Read-only for units with version 0-14
2.0. Not applicable for units with
SW version 3.0 and higher. The
maximum number of times to use
the Software Retry mechanism
when it is enabled.
*MinimumIntervalBetweenAdaptiveModulation Applicable to all units. The Integer
AlgorithmMessages minimum interval between two 1-3600 (seconds)
(*AdaptiveModulationParams 4) consecutive adaptive modulation
algorithm messages carrying
information on the SNR of received
signals.
*AdaptiveModulationDecisionThresholds Applicable to all units. Defines the Integer
(*AdaptiveModulationParams 5) setting of thresholds for the rate normal (1)
decision algorithm. high (2) should high (2)
typically be used when the SNR is na (255)
lower than 13 dB.
*BurstMode Burst Mode Parameters. Applicable
(*PerformanceParams 10) to all units. Not applicable if
Wireless Link Prioritization is
enabled.
*BurstModeOption Applicable to all units. Applicable Integer
(*BurstMode 1) only if Burst Mode Option is disable (1)
supported by the Sub-Band. Not enable (2)
applicable if Wireless Link blocked (3)
Prioritization is enabled. na (255)
Enabling/disabling burst mode
operation.
In SU/RB with HW Revision B or
lower blocked (3) value is returned
when Security Mode is Wep, Data
Encryption Option is Enabled and
Burst option is Enabled.
In AU/BU with HW Revision B or
lower blocked (3) value is returned
when Dfs Option is Enabled and
Burst mode is enabled.
*BurstInterval Applicable to all units. Not Integer
(*BurstMode 2) applicable if Wireless Link 1-the maximum value as
Prioritization is enabled. The burst defined in the Sub-Band.
interval in milliseconds. (milliseconds)
na (255)
*ConcatenationParameters Concatenation Parameters.
(*PerformanceParams 11) Applicable to all units.
*ConcatenationOption Applicable to all units. Integer
(*ConcatenationParameters 1) Enabling/disabling the disable (1)
concatenation mechanism. enable (2)
na (255)

250
breezeAccessVLMib

*ConcatenationMaximumNumberOfFrames Applicable to all units. Not Integer
(*ConcatenationParameters 2) applicable to units with SW version 2–8
4.0 and higher. Defines the
maximum number of data frames
that can be concatenated.
*ConcatenationMaxFrameSize Applicable to all units with SW Integer
(*ConcatenationParameters 3) version 4.0 and higher. Defines the Range: 256 to 2200 (bytes)
maximum size of a concatenated for BU/RB-14 BU/RB-28,
frame. or for AU/SU with HW
revision A or B.
256 to 4032 (bytes) for
AU/SU with HW Revision
C or higher and BU/RB-
100.
E.2.11 Site Survey Parameters

*SiteSurvey
*AverageReceiveSNR Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The Integer
(*SiteSurvey 1) average Signal to Noise Ratio of
received frames.
*TrafficStatistics Applicable to all units. Traffic statistics
(*SiteSurvey 2) parameters.
*ResetTrafficCounters Applicable to all units. Resets the traffic Integer
(*TrafficStatistics 1) counters. reset (1)
cancel (2)
*EthCounters Applicable to all units. Ethernet
(*TrafficStatistics 2) counters.
*TotalRxFramesViaEthernet Applicable to all units. Read-only. Total Counter 32
(*EthCounters 1) number of frames received via the
Ethernet port.
*TxWirelessToEthernet Applicable to all units. Read-only. Total Counter 32
(*EthCounters 2) number of frames transmitted to the
Ethernet port.
*WirelessLinkCounters Applicable to all units. Wireless link
(*TrafficStatistics 3) counters.
*TxFramesToWireless Transmitted frames counters
(*WirelessLinkCounters 1)
*AUBeaconsToWireless Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*TxFramesToWireless 1) number of Beacon frames transmitted to
the wireless medium.
*DataAndOtherMngFramesToWireless Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*TxFramesToWireless 3) number of data and other management
frames (excluding beacons) transmitted
to the wireless medium. The count
includes multicasts/broadcasts and one
count for each unicast frame transmitted
successfully (excluding
retransmissions).

251

*TotalTxFramesToWireless Applicable to all units. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*TxFramesToWireless 4) number of frames transmitted to the
wireless medium. The count includes
one count for each data frame
transmitted successfully (excluding
retransmissions), and the number of
transmitted control and wireless
management frames.
*TotalTransmitted Unicasts Applicable to AU. Not applicable to Counter 32
(*TxFramesToWireless 5) BreezeNET B products. Read-only. The
total number of unicast frames
successfully transmitted to the wireless
medium, excluding retransmissions.
*TotalTransmittedConcatenatedFramesDouble Applicable to all units Read-only. The Counter 32
(*TxFramesToWireless 6) total number of double concatenated
frames that were successfully
transmitted to the wireless medium,
excluding retransmissions.
*TotalTransmittedConcatenatedFramesSingle Applicable to all units Read-only. The Counter 32
(*TxFramesToWireless 7) total number of single concatenated
frames that were successfully
transmitted to the wireless medium,
excluding retransmissions.
*TotalTransmittedConcatenatedFramesMore Applicable to all units Read-only. The Counter 32
(*TxFramesToWireless 8) total number of concatenated frames
with more than two data frames that
were successfully transmitted to the
wireless medium, excluding
retransmissions.
*TotalRxFramesFromWireless Applicable to all units. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*WirelessLinkCounters 2) total number of frames received from
the wireless medium. The count
includes data and control and wireless
management frames, including beacons
received from the AU. The count does
not include frames discarded internally,
bad frames and duplicate frames.
*TotalRetransmittedFrames Applicable to all units. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*WirelessLinkCounters 3) total number of retransmissions of data
frames (counts all unsuccessful
transmissions/retransmissions).
*FramesDropped Applicable to all units. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*WirelessLinkCounters 4) number of dropped frames. The frames
retransmitted to the maximum allowed
number of retransmissions without being
acknowledged.
*DataFramesSubmittedToBridge Submitted frames counters
(*WirelessLinkCounters 5)
*DataFramesSubmittedViaHighQueue Applicable to all units. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*DataFramesSubmittedToBridge 1) number of data frames submitted to the
internal bridge via the high priority
queue for transmission to the wireless
medium.
*DataFramesSubmittedViaMidQueue Applicable to all units. Read-only. The Counter 32
internal bridge via the mid priority queue
for transmission to the wireless medium.

252
breezeAccessVLMib

*DataFramesSubmittedViaLowQueue Applicable to all units. Read-only. The Counter 32
internal bridge via the low priority queue
for transmission to the wireless medium.
*TotalNoOfDataFramesSubmitted Applicable to all units. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*DataFramesSubmittedToBridge 4) total number of data frames submitted to
the internal bridge for transmission to
the wireless medium.
*TotalRecievedDataFrames Applicable to all units. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*WirelessLinkCounters 6) total number of data frames received
from the wireless medium, including
duplicate frames.
*RecievedBadFrames Applicable to all units. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*WirelessLinkCounters 7) number of frames received from the
wireless medium with errors (CRC
errors).
*NoOfDuplicateFramesDiscarded Applicable to all units. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*WirelessLinkCounters 8) number of frames discarded due to
receiving multiple copies.
*InternallyDiscardedMirCir Applicable to all units. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*WirelessLinkCounters 9) number of data frames received from
the Ethernet port that were discarded by
the MIR/CIR mechanism to avoid
exceeding the maximum allowed
information rate
*TotalRxConcatenatedFramesDouble Applicable to all units Read-only. The Counter 32
(*WirelessLinkCounters 10) total number of double concatenated
frames that were received from the
wireless medium, including duplicate
frames.
*TotalRxConcatenatedFramesSingle Applicable to all units Read-only. The Counter 32
(*WirelessLinkCounters 11) total number of single concatenated
frames that were received from the
wireless medium, including duplicate
frames.
*TotalRxConcatenatedFramesMore Applicable to all units Read-only. The Counter 32
(*WirelessLinkCounters 12) total number of concatenated frames
with more than two data frames that
were received from the wireless
medium, including duplicate frames.
*WirelessLinkEvents Applicable to all units. Wireless link
(*TrafficStatistics 4) event counters.
*TxEvents Applicable to all units. Read-only. Tx
(*WirelessLinkEvents 1) event counters.
*DroppedFrameEvents Applicable to all units. The number Counter 32
(*TxEvents 1) frames that were dropped because they
were retransmitted to the maximum
allowed number of retransmissions
without being acknowledged.
*FramesDelayedDueToSwRetry Applicable to all units. Not applicable for Counter 32
(*TxEvents 2) units running SW version 3.0 and
higher. The number of frames that were
delayed because the SW retry algorithm
was activated on a previous frame
designated for the same recipient.
*Underrun Events Applicable to all units. The number of Counter 32
(*TxEvents 3) frames whose transmission was aborted
because the rate of submitting frames
for transmission exceeds the available
transmission capability.

253

*OtherTxEvents Applicable to all units. The number of Tx Counter 32
(*TxEvents 4) events due to problems other than those
represented by the other Tx Events
counters.
*TotalTxEvents Applicable to all units. The total number Counter 32
(*TxEvents 5) of Tx events.
*RxEvents Applicable to all units. Read-only. Rx
(*WirelessLinkEvents 2) errors counters.
*PhyErrors Applicable to all units. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*RxErrors 1) number of unidentified signals.
*CRCEvents Applicable to all units. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*RxEvents 2) number of frames received from the
wireless medium containing CRC errors.
*OverrunEvents Applicable to all units. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*RxEvents 3) number of frames that were discarded
because the receive rate exceeded the
processing capability or the capacity of
the Ethernet port.
*RxDecryptEvents Applicable to all units. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*RxEvents 4) number of frames that were not received
properly due to a problem in the data
decryption mechanism.
*TotalRxEvents Applicable to all units. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*RxEvents 5) total number of Rx events.
*PerModulationLevelCounters Per Modulation Level Counters.
(*TrafficStatistics 5)
*ResetPerModulationLevelCounters Applicable to all units. Resets the Per Integer
(*PerModulationLevelCounters 1) Modulation Level Counters resetCounters (1)
cancel (2)
*SUPerModulationLevelCountersTable Applicable to SU/RB. Not accessible.
(*PerModulationLevelCounters 2) The Per Modulation Level Counters
Table.
*SUPerModulationLevelCountersEntry Applicable to SU/RB. Not accessible. An
(*PerModulationLevelCountersTable 1) entry in the Per Modulation Level
Counters Table.
*SUPerModulationLevelCountersTableIdx Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The
(*PerModulationLevelCountersEntry 1) index of an entry in the Per Modulation
Level Counters Table.
*SUPerModulationLevelCountersApplicable Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The Integer
ModulationLeve modulation level applicable for the entry Range: 1 to 8*
(*PerModulationLevelCountersEntry 2) in the Per Modulation Level Counters
Table. *Level 8 is not
applicable to devices
with HW revision A
*SUPerModulationLevelCountersTxSuccess Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*PerModulationLevelCountersEntry 3) total number of successfully transmitted
unicasts at the applicable modulation
level.
*SUPerModulationLevelCountersTxFailed Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The Counter 32
(*PerModulationLevelCountersEntry 4) total number of failures to successfully
transmit a unicast frame
during a HW Retry cycle at the
applicable modulation level.
*AverageModulationLevel Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The Integer
(*PerModulationLevelCounters 3) average modulation level for successful 1-8.
transmission (rounded to nearest
integer) since last reset of the Per
Modulation Level counters.
*MacAddressDatabase MAC Address Database
(*SiteSurvey 5)

254
breezeAccessVLMib

*AUMacAddressDatabase AU MAC Address Database
(*MacAddressDatabase 1)
*AdbResetAllCounters Applicable to AU/BU. Resets all the Integer
(*AUMacAddressDatabase 1) counters for all SUs in the MAC Address reset (1)
Database. noReset (2)
*AUAdbTable Applicable to AU/BU. Not accessible.
(*AUMacAddressDatabase 2) The AU MAC Address Database Table.
*AUAdbEntry Applicable to AU/BU. Not accessible. An
(*AUAdbTable 1) entry in the AU MAC Address Database
Table.
*AdbIndex Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 1) Index of an entry in the AU MAC
Address Database Table.
*AdbMacAddress Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The MAC Address
(*AUAdbEntry 2) MAC Address of an SU entry in the AU
MAC Address Database Table.
*AdbStatus Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 3) wireless status of the relevant SU. associated (1)
authenticated (2)
notAuthenticated (3)
*AdbSwVersion Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Display String
(*AUAdbEntry 4) SW Version of the relevant SU.
*AdbSNR Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 5) average Signal to Noise Ratio in dB of 0-60
frames received by the AU from the
relevant SU.
*AdbMaxModulationLevel Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 6) value configured in the relevant SU for Range: 1 to 8*
the Maximum Modulation Level
parameter. *Level 8 is not
applicable to devices
with HW revision A.
*AdbTxFramesTotal Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts Counter 32
(*AUAdbEntry 7) the total number of frames (excluding
retransmissions) that were transmitted
by the AU to the relevant SU.
*AdbDroppedFramesTotal Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts Counter 32
(*AUAdbEntry 8) the total number of intended to the
relevant SU that were dropped because
they were retransmitted by the AU to the
extent of the maximum allowed number
of retransmissions without being
acknowledged.
*AdbTxSuccessModLevel1 Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts Counter 32
(*AUAdbEntry 9) the total number of unicast frames
(excluding retransmissions) that were
successfully transmitted to the SU over
the wireless link using modulation level
1.
*AdbTxSuccess ModLevel2 Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts Counter 32
2.

255

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
*AdbTxSuccess ModLevel8 Applicable to AU/BU. Not applicable to Counter 32
(*AUAdbEntry 16) units with HW revision A. Read-only.
Counts the total number of unicast
frames (excluding retransmissions) that
were successfully transmitted to the SU
over the wireless link using modulation
level 8.
*AdbTxFailed ModLevel1 Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. Counts Counter 32
(*AUAdbEntry 17) the total number of failures to
successfully transmit a unicast
frame intended to the SU during a HW
Retry cycle using modulation level 1.

256
breezeAccessVLMib

*AdbTxFailed ModLevel8 Applicable to AU/BU. Not applicable to Counter 32
(*AUAdbEntry 24) units with HW revision A. Read-only.
Counts the total number of failures to
successfully transmit a unicast frame
intended to the SU during a HW Retry
cycle using modulation level 8.
*AdbCirTx Applicable to AU Only. Not applicable to Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 25) BreezeNET B products. Read-only. The
value configured in the relevant SU for
the CIR: Uplink parameter.
*AdbMirTx Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 26) value configured in the relevant SU for
the MIR: Uplink parameter.
*AdbCirRx Applicable to AU. Not applicable to Integer
the CIR: Downlink parameter.
*AdbMirRx Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 28) value configured in the relevant SU for
the MIR: Downlink parameter.
*AdbCirMaxDelay Applicable to AU. Not applicable to Integer
the Maximum Delay parameter.
*AdbDistance Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 30) measured distance between the 1 means any distance
relevant SU/RB and the AU/BU (In below 2 km
Kilometers).
*AdbHwRevision Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 31) HW Revision of the relevant SU/RB. hwRevisionA (1),
hwRevisionB (2),
hwRevisionC (3),
hwRevisionD (4),
hwRevisionE (5),
na(255)
*AdbCpldVer Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The DisplayString
(*AUAdbEntry 32) CPLD Version of the relevant SU/RB.
*AdbCountryCode Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 33) Country Code of the relevant SU/RB.
*AdbBootVer Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The DisplayString
(*AUAdbEntry 34) Boot Version of the relevant SU/RB.
*AdbAtpcOption Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 35) current ATPC Option of the relevant disable (1),
SU/RB. enable (2),
na(255)

257

*AdbAdapModOption Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 36) current Adaptive Modulation Option of disable (1),
the relevant SU/RB. enable (2),
na(255)
*AdbBurstModeOption Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 37) current Burst Mode Option of the disable (1),
relevant SU/RB. enable (2),
na(255)
*AdbConcatenationOption Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 39) current Concatenation Option of the disable (1),
na(255)
*AdbSecurityMode Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 41) current Security Mode of the relevant wep (1),
SU/RB. aesOCB (2),
fips197 (3)
na(255)
*AdbAuthOption Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 42) current Authentication Algorithm Option openSystem(1),
of the relevant SU/RB. sharedKey (2),
na(255)
*AdbDataEncryptOption Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 43) current Data Encryption Option of the disable (1),
na(255)
*AdbAge Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The Integer
(*AUAdbEntry 44) time in seconds elapsed since receiving
the last packet from the relevant SU/RB.
*AdbUnitName Applicable to AU/BU. Read-only. The DisplayString
(*AUAdbEntry 45) Unit Name of the relevant SU/RB.
*UpLinkQualityIndicator UpLink quality Indicator (LQI)
(*SiteSurvey 6) parameters. Applicable only to SU/RB.
*MeasureUpLinkQualityIndicator Applicable to SU/RB. Starts calculation Integer
(*UpLinkQualityIndicator 1) of LQI. The calculation will be for a start (1),
period of 10 seconds. cancel (2)
*ReadUpLinkQualityIndicator Applicable to SU/RB. Read-only. The Integer
(*UpLinkQualityIndicator 2) results of the last LQI calculation. 1-8.
*UpLinkQualityIndicatorStatus Applicable to SU/RB Only. Indicates the Integer
(*UpLinkQualityIndicator 3) test conditions. fullTest means that there fullTest (1),
are no limitations on the range of limitedTest (2)
available modulation levels, and that all
modulation levels from 1 to 8 can be
used. limitedTest indicates that the
results may not indicate the true quality
since the available range is limited - by
HW (HW Revision A), or by the
applicable parameters in the country
code, or by the configurable Maximum
Modulation Level parameter.
*MacPinpoint Applicable to AU/BU. MAC Pinpoint
(*SiteSurvey 7) parameters.
*MacPinpointTable Applicable to AU/BU. MAC Pinpoint
(*MacPinpoint 1) table. Not accessible.
*MacPinpointEntry Applicable to AU/BU. An entry in the
(MacPinpointTable 1) MAC Pinpoint table. Not accessible.
Each entry contains an Ethernet station
MAC address and the MAC address of
the wireless device used to connect it to
the wireless network

258
breezeAccessVLMib

MptEthernetStationMACAddress Applicable to AU/BU only. Read only. MAC address
(*MacPinpointEntry 1) The MAC address of the Ethernet
station. It is used as an index in the
MAC Pinpoint Table.
MptUnitMACAddress Applicable to AU/BU only. Read only. MAC address
(*MacPinpointEntry 2) The MAC address of the wireless device
used by the station with the MAC
Address from the index in order to
access the wireless network
*DrapGatewaysTable DRAP Gateways table. Not accessible.
(*SiteSurvey 8) Applicable only to AU with DRAP
Support enabled. A table holding
information on DRAP enabled gateways
connected to SUs that are served by the
AU.
*DrapGatewayEntry Not accessible. An entry in the DRAP
(*DrapGatewaysTable 1) Gateways Table.
*DrapGatewayIndex Read-only. Gateway Entry's Index Integer
(*DrapGatewaysEntry 1)
*DrapGatewayIP Read-only. The Gateway’s IP address. IP address
(*DrapGatewaysEntry 2)
*DrapGatewayType Read-only. The Gateway’s type. Integer
(*DrapGatewaysEntry 3) vgDataVoice (4),
vgData1Voice1 (5),
vgData4Voice2 (6),
vgDataVoice2 (7),
ngData4Wireless (11),
unknown (255)
*DrapGatewayNoOfActiveVoiceCalls Read-only. The current number of active Integer
(*DrapGatewaysEntry 4) voice calls handled by the Gateway.
Applicable only to Voice Gateways.

259
E.3 Supported Traps
NOTE
An * is used instead of the brzaccVL prefix.
E.3.1 Trap Variables

*Traps
*TrapSUMacAddr Applicable to AU/BU. An SU/RB MAC MAC address
(*Traps 1) address.
*TrapText Applicable to all units. Textual string for DisplayString

(*Traps 3) future use.
*TrapToggle Applicable to all units. An On/Off toggle Integer
(*Traps 4) status. on (1)
off (2)
*TrapParameterChanged Applicable to all units. A modification to one Integer
(*Traps 5) of the parameters related to IP Filtering, cirOrMir (1)
MIR/CIR or VLAN. ipFilter (2)
vlan (3)
*TrapAccessRights Applicable to all units. The access rights Integer
(*Traps 6) used for login. notLoggedIn (1)
readOnly (2)
installer (3)
administrator (4)
factory (5)
*TrapLog Applicable to all units. Login or logout to the Integer
(*Traps 7) Monitor program Telnet. telnetLogin (1)
telnetLogout (2)
*TrapTelnetUserIpAddress Applicable to all units. The IP address of a IP address
(*Traps 8) Telnet user.
*TrapRTx Applicable to AU/BU. Retransmissions rate.
(*Traps 9)
*TrapFtpOrTftpStatus Applicable to all units. successful (1)
(*Traps 10) The status of the last FTP/TFTP loading failed (2)
process.
*TrapDFSMoveFreq Applicable to AU/BU with HW revision B Integer
(*Traps 11) and lower (for units with HW revision C and
higher replaced by *TrapDFSMoveFreq
New to support a resolution of 0.5 MHz).
The new frequency in MHz after detecting
radar on a previous channel.
*TrapDFSMoveFreqNew Applicable to AU/BU. The new frequency in DisplayString
(*Traps 12) MHz after detecting radar on a previous
channel. (Replaces *TrapDFSMoveFreq to
support a resolution of 0.5 MHz for units
with HW revision C and higher).
*EthBroadcastThresholdExceeded Applicable to all units. The number of Integer
(*Traps 13) packets that were dropped by the Ethernet
broadcast/multicast limiter.

260
Supported Traps

*TrapSubscriberType Applicable to AUS only. The type of Integer
(*Traps 14) subscriber that was rejected by the AUS unknownSubscriberType(0),
(AUS can serve up to 8 SUs. Only SU-3, su-3(3)
SU-6 and SU-I are supported). su-6(6),
rb-14(14),
su-24(24),
rb-28(28),
su-54(54),
rb-100 (100)
*TrapMACAddress Applicable to BU/RB only. MAC Address
(*Traps 15) The MAC address of the BU/RB unit whose
type has been changed.
*NewUnitType Applicable to BU/RB only. Integer
(*Traps 16) The new type of the unit. bu (1),
rb (2)
*TrapSWVersion The SW version of the SU/RB-B100 with a DisplayString
(Traps 17) SW version below 4.0 that tries to associate
with a station that has Wireless Link
Prioritization Enabled
E.3.2 Private Traps
Trap (Number) Description Variables

*SUassociatedAUTRAP (2) An AU/BU trap indicating a *TrapSUMacAddr
new association with an
SU/RB.
*AUdisassociatedTRAP (3) An AU/BU trap indicating that *TrapSUMacAddr
an SU/RB has been
disassociated from the AU/BU.
The AU/BU decides that an
SU/RB has been
disassociated from it and
remove it from the ADB after
receiving from another AU/BU
a SNAP frame with the SU/RB
MAC address. The SNAP
frame indicating a network
topology change where the
SU/RB has associated with
another AU/BU will be
received if both AUs/BUs are
connected to the same
Ethernet backbone.
*AUagingTRAP (4) An AU/BU trap indicating that *TrapSUMacAddr
an SU/RB aged out and was
removed from the
Associations database
following its failure to
acknowledge a specified
number of consecutive frames.
*SUassociatedTRAP (6) An SU/RB trap indicating *AssociatedAU
association with an AU/BU. In
addition to the MAC address
information of the AU/BU, the
trap also includes information
on the average SNR of frames
received from the AU/BU.

261

*AUwirelessQualityTRAP (20) An AU/BU trap, indicating that *TrapToggle
the quality of the wireless link *TrapRTx
has changed and dropped
below (Off) or increased above
(On) a threshold defined by
the *WirelessTrapThreshold.
*PowerUpFromReset (101) An AU/BU trap indicating *UnitMacAddress
power up after reset.
*MonitorStatusTRAP (102) Applicable to all units. A trap *TrapLog
indicating that a log-in or *TrapAccessRights
log-out has been performed *TrapTelnetUserIpAddress
via Telnet. Includes the login
access right and the IP
address of the PC performing
Telnet.
*ParameterChangedTRAP(103) Applicable to all units. A trap *TrapParameterChanged
indicating a change in
CIR/MIR, IP Filter or VLAN
parameter.
*LoadingStatusTRAP(104) Applicable to all units. A trap *TrapFtpOrTftpStatus
indicating the results *UnitMacAddress
(successful or failed) of the
last FTP/TFTP loading
process.
*PromiscuousModeTRAP (105) An AU/BU trap indicating that *TrapToggle
promiscuous mode was *UnitMacAddress
enabled (on) or disabled (off)
*DFSRadarDetectedTRAP (106) An AU/BU trap indicating that *UnitMacAddress
radar was detected
*DFSFrequencyTRAP (107) An AU/BU trap indicating the
new frequency after radar was *TrapDFSMoveFreq (HW
detected. Revision B and lower).
*TrapDFSMoveFreqNew (HW
Revision C and higher).
*DFSNoFreeChannelsExistTRAP (108) An AU/BU trap indicating that *UnitMacAddress
radar was detected and there
is no free channel.
*EthBroadcastMulticatLimiterTRAP Applicable for all units. The *UnitMacAddress
(109) trap is send if the Ethernet *EthBroadcastThresholdExceeded
broadcast filter threshold is
exceeded and it contains the
number of packets that were
dropped since the last trap.
*UnsupportedSubscriberTypeTRAP (110) Applicable to AUS only. This *TrapSUMacAddr
trap is generated when a *TrapSubscriberType
subscriber unit that is not
supported tries to associate
with the AUS. The AUS
supports only up to 8 SU-3
and/or SU-6 and/or SU-I units.
*UnitTypeChangedTRAP (111) Applicable to BU/RB only. This *TrapMACAddress
trap is generated when the *NewUnitType
user changes the type of the
unit. The RB can be converted
to BU or vice versa.

262
Supported Traps

*PrioritizationNotSupportedBySUTRAP (112) Applicable to AU only. This *TrapSUMACAddress
trap is generated when an SU *TrapSWVersion
with a SW version below 4.0
that does not support Wireless
Link Prioritization is associated
with an AU with the Wireless
Link Prioritization Option
enabled.

263
F
Appendix F - Parameters Summary
In This Appendix:
The tables provide an at a glance summary of the configurable parameters,

value ranges, and default values. In addition, each parameter entry also
includes an indication as to whether the parameter is updated in run-time or
whether the unit must be reset before the modification takes effect.
F.1 Parameters Summary

F.1.1 Unit Control Parameters
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time

Change Unit Name AU, SU Up to 32 printable ASCII characters None Yes
Change Read Only AU, SU Up to 8 printable ASCII characters public No
Password
Change Installer AU, SU Up to 8 printable ASCII characters user No
Password
Change Administrator AU, SU Up to 8 printable ASCII characters private No
Password
FTP SW Version File AU, SU Up to 20 printable ASCII characters. VxWorks.bz Yes
Name An empty string is not allowed.
Configuration File Name AU, SU Up to 20 printable ASCII characters. config.cfg Yes
An empty string is not allowed.
Operator Defaults File AU, SU Up to 20 printable ASCII characters. operator.cmr Yes
Name An empty string is not allowed.
FTP Source Dir AU, SU Up to 80 printable ASCII characters. None (empty) Yes
Use “.” to clear.
FTP Server IP Address AU, SU IP address 10.0.0.253 No
FTP Gateway IP Address AU, SU IP address 0.0.0.0 No
FTP User Name AU, SU Up to 18 printable ASCII characters vx No
FTP Password AU, SU Up to 18 printable ASCII characters Vx No
FTP Log File Name AU, SU Up to 20 printable ASCII characters logfile.log Yes
FTP Log File Destination AU, SU Up to 80 printable ASCII characters. None (empty) Yes
Directory Use “.” to clear.
Event Log Policy AU, SU Message Warning Yes
Warning
Error
Fatal
Log None
Log Out Timer AU, SU 1-999 minutes 5 Yes
Ethernet Port Negotiation AU, SU Force 10 Mbps and Half-Duplex Auto Negotiation No
Mode Force 10 Mbps and Full-Duplex
Auto Negotiation
Change System Location AU, SU Up to 34 printable ASCII characters None Yes
Manual Feature Upgrade AU, SU License string: 32 to 64 hexadecimal None No
digits

266
Parameters Summary
F.1.2 IP Parameters

IP Address AU, SU IP address 10.0.0.1 No
Subnet Mask AU, SU IP address 255.0.0.0 No
Default Gateway Address AU, SU IP address 0.0.0.0 No
DHCP Option AU, SU Disable Disable No
DHCP Only
Automatic
Access to DHCP AU, SU From Wireless Only AU: From Ethernet Only No
From Ethernet Only
SU: From Wireless Only
From Both Wireless and
Ethernet
F.1.3 Air Interface Parameters

ESSID AU, SU Up to 31 printable ASCII ESSID1 No
characters
Operator ESSID Option AU Disable Enable No
Enable
Operator ESSID AU Up to 31 printable ASCII ESSID1 No
characters
Best AU Support SU Disable Disable No
Enable
Number of Scanning SU 1 – 255 4 No
Attempts
Preferred AU MAC SU MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-00 Yes
Address (no preferred AU)
Scanning Mode SU Passive, Active Passive No
Cell Distance Mode AU Automatic, Manual Automatic No
Maximum Cell Distance AU 0-54 (Km) 0 (no compensation) Yes
0 means no compensation
Fairness Factor AU 0 – 100 (%) 100 (%) No

Arbitration Inter-Frame AU, SU 1 time slot 2 time slots Yes
Spacing 2 time slots
Per SU Distance AU Disable Disable Yes
Learning Enable
Wireless Trap Threshold AU 1-100 (%) 30 (%) Yes
Maximum Number of AU AU-BS, AU-SA: 1-512 (1-124 if AU-BS, AU-SA: 512 Yes
Associations Data Encryption Option is
enabled). AUS-BS, AUS-SA: 8
AUS-BS, AUS-SA: 1-8
Sub-Band Select* AU According to the Country Code 1 No
Frequency AU According to the Sub-Band The lowest frequency in No
the Sub-Band
User Defined Frequency SU All frequencies in the available All available frequencies Yes
Subsets Sub Bands in all available Sub
Bands

267

DFS Option** AU Disable Dependent on Country No
Enable DFS Support: If DFS is
supported by the country
code then the default will
be Enable, else it will be
Disable.
Frequency Subset AU According to the Sub-Band. A A No

Definition (in AU)** list of frequency indexes or A
for all frequencies supported
by the Sub-Band
Channel Check Time** AU 1 – 3600 (seconds) 60 (seconds) No

Channel Avoidance AU 1 – 60 (minutes) 30 (minutes) No
Period**
SU Waiting Option** AU Disable Enable No
Enable
Minimum Pulses to AU 1-100 6 No
Detect**
Clear radar Detected AU Disable Disable Yes
Channels After Reset** Enable
Channel Reuse Option** AU Disable Disable No
Enable
Radar Activity AU 1 – 12 hours 5 hours No
Assessment Period**
Maximum Number of AU 1 – 10 detections 5 detections No
Detections in
Assessment Period**
Country Code Learning AU Disable Enable Yes
by SU Enable
Transmit Power AU, SU -10 dBm to a value that The highest allowed Yes
depends on HW revision , value
Country Code / Antenna Gain
and (in SU) the Max Tx Power
parameter
Maximum Tx Power SU -10 dBm to a value that The highest allowed Yes
depends on HW revision and value
Country Code / Antenna Gain
ATPC Option AU, SU Disable Enable Yes
Enable
Delta from Minimum SNR AU 4-20 (dB) Units in 5.4, 5.8 Yes
Level GHz bands: 5 (dB)
Units in the 4.9, 5.2
and 5.3 GHz bands:
8 (dB)
Minimum SNR Level AU 4-60 (dB) 28 (dB) Yes
Minimum Interval AU 1-3600 (seconds) 30 (seconds) Yes
Between ATPC
Messages
ATPC Power Level Steps AU 1-20 (dB) 4 Yes
Tx Control AU Off On Yes
On
Ethernet Status Control

268
Parameters Summary

Antenna Gain AU, 0 – 50 (dB) According to the antenna No
SU*** supplied with the unit.
Spectrum Analysis AU, SU 2 – 30 seconds 5 seconds No

Channel Scan Period
Spectrum Analysis Scan AU, SU 1 – 100 cycles 2 cycles No
Cycles
Automatic Channel AU Disable Disable No
Selection Enable (Configured
per
analysis)
Lost Beacons Watchdog AU 100 – 1000, 0 means Not 218 Yes

Threshold Used
Noise Immunity State AU, SU Automatic Automatic Yes
Control Manual
Noise Immunity Level AU, SU 0–4 0 Yes
Use only 0 or 4
Spur Immunity Level AU, SU 0–7 0 Yes
OFDM Weak Signal AU, SU 0 (not active) or 1 (active) 0 Yes
Pulse Detection AU, SU Low High Yes
Sensitivity High
* Not applicable if only one Sub-Band is available for the applicable Country Code
** Applicable only if DFS is supported by the Sub-Band
*** Configurable only in units without an integral antenna.
F.1.4 Network Management Parameters

Access to Network AU, SU From Wireless Link Only From Both Ethernet No
Management From Ethernet Only and Wireless Link
From Both Ethernet and
Wireless Link
Network Management AU, SU Disable Disable No
Filtering Activate Management IP
Filter On Ethernet Port
Activate Management IP
Filter On Wireless Port
Activate Management IP
Filter On Both Ethernet
and Wireless Ports
Set Network Management IP AU, SU IP address 0.0.0.0 No
Address (all 10 entries)
Set/Change Network AU, SU <start address> to <end 0.0.0.0 TO 0.0.0.0 No
Management IP Address address> (all 10 entries)
Ranges or,
<base address> mask <mask>
Send SNMP Traps AU, SU Disable Disable Yes
Enable

269

SNPM Traps IP Destination AU, SU IP address 0.0.0.0 No
(all 10 entries)
SNMP Traps Community AU, SU Up to 14 printable ASCII public No
characters (all 10 entries)
AP Client IP Address SU IP address 0.0.0.0 (none) Yes
F.1.5 Bridge Parameters

VLAN ID-Data SU 1 – 4094 1 No
VLAN ID – Management AU, SU 1 – 4094, 65535 65535 (no VLAN) No
VLAN Link Type AU, SU Hybrid Link Hybrid Link No
Trunk Link
Access Link (only in SU)
Service Provider Link
VLAN Forwarding Support AU, SU Disable, Enable Disable No
VLAN Forwarding ID AU, SU 1 – 4094 Empty list No
(up to 20 entries)
VLAN Relaying Support AU Disable, Enable Disable No
VLAN Relaying ID AU 1 – 4094 Empty list No
(up to 20 entries)
VLAN Priority – Data SU 0–7 0 No
VLAN Priority – AU, SU 0–7 0 No
Management
VLAN QinQ Protocol AU, SU 8100 – 9000, 9100, 9200 (hex) 8100 (hex) No
Ethertype
Service Provider VLAN ID SU 1 – 4094 1 No
Ethernet Broadcast Filtering SU Disable, Disable Yes
Options On Ethernet Port Only
On Wireless Port Only
On Both Wireless and
Ethernet Ports
DHCP Broadcast Override SU Disable Disable Yes
Filter Enable
PPPoE Broadcast Override SU Disable Disable Yes
Filter Enable
ARP Broadcast Override SU Disable Enable Yes
Filter Enable
Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast AU, SU Disable Disable Yes
Limiter Option Limit only Broadcast
Packets
Limit Multicast Packets that
are not Broadcasts
Limit All Multicast Packets
(including broadcast)
Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast AU, SU 0 – 204800 (packets/second) 50 Yes
Limiter Threshold
Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast AU, SU 1 – 60 (minutes) 5 (minutes) Yes
Limiter Send Trap Interval
Bridge Aging Time AU, SU 20 – 2000 seconds 300 No

270
Parameters Summary

Broadcast Relaying AU Disable, Enable Enable No
Unicast Relaying AU Disable Enable No
Enable
MAC Address List AU Up to 100 MAC addresses None (empty) Yes
MAC Address List Action AU Deny Deny Yes
Allow
Roaming Option SU Disable Disable No

Enable
Ethernet Port Control SU Disable Enable Yes
Enable
F.1.6 Performance Parameters

RTS Threshold AU, SU 20 – 4032 (bytes) AU: 4032 Yes
SU: 60
Minimum Contention Window AU, SU 0, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511, 15 Yes
1023
Maximum Contention AU, SU 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511, 1023 Yes
Window 1023
Maximum Modulation Level AU, SU According to the Min/Max The highest available Yes
Modulation Level defined for value
the Sub-Band
Multicast Modulation Level AU According to the Min/Max The lowest available Yes
Modulation Level defined for value
the Sub-Band
Number of HW Retries AU, SU 1 - 14 10 Yes
Average SNR Memory Factor AU, SU -1 to 32 5 Yes
Burst Mode Option* AU, SU Disable Enable No
Enable
Burst Mode Time Interval* AU, SU 1 to the value defined in the 5 milliseconds or the Yes
Sub-Band for Maximum Burst value of Maximum
Duration (milliseconds) Burst Duration
defined for the Sub-
Band (the lower of the
two values).
Adaptive Modulation Option AU, SU Disable Enable No
Enable
Minimum Interval Between AU, SU 1-3600 (seconds) 4 (seconds) Yes
Adaptive Modulation
Messages
Adaptive Modulation AU, SU Normal Normal No
Decisión Threshold High
Concatenation Option AU, SU Disable Enable No
Enable

271

Maximum Concatenated AU, SU 256 to 2200 bytes for units 2200 for units Yes
Frame Size with HW revision A or B with rev A or B
256 to 4032 bytes for units 4032 for units
with HW revision C or with rev C or
higher higher
* Applicable only if Burst Mode is supported by the Sub-Band.
F.1.7 Service Parameters

User Filtering Option SU Disable Disable Yes
IP Protocol Only
User Defined Addresses
Only
PPPoE Protocol Only
Set/Change Filter IP Address SU <start address> to <end 0.0.0.0 TO 0.0.0.0 No
Ranges address> (all 8 entries)
or,
<base address> mask <mask>
DHCP Unicast Override Filter SU Disable DHCP Unicast Disable DHCP Yes
Enable DHCP Unicast Unicast
MIR: Downlink SU SU-3: 128-3072 (Kbps) SU-3: 3072 No
SU-6: 128-6016 (Kbps) SU-6: 6016
SU-54: 128-53888 (Kbps) SU-54: 32896
SU-I: 128-6016 (Kbps) SU-I: 6016
MIR: Uplink SU SU-3: 128-2048 (Kbps) SU-3: 2048 No
SU-6: 128-4096 (Kbps) SU-6: 4096
SU-54: 128-53888 (Kbps) SU-54: 32896
SU-I: 128-2048 (Kbps) SU-I: 2048
CIR: Downlink SU SU-3: 0-2048 (Kbps) 0 (Kbps No
SU-6: 0-4096 (Kbps)
SU-54: 0-45056 (Kbps)
SU-I: 0-6016 (Kbps)
CIR: Uplink SU SU-3: 0-2048 (Kbps) 0 (Kbps) No
SU-6: 0-4096 (Kbps)
SU-54: 0-45056 (Kbps)
SU-I: 0-2048 (Kbps)
Maximum Delay SU 300 – 10,000 (ms) 5,000 (ms) No
Maximum Burst Duration AU, SU 0 – 2,000 (ms) 5 (ms) No
Graceful Degradation Limit AU 0 – 70 (%) 70 (%) No
MIR Only Option AU Disable Enable No
Enable
VLAN Priority Threshold AU, SU 0–7 7 No
ToS Prioritization Option AU, SU Disable Disable No
Enable IP Precedence
(RFC791) Prioritization
Enable DSCP (RFC2474)
Prioritization
IP Precedence Threshold AU, SU 0–7 4 No
DSCP Threshold AU, SU 0 – 63 32 No

272
Parameters Summary

UDP/TCP Port Ranges AU, SU Disable Disable No
Prioritization Option Enable Only for UDP
Enable Only for TCP
Enable for both UDP and
TCP
UDP RTP/RTCP AU, SU RTP & RTCP RTP & RTCP No
Prioritization RTP Only
TCP RTP/RTCP Prioritization AU, SU RTP & RTCP RTP & RTCP No
RTP Only
Low Priority Traffic Minimum AU, SU 0 – 100 (%) 0 (%) Yes
Percent
Wireless Link Prioritization AU Disable Disable Yes
Option* Enable
Low Priority AIFS* AU 3-254 3 Yes
Number of HW Retries for AU 1-14 10 Yes
High Priority Traffic*
Number of HW Retries for AU 1-14 10 Yes
Low Priority Traffic*
AU Burst Duration for High AU 0-40 (in 0.25 milliseconds units) 16 (4 milliseconds) Yes
Priority Traffic*
AU Burst Duration for Low AU 0-40 (in 0.25 milliseconds units) 20 (5 milliseconds) Yes
Priority Traffic*
SU Burst Duration for High AU 0-40 (in 0.25 milliseconds units) 8 (2 milliseconds) Yes
Priority Traffic*
SU Burst Duration for Low AU 0-40 (in 0.25 milliseconds units) 20 (5 milliseconds) Yes
Priority Traffic*
DRAP Support AU Disable Enable No
Enable
UDP Port AU 8000–8200 8171 No
Maximum Number Of Voice AU 1–255 40 No
Calls
DRAP TTL AU 1–255 (seconds) 10 (seconds) No
* Wireless Link Prioritization parameters are applicable only for units with a license for this
feature
F.1.8 Security Parameters

Authentication Algorithm* AU, SU Open system Open system No
Shared Key
Data Encryption Option* AU, SU Disable Disable No
Enable
Security Mode* AU, SU WEP WEP No
AES OCB
FIPS-197**
Default Key SU 1-4 1 No
Default Multicast Key AU 1-4 1 No
Key # 1 to Key # 4 AU, SU 32 hexadecimal digits 0…0 (all 0=no key) No

273

Promiscuous Authentication AU Disable Disable Yes
Enable (Disable
after reset)
* Applicable only if supported by the Sub-Band.
** The FIPS-197 option is available only in units with HW revision C or higher that have the
applicable license.

274
G
Appendix G - Troubleshooting
G.1 Ethernet Port Connection Problems
Problem and Indication Possible Cause Corrective Action

The Ethernet Integrity Indicator (the yellow Wrong type of Ethernet If connected directly to PC-use a
LED embedded in the Ethernet connector) cable crossed cable. Otherwise-use a
is off, and/or the Ethernet Activity Indicator straight cable
(the green embedded LED) does not blink
when there should be traffic on the Ethernet Faulty Ethernet cable Replace cable
port.
The unit does not respond to ping. Wrong IP configuration Make sure that the PC is on the same
subnet as the unit*.
Wrong Ethernet port Make sure that the speed and duplex
operation mode settings in the PC match the
configuration in the unit (the default is
Auto Negotiation)
* If the IP parameters of the unit are unknown, use the Set Factory Defaults utility to restore
the default factory configuration of all parameters (except to Passwords, general FTP
parameters and AU’s Frequency). The IP address of the unit after setting to factory defaults is
10.0.0.1.

276
SU Association Problems
G.2 SU Association Problems
SU does not associate with AU Wrong configuration Check proper configuration of basic parameters:
ESSID
Sub-band and frequencies subset
Best AU parameters
ATPC Option
Transmit Power
Maximum Transmit Power
Antenna Gain
Security parameters: Authentication
Algorithm, and Default Key. If necessary-use
Promiscuous Mode in AU.
Access is denied by AU Verify that the SU is not included in MAC Address
Deny List of the AU.
Link quality is too low Verify that unit is in coverage area of AU

according to radio planning.
Verify that antenna is directed toward the AU
Try to improve location/height of antenna.

277
G.3 Low Throughput Problems
Low throughput is suspected Ethernet link problems Verify proper settings of Ethernet
operation mode (actual Ethernet speed
(Check the dominant Modulation of 100 Mbps).
Level in Per rate Counters and Check Ethernet counters
see expected throughput in the
“Expected Throughput” table Wrong configuration of Verify that Maximum Modulation level is not
below) Maximum Modulation set to a value that is not too low according to
level the “Recommended Maximum Modulation
Level” table below.
Low throughput of Non-optimal configuration A value that is too low (see the
multicast/broadcast traffic of Multicast Modulation “Recommended Maximum Modulation Level”
level table below) may degrade throughput of
broadcast and multicast traffic.
High retransmissions rate Interference problems Check for interference using the Spectrum
(retransmissions rate in Analysis Mode. If necessary, change the
excess of 15%) operating frequency of the AU.
Expected Throughput in Mbps, TCP Traffic @ 20 MHz Bandwidth,

Burst Mode Enabled, Concatenation Enabled
Unit TCP Traffic Modulation Level
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SU-3 Uplink 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9
Downlink 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9
Aggregate (Bi-directional) 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3
SU-6 Uplink 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8
Downlink 4.8 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6
Aggregate (Bi-directional) 5 6.7 7 7.1 7.1 7.2 7.2 7.2
SU-54 Uplink 4.7 6.7 8.9 12.4 15.8 21 25.1 26.4
Downlink 4.8 7.1 9.4 13.7 17.7 24.7 28.9 30.1
Aggregate (Bi-directional) 4.8 7 9.3 13.1 16.9 22.8 29.4 32
* The throughput results are for net TCP traffic (excluding protocols overheads)

278
Low Throughput Problems
Recommended Maximum Modulation Level*

SNR > 23 dB 8
21 dB < SNR < 23 dB 7
16 dB< SNR < 21 dB 6
13 dB < SNR < 16 dB 5
10 dB < SNR < 13 dB 4
8 dB < SNR < 10 dB 3
7 dB < SNR < 8 dB 2
6 dB < SNR < 7 dB 1
* The maximum supported value depends on the unit’s HW revision and on the Max
Modulation Level according to the Sub-Band.

279

Manual Alvarion BreezeACCESS VL

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Alvarion BreezeACCESS VL

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Alvarion BreezeACCESS VL

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BreezeACCESS® VL

Topic Description Version/Date Issued

AUS functionality change AUS can support up to 8 SW Version 4.0,

IDU-ODU Cable Update of maximum length SW Version 4.0,

Frequency configuration Improved mechanism for SW Version 4.0,

Transmit Power, Maximum Simplified configuration SW Version 4.0,

5.3 FCC limitations Update Tx Power limitations SW Version 4.0,

Per SU Distance Learning New feature SW Version 4.0,

ATPC Delta from Minimum Default values updated SW Version 4.0,

Tx Control Added option: Ethernet SW Version 4.0,

BreezeACCESS VL System Manual

Topic Description Version/Date Issued

Service Provider Link New feature SW Version 4.0,

MAC Address List Improved functionality. SW Version 4.0,

Concatenation Improved mechanism. SW Version 4.0,

MIR Changes in values of SW Version 4.0,

IP Precedence Threshold Default value updated SW Version 4.0,

DSCP Threshold Default value updated SW Version 4.0,

Low Priority Traffic Minimum New feature SW Version 4.0,

DRAP support New feature SW Version 4.0,

Gateways Table New – display of existing SW Version 4.0,

Wireless Link Prioritization New feature SW Version 4.0,

BreezeACCESS VL System Manual

Topic Description Version/Date Issued

FTP Server IP Address Changed default to SW Version 4.0,

Number of HW Retries Maximum value was SW Version 4.0,

Ethernet packet length Updated maximum length SW Version 4.0,

Basic Parameters Table Updated according to SW Version 4.0,

Parameters that are not Updated according to SW Version 4.0,

Parameters that are not Updated according to SW Version 4.0,

Basic Configuration Menu Updated according to SW Version 4.0,

MIB (Appendix E) Updated according to SW Version 4.0,

Parameters Summary Updated according to SW Version 4.0,

Using the Feature License Removed (previously SW Version 4.0,

BreezeACCESS VL System Manual

Topic Description Version/Date Issued

SU-A-H removed SU-A-H (SU with horizonally SW Version 4.0.27

IDU PS1036 removed from Replaced by PS1073 SW Version 4.0.27

Q in Q (Service Provider Improved handling of SW Version 4.0.27

DRAP UDP Port Default changed to 8171 SW Version 4.0.27

MIR/CIR parameters of SU-I Updated SW Version 4.0.27

AUS supports also SU-I Updated functionality SW Version 4.0.27

Password Recovery New feature – a procedure SW Version 4.0.27

BreezeACCESS VL System Manual

Topic Description Version/Date Issued

Noise Immunity Control New feature SW Version 4.0.27

BreezeACCESS VL System Manual

Warranties and Disclaimers

BreezeACCESS VL System Manual

Bug fixes, temporary patches and/or workarounds may be supplied as Firmware

Additional hardware, if required, to install or use Firmware updates must be

ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING

(b) PURCHASER’S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES

BreezeACCESS VL System Manual

GENERATED. ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. ALVARION’

(b) TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL

Electronic Emission Notices

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1 This device may not cause harmful interference.

FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement